Cleavage of nucleic acids

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to means for cleaving a nucleic acid cleavage structure in a site-specific manner. Enzymes, including 5′ nucleases and 3′ exonucleases, are used to detect and identify nucleic acids derived from microorganisms. Methods are provided which allow for the detection and identification of bacterial and viral pathogens in a sample.

The present application is a Continuation of co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 09/940,925, filed Aug. 28, 2001, which is a Divisional application of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/655,378, filed Sep. 5, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,673,616, which is a Continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/520,946, filed Aug. 30, 1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,372,424, which is a Continuation-in-Part application of U.S. appliation Ser. No. 08/484,956, filed Jun. 7, 1995, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,843,654, which is a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/402,601, filed Mar. 9, 1995, now abandoned, which is a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. application Serial No. 08/337,164, filed Nov. 11, 1994, now abandoned, which is a Continuation-in-Part of U.S. application Serial No. 08/254,359, filed Jun. 6, 1994, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,614,402, which is a Continuation-In-Part Application of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/073,384, filed Jun. 4, 1993, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,541,311, which is a Continuation-In-Part of U.S. application Ser. No. 07/986,330, filed Dec. 7, 1992, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,422,253, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating nucleic acid, and in particular, methods and compositions for detection and characterization of nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The detection and characterization of specific nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes have been utilized to detect the presence of viral or bacterial nucleic acid sequences indicative of an infection, the presence of variants or alleles of mammalian genes associated with disease and cancers, and the identification of the source of nucleic acids found in forensic samples, as well as in paternity determinations.

Various methods are known in the art which may be used to detect and characterize specific nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes. Nonetheless, as nucleic acid sequence data of the human genome, as well as the genomes of pathogenic organisms accumulates, the demand for fast, reliable, cost-effective and user-friendly tests for specific sequences continues to grow. Importantly, these tests must be able to create a detectable signal from a very low copy number of the sequence of interest. The following discussion examines three levels of nucleic acid detection currently in use: I. Signal Amplification Technology for detection of rare sequences; II. Direct Detection Technology for detection of higher copy number sequences; and III. Detection of Unknown Sequence Changes for rapid screening of sequence changes anywhere within a defined DNA fragment.

I. Signal Amplification Technology Methods for Amplification

The “Polymerase Chain Reaction” (PCR) comprises the first generation of methods for nucleic acid amplification. However, several other methods have been developed that employ the same basis of specificity, but create signal by different amplification mechanisms. These methods include the “Ligase Chain Reaction” (LCR), “Self-Sustained Synthetic Reaction” (3SR/NASBA), and “Qβ-Replicase” (Qβ).

Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR)

The polymerase chain reaction (PCR), as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202 to Mullis and Mullis et al., describe a method for increasing the concentration of a segment of target sequence in a mixture of genomic DNA without cloning or purification. This technology provides one approach to the problems of low target sequence concentration. PCR can be used to directly increase the concentration of the target to an easily detectable level. This process for amplifying the target sequence involves introducing a molar excess of two oligonucleotide primers which are complementary to their respective strands of the double-stranded target sequence to the DNA mixture containing the desired target sequence. The mixture is denatured and then allowed to hybridize. Following hybridization, the primers are extended with polymerase so as to form complementary strands. The steps of denaturation, hybridization, and polymerase extension can be repeated as often as needed, in order to obtain relatively high concentrations of a segment of the desired target sequence.

The length of the segment of the desired target sequence is determined by the relative positions of the primers with respect to each other, and, therefore, this length is a controllable parameter. Because the desired segments of the target sequence become the dominant sequences (in terms of concentration) in the mixture, they are said to be “PCR-amplified.”

Ligase Chain Reaction (LCR or LAR)

The ligase chain reaction (LCR; sometimes referred to as “Ligase Amplification Reaction” (LAR) described by Barany, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 88:189 (1991); Barany, PCR Methods and Applic., 1:5 (1991); and Wu and Wallace, Genomics 4:560 (1989) has developed into a well-recognized alternative method for amplifying nucleic acids. In LCR, four oligonucleotides, two adjacent oligonucleotides which uniquely hybridize to one strand of target DNA, and a complementary set of adjacent oligonucleotides, which hybridize to the opposite strand are mixed and DNA ligase is added to the mixture. Provided that there is complete complementarity at the junction, ligase will covalently link each set of hybridized molecules. Importantly, in LCR, two probes are ligated together only when they base-pair with sequences in the target sample, without gaps or mismatches. Repeated cycles of denaturation, hybridization and ligation amplify a short segment of DNA. LCR has also been used in combination with PCR to achieve enhanced detection of single-base changes. Segev, PCT Public. No. W09001069 A1 (1990). However, because the four oligonucleotides used in this assay can pair to form two short ligatable fragments, there is the potential for the generation of target-independent background signal. The use of LCR for mutant screening is limited to the examination of specific nucleic acid positions.

Self-Sustained Synthetic Reaction (3SR/NASBA)

The self-sustained sequence replication reaction (3SR) (Guatelli et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 87:1874-1878 (1990), with an erratum at Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 87:7797 (1990)) is a transcription-based in vitro amplification system (Kwok et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 86:1173-1177 (1989)) that can exponentially amplify RNA sequences at a uniform temperature. The amplified RNA can then be utilized for mutation detection (Fahy et al., PCR Meth. Appl., 1:25-33 (1991)). In this method, an oligonucleotide primer is used to add a phage RNA polymerase promoter to the 5′ end of the sequence of interest. In a cocktail of enzymes and substrates that includes a second primer, reverse transcriptase, RNase H, RNA polymerase and ribo-and deoxyribonucleoside triphosphates, the target sequence undergoes repeated rounds of transcription, cDNA synthesis and second-strand synthesis to amplify the area of interest. The use of 3SR to detect mutations is kinetically limited to screening small segments of DNA (e.g., 200-300 base pairs).

Q-Beta (Qβ) Replicase

In this method, a probe which recognizes the sequence of interest is attached to the replicatable RNA template for Qβ replicase. A previously identified major problem with false positives resulting from the replication of unhybridized probes has been addressed through use of a sequence-specific ligation step. However, available thermostable DNA ligases are not effective on this RNA substrate, so the ligation must be performed by T4 DNA ligase at low temperatures (37° C.). This prevents the use of high temperature as a means of achieving specificity as in the LCR, the ligation event can be used to detect a mutation at the junction site, but not elsewhere.

Table 1 below, lists some of the features desirable for systems useful in sensitive nucleic acid diagnostics, and summarizes the abilities of each of the major amplification methods (See also, Landgren, Trends in Genetics 9:199 (1993)).

A successful diagnostic method must be very specific. A straight-forward method of controlling the specificity of nucleic acid hybridization is by controlling the temperature of the reaction. While the 3SR/NASBA, and Qβ systems are all able to generate a large quantity of signal, one or more of the enzymes involved in each cannot be used at high temperature (i.e., >55° C.). Therefore the reaction temperatures cannot be raised to prevent non-specific hybridization of the probes. If probes are shortened in order to make them melt more easily at low temperatures, the likelihood of having more than one perfect match in a complex genome increases. For these reasons, PCR and LCR currently dominate the research field in detection technologies. TABLE 1 METHOD: PCR & 3SR FEATURE PCR LCR LCR NASBA Qβ Amplifies Target + + + + Recognition of Independent + + + + + Sequences Required Performed at High Temp. + + Operates at Fixed Temp. + + Exponential Amplification + + + + + Generic Signal Generation + Easily Automatable

The basis of the amplification procedure in the PCR and LCR is the fact that the products of one cycle become usable templates in all subsequent cycles, consequently doubling the population with each cycle. The final yield of any such doubling system can be expressed as: (1+X)^(n)=y, where “X” is the mean efficiency (percent copied in each cycle), “n” is the number of cycles, and “y” is the overall efficiency, or yield of the reaction (Mullis, PCR Methods Applic., 1:1 (1991)). If every copy of a target DNA is utilized as a template in every cycle of a polymerase chain reaction, then the mean efficiency is 100%. If 20 cycles of PCR are performed, then the yield will be 2²⁰, or 1,048,576 copies of the starting material. If the reaction conditions reduce the mean efficiency to 85%, then the yield in those 20 cycles will be only 1.85²⁰, or 220,513 copies of the starting material. In other words, a PCR running at 85% efficiency will yield only 21% as much final product, compared to a reaction running at 100% efficiency. A reaction that is reduced to 50% mean efficiency will yield less than 1% of the possible product.

In practice, routine polymerase chain reactions rarely achieve the theoretical maximum yield, and PCRs are usually run for more than 20 cycles to compensate for the lower yield. At 50% mean efficiency, it would take 34 cycles to achieve the million-fold amplification theoretically possible in 20, and at lower efficiencies, the number of cycles required becomes prohibitive. In addition, any background products that amplify with a better mean efficiency than the intended target will become the dominant products.

Also, many variables can influence the mean efficiency of PCR, including target DNA length and secondary structure, primer length and design, primer and dNTP concentrations, and buffer composition, to name but a few. Contamination of the reaction with exogenous DNA (e.g., DNA spilled onto lab surfaces) or cross-contamination is also a major consideration. Reaction conditions must be carefully optimized for each different primer pair and target sequence, and the process can take days, even for an experienced investigator. The laboriousness of this process, including numerous technical considerations and other factors, presents a significant drawback to using PCR in the clinical setting. Indeed, PCR has yet to penetrate the clinical market in a significant way. The same concerns arise with LCR, as LCR must also be optimized to use different oligonucleotide sequences for each target sequence. In addition, both methods require expensive equipment, capable of precise temperature cycling.

Many applications of nucleic acid detection technologies, such as in studies of allelic variation, involve not only detection of a specific sequence in a complex background, but also the discrimination between sequences with few, or single, nucleotide differences. One method for the detection of allele-specific variants by PCR is based upon the fact that it is difficult for Taq polymerase to synthesize a DNA strand when there is a mismatch between the template strand and the 3′ end of the primer. An allele-specific variant may be detected by the use of a primer that is perfectly matched with only one of the possible alleles; the mismatch to the other allele acts to prevent the extension of the primer, thereby preventing the amplification of that sequence. This method has a substantial limitation in that the base composition of the mismatch influences the ability to prevent extension across the mismatch, and certain mismatches do not prevent extension or have only a minimal effect (Kwok et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 18:999 (1990)).

A similar 3′-mismatch strategy is used with greater effect to prevent ligation in the LCR (Barany, PCR Meth. Applic., 1:5 (1991)). Any mismatch effectively blocks the action of the thermostable ligase, but LCR still has the drawback of target-independent background ligation products initiating the amplification. Moreover, the combination of PCR with subsequent LCR to identify the nucleotides at individual positions is also a clearly cumbersome proposition for the clinical laboratory.

II. Direct Detection Technology

When a sufficient amount of a nucleic acid to be detected is available, there are advantages to detecting that sequence directly, instead of making more copies of that target, (e.g., as in PCR and LCR). Most notably, a method that does not amplify the signal exponentially is more amenable to quantitative analysis. Even if the signal is enhanced by attaching multiple dyes to a single oligonucleotide, the correlation between the final signal intensity and amount of target is direct. Such a system has an additional advantage that the products of the reaction will not themselves promote further reaction, so contamination of lab surfaces by the products is not as much of a concern. Traditional methods of direct detection including Northern and Southern blotting and RNase protection assays usually require the use of radioactivity and are not amenable to automation. Recently devised techniques have sought to eliminate the use of radioactivity and/or improve the sensitivity in automatable formats. Two examples are the “Cycling Probe Reaction” (CPR), and “Branched DNA” (bDNA)

The cycling probe reaction (CPR) (Duck et al., BioTech., 9:142 (1990)), uses a long chimeric oligonucleotide in which a central portion is made of RNA while the two termini are made of DNA. Hybridization of the probe to a target DNA and exposure to a thermostable RNase H causes the RNA portion to be digested. This destabilizes the remaining DNA portions of the duplex, releasing the remainder of the probe from the target DNA and allowing another probe molecule to repeat the process. The signal, in the form of cleaved probe molecules, accumulates at a linear rate. While the repeating process increases the signal, the RNA portion of the oligonucleotide is vulnerable to RNases that may carried through sample preparation.

Branched DNA (bDNA), described by Urdea et al., Gene 61:253-264 (1987), involves oligonucleotides with branched structures that allow each individual oligonucleotide to carry 35 to 40 labels (e.g., alkaline phosphatase enzymes). While this enhances the signal from a hybridization event, signal from non-specific binding is similarly increased.

III. Detection of Unknown Sequence Changes

The demand for tests which allow the detection of specific nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes is growing rapidly in clinical diagnostics. As nucleic acid sequence data for genes from humans and pathogenic organisms accumulates, the demand for fast, cost-effective, and easy-to-use tests for as yet unknown mutations within specific sequences is rapidly increasing.

A handful of methods have been devised to scan nucleic acid segments for mutations. One option is to determine the entire gene sequence of each test sample (e.g., a bacterial isolate). For sequences under approximately 600 nucleotides, this may be accomplished using amplified material (e.g., PCR reaction products). This avoids the time and expense associated with cloning the segment of interest. However, specialized equipment and highly trained personnel are required, and the method is too labor-intense and expensive to be practical and effective in the clinical setting.

In view of the difficulties associated with sequencing, a given segment of nucleic acid may be characterized on several other levels. At the lowest resolution, the size of the molecule can be determined by electrophoresis by comparison to a known standard run on the same gel. A more detailed picture of the molecule may be achieved by cleavage with combinations of restriction enzymes prior to electrophoresis, to allow construction of an ordered map. The presence of specific sequences within the fragment can be detected by hybridization of a labeled probe, or the precise nucleotide sequence can be determined by partial chemical degradation or by primer extension in the presence of chain-terminating nucleotide analogs.

For detection of single-base differences between like sequences, the requirements of the analysis are often at the highest level of resolution. For cases in which the position of the nucleotide in question is known in advance, several methods have been developed for examining single base changes without direct sequencing. For example, if a mutation of interest happens to fall within a restriction recognition sequence, a change in the pattern of digestion can be used as a diagnostic tool (e.g., restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) analysis).

Single point mutations have been also detected by the creation or destruction of RFLPs. Mutations are detected and localized by the presence and size of the RNA fragments generated by cleavage at the mismatches. Single nucleotide mismatches in DNA heteroduplexes are also recognized and cleaved by some chemicals, providing an alternative strategy to detect single base substitutions, generically named the “Mismatch Chemical Cleavage” (MCC) (Gogos et aL, Nucl. Acids Res., 18:6807-6817 (1990)). However, this method requires the use of osmium tetroxide and piperidine, two highly noxious chemicals which are not suited for use in a clinical laboratory.

RFLP analysis suffers from low sensitivity and requires a large amount of sample. When RFLP analysis is used for the detection of point mutations, it is, by its nature, limited to the detection of only those single base changes which fall within a restriction sequence of a known restriction endonuclease. Moreover, the majority of the available enzymes have 4 to 6 base-pair recognition sequences, and cleave too frequently for many large-scale DNA manipulations (Eckstein and Lilley (eds.), Nucleic Acids and Molecular Biology, vol. 2, Springer-Verlag, Heidelberg (1988)). Thus, it is applicable only in a small fraction of cases, as most mutations do not fall within such sites.

A handful of rare-cutting restriction enzymes with 8 base-pair specificities have been isolated and these are widely used in genetic mapping, but these enzymes are few in number, are limited to the recognition of G+C-rich sequences, and cleave at sites that tend to be highly clustered (Barlow and Lehrach, Trends Genet., 3:167 (1987)). Recently, endonucleases encoded by group I introns have been discovered that might have greater than 12 base-pair specificity (Perlman and Butow, Science 246:1106 (1989)), but again, these are few in number.

If the change is not in a recognition sequence, then allele-specific oligonucleotides (ASOs), can be designed to hybridize in proximity to the unknown nucleotide, such that a primer extension or ligation event can be used as the indicator of a match or a mis-match. Hybridization with radioactively labeled allelic specific oligonucleotides (ASO) also has been applied to the detection of specific point mutations (Conner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 80:278-282 (1983)). The method is based on the differences in the melting temperature of short DNA fragments differing by a single nucleotide. Stringent hybridization and washing conditions can differentiate between mutant and wild-type alleles. The ASO approach applied to PCR products also has been extensively utilized by various researchers to detect and characterize point mutations in ras genes (Vogelstein et al., N. Eng. J. Med., 319:525-532 (1988); and Farr et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 85:1629-1633 (1988)), and gsp/gip oncogenes (Lyons et al., Science 249:655-659 (1990)). Because of the presence of various nucleotide changes in multiple positions, the ASO method requires the use of many oligonucleotides to cover all possible oncogenic mutations.

With either of the techniques described above (i.e., RFLP and ASO), the precise location of the suspected mutation must be known in advance of the test. That is to say, they are inapplicable when one needs to detect the presence of a mutation of an unknown character and position within a gene or sequence of interest.

Two other methods rely on detecting changes in electrophoretic mobility in response to minor sequence changes. One of these methods, termed “Denaturing Gradient Gel Electrophoresis” (DGGE) is based on the observation that slightly different sequences will display different patterns of local melting when electrophoretically resolved on a gradient gel. In this manner, variants can be distinguished, as differences in melting properties of homoduplexes versus heteroduplexes differing in a single nucleotide can detect the presence of mutations in the target sequences because of the corresponding changes in their electrophoretic mobilities. The fragments to be analyzed, usually PCR products, are “clamped” at one end by a long stretch of G-C base pairs (30-80) to allow complete denaturation of the sequence of interest without complete dissociation of the strands. The attachment of a GC “clamp” to the DNA fragments increases the fraction of mutations that can be recognized by DGGE (Abrams et al., Genomics 7:463-475 (1990)). Attaching a GC clamp to one primer is critical to ensure that the amplified sequence has a low dissociation temperature (Sheffield et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 86:232-236 (1989); and Lerman and Silverstein, Meth. Enzymol., 155:482-501 (1987)). Modifications of the technique have been developed, using temperature gradients (Wartell et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 18:2699-2701 (1990)), and the method can be also applied to RNA:RNA duplexes (Smith et al., Genomics 3:217-223 (1988)).

Limitations on the utility of DGGE include the requirement that the denaturing conditions must be optimized for each type of DNA to be tested. Furthermore, the method requires specialized equipment to prepare the gels and maintain the needed high temperatures during electrophoresis. The expense associated with the synthesis of the clamping tail on one oligonucleotide for each sequence to be tested is also a major consideration. In addition, long running times are required for DGGE. The long running time of DGGE was shortened in a modification of DGGE called constant denaturant gel electrophoresis (CDGE) (Borrensen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:8405 (1991)). CDGE requires that gels be performed under different denaturant conditions in order to reach high efficiency for the detection of unknown mutations.

An technique analogous to DGGE, termed temperature gradient gel electrophoresis (TGGE), uses a thermal gradient rather than a chemcial denaturant gradient (Scholz, et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 2:2155 (1993)). TGGE requires the use of specialized equipment which can generate a temperature gradient perpendicularly oriented relative to the electrical field. TGGE can detect mutations in relatively small fragments of DNA therefore scanning of large gene segments requires the use of multiple PCR products prior to running the gel.

Another common method, called “Single-Strand Conformation Polymorphism” (SSCP) was developed by Hayashi, Sekya and colleagues (reviewed by Hayashi, PCR Meth. Appl., 1:34-38, (1991)) and is based on the observation that single strands of nucleic acid can take on characteristic conformations in non-denaturing conditions, and these conformations influence electrophoretic mobility. The complementary strands assume sufficiently different structures that one strand may be resolved from the other. Changes in sequences within the fragment will also change the conformation, consequently altering the mobility and allowing this to be used as an assay for sequence variations (Orita, et al., Genomics 5:874-879, (1989)).

The SSCP process involves denaturing a DNA segment (e.g., a PCR product) that is labelled on both strands, followed by slow electrophoretic separation on a non-denaturing polyacrylamide gel, so that intra-molecular interactions can form and not be disturbed during the run. This technique is extremely sensitive to variations in gel composition and temperature. A serious limitation of this method is the relative difficulty encountered in comparing data generated in different laboratories, under apparently similar conditions.

The dideoxy fingerprinting (ddF) is another technique developed to scan genes for the presence of unknown mutations (Liu and Sommer, PCR Methods Appli., 4:97 (1994)). The ddF technique combines components of Sanger dideoxy sequencing with SSCP. A dideoxy sequencing reaction is performed using one dideoxy terminator and then the reaction products are electrophoresised on nondenaturing polyacrylamide gels to detect alterations in mobility of the termination segments as in SSCP analysis. While ddF is an improvement over SSCP in terms of increased sensitivity, ddF requires the use of expensive dideoxynucleotides and this technique is still limited to the analysis of fragments of the size suitable for SSCP (i.e., fragments of 200-300 bases for optimal detection of mutations).

In addition to the above limitations, all of these methods are limited as to the size of the nucleic acid fragment that can be analyzed. For the direct sequencing approach, sequences of greater than 600 base pairs require cloning, with the consequent delays and expense of either deletion sub-cloning or primer walking, in order to cover the entire fragment. SSCP and DGGE have even more severe size limitations. Because of reduced sensitivity to sequence changes, these methods are not considered suitable for larger fragments. Although SSCP is reportedly able to detect 90% of single-base substitutions within a 200 base-pair fragment, the detection drops to less than 50% for 400 base pair fragments. Similarly, the sensitivity of DGGE decreases as the length of the fragment reaches 500 base-pairs. The ddF technique, as a combination of direct sequencing and SSCP, is also limited by the relatively small size of the DNA that can be screened.

Clearly, there remains a need for a method that is less sensitive to size so that entire genes, rather than gene fragments, may be analyzed. Such a tool must also be robust, so that data from different labs, generated by researchers of diverse backgrounds and skills will be comparable. Ideally, such a method would be compatible with “multiplexing,” (i.e., the simultaneous analysis of several molecules or genes in a single reaction or gel lane, usually resolved from each other by differential labelling or probing). Such an analytical procedure would facilitate the use of internal standards for subsequent analysis and data comparison, and increase the productivity of personnel and equipment. The ideal method would also be easily automatable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating nucleic acid, and in particular, methods and compositions for detection and characterization of nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes in microbial gene sequences. The present invention provides means for cleaving a nucleic acid cleavage structure in a site-specific manner. In one embodiment, the means for cleaving is an enzyme capable of cleaving cleavage structures on a nucleic acid substrate, forming the basis of a novel method of detection of specific nucleic acid sequences. The present invention contemplates use of the novel detection method for, among other uses, clinical diagnostic purposes, including but not limited to detection and identification of pathogenic organisms.

In one embodiment, the present invention contemplates a DNA sequence encoding a DNA polymerase altered in sequence (i.e., a “mutant” DNA polymerase) relative to the native sequence such that it exhibits altered DNA synthetic activity from that of the native (i.e., “wild type”) DNA polymerase. With regard to the polymerase, a complete absence of synthesis is not required; it is desired that cleavage reactions occur in the absence of polymerase activity at a level where it interferes with the method. It is preferred that the encoded DNA polymerase is altered such that it exhibits reduced synthetic activity from that of the native DNA polymerase. In this manner, the enzymes of the invention are nucleases and are capable of cleaving nucleic acids in a structure-specific manner. Importantly, the nucleases of the present invention are capable of cleaving cleavage structures to create discrete cleavage products.

The present invention contemplates nucleases from a variety of sources, including nucleases that are thermostable. Thermostable nucleases are contemplated as particularly useful, as they are capable of operating at temperatures where nucleic acid hybridization is extremely specific, allowing for allele-specific detection (including single-base mismatches). In one embodiment, the thermostable 5′ nucleases are selected from the group consisting of altered polymerases derived from the native polymerases of various Thermus species, including, but not limited to Thermus aquaticus, Thermus flavus and Thermus thermophilus.

The present invention utilizes such enzymes in methods for detection and characterization of nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes. The present invention relates to means for cleaving a nucleic acid cleavage structure in a site-specific manner. Nuclease activity is used to screen for known and unknown mutations, including single base changes, in nucleic acids.

In one embodiment, the present invention contemplates a process or method for identifying strains of microorganisms comprising the steps of providing a cleavage means and a nucleic acid substrate containing sequences derived from one or more microorganism; treating the nucleic acid substrate under conditions such that the substrate forms one or more cleavage structures; and reacting the cleavage means with the cleavage structures so that one or more cleavage products are produced. In one embodiment of this invention, the cleavage means is an enzyme. In one preferred embodiment, the enzyme is a nuclease. In an alternative preferred embodiment, the nuclease is selected from the group consisting of CLEAVASE BN, Thermus aquaticus DNA polymerase, Thermus thermophilus DNA polymerase, Escherichia coli Exo III, and the Saccharomyces cerevisiae Rad1/Rad10 complex. It is also contemplated that the enzyme may have a portion of its amino acid sequence that is homologous to a portion of the amino acid sequence of a thermostable DNA polymerase derived from a eubacterial thermophile, the latter being selected from the group consisting of Thermus aquaticus, Thermus flavus and Thermus thermophilus.

It is contemplated that the nucleic acid substrate comprise a nucleotide analog, including but not limited to the group comprising 7-deaza-dATP, 7-deaza-dGTP and dUTP. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid substrate is substantially single-stranded. It is not intended that the nucleic acid substrate be limited to any particular form, indeed, it is contemplated that the nucleic acid substrate is single stranded or double-stranded RNA or DNA.

In one embodiment of the present invention, the treating step comprises rendering double-stranded nucleic acid substantially single-stranded, and exposing the single-stranded nucleic acid to conditions such that the single-stranded nucleic acid assumes a secondary or characteristic folded structure. In one preferred embodiment, double-stranded nucleic acid is rendered substantially single-stranded by increased temperature.

In an alternative embodiment, the method of the present invention further comprises the step of detecting one or more cleavage products.

It is contemplated that the microorganism(s) of the present invention be selected from a variety of microorganisms. It is not intended that the present invention be limited to any particular type of microorganism. Rather, it is intended that the present invention be used with organisms including, but not limited to, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, ciliates, and viruses. It is not intended that the microorganisms be limited to a particular genus, species, strain, or serotype. Indeed, it is contemplated that the bacteria be selected from the group including, but not limited to members of the genera Campylobacter, Escherichia, Mycobacterium, Salmonella, Shigella, and Staphylococcus. In one preferred embodiment, the microorganism(s) comprise strains of multi-drug resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis. It is also contemplated that the present invention be used with viruses, including but not limited to hepatitis C virus and simian immunodeficiency virus.

Another embodiment of the present invention contemplates a method for detecting and identifying strains of microorganisms, comprising the steps of extracting nucleic acid from a sample suspected of containing one or more microorganisms; and contacting the extracted nucleic acid with a cleavage means under conditions such that the extracted nucleic acid forms one or more secondary structures, and the cleavage means cleaves the secondary structures to produce one or more cleavage products.

In one embodiment, the method further comprises the step of separating the cleavage products. In yet another embodiment, the method further comprises the step of detecting the cleavage products.

In one preferred embodiment, the present invention further comprises comparing the detected cleavage products generated from cleavage of the extracted nucleic acid isolated from the sample with separated cleavage products generated by cleavage of nucleic acids derived from one or more reference microorganisms. In such a case the sequence of the nucleic acids from one or more reference microorganisms may be related but different (e.g., a wild type control for a mutant sequence or a known or previously characterized mutant sequence).

In an alternative preferred embodiment, the present invention further comprises the step of isolating a polymorphic locus from the extracted nucleic acid after the extraction step, so as to generate a nucleic acid substrate, wherein the substrate is contacted with the cleavage means. In one embodiment, the isolation of a polymorphic locus is accomplished by polymerase chain reaction amplification. In an alternate embodiment, the polymerase chain reaction is conducted in the presence of a nucleotide analog, including but not limited to the group comprising 7-deaza-dATP, 7-deaza-dGTP and dUTP. It is contemplated that the polymerase chain reaction amplification will employ oligonucleotide primers matching or complementary to consensus gene sequences derived from the polymorphic locus. In one embodiment, the polymorphic locus comprises a ribosomal RNA gene. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the ribosomal RNA gene is a 16S ribosomal RNA gene.

In one embodiment of this method, the cleavage means is an enzyme. In one preferred embodiment, the enzyme is a nuclease. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the nuclease is selected from the group including, but not limited to CLEAVASE BN, Thermus aquaticus DNA polymerase, Thermus thermophilus DNA polymerase, Escherichia coli Exo III, and the Saccharomyces cerevisiae Rad1/Rad10 complex. It is also contemplated that the enzyme may have a portion of its amino acid sequence that is homologous to a portion of the amino acid sequence of a thermostable DNA polymerase derived from a eubacterial thermophile, the latter being selected from the group consisting of Thermus aquaticus, Thermus flavus and Thermus thermophilus.

It is contemplated that the nucleic acid substrate of this method will comprise a nucleotide analog, including but not limited to the group comprising 7-deaza-dATP, 7-deaza-dGTP and dUTP. In one embodiment, the nucleic acid substrate is substantially single-stranded. It is not intended that the nucleic acid substrate be limited to any particular form, indeed, it is contemplated that the nucleic acid substrate is single stranded or double-stranded RNA or DNA.

In another embodiment of the present invention, the treating step of the method comprises rendering double-stranded nucleic acid substantially single-stranded, and exposing the single-stranded nucleic acid to conditions such that the single-stranded nucleic acid has secondary structure. In one preferred embodiment, double-stranded nucleic acid is rendered substantially single-stranded by increased temperature.

It is contemplated that the microorganism(s) of the present invention be selected from a variety of microorganisms; it is not intended that the present invention be limited to any particular type of microorganism. Rather, it is intended that the present invention will be used with organisms including, but not limited to, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, ciliates, and viruses. It is not intended that the microorganisms be limited to a particular genus, species, strain, or serotype. Indeed, it is contemplated that the bacteria be selected from the group comprising, but not limited to members of the genera Campylobacter, Escherichia, Mycobacterium, Salmonella, Shigella, and Staphylococcus. In one preferred embodiment, the microorganism(s) comprise strains of multi-drug resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis. It is also contemplated that the present invention be used with viruses, including but not limited to hepatitis C virus and simian immunodeficiency virus.

In yet another embodiment, the present invention contemplates a method for treating nucleic acid comprising an oligonucleotide containing microbial gene sequences, comprising providing a cleavage means in a solution containing manganese and nucleic acid substrate containing microbial gene sequences; treating the nucleic acid substrate with increased temperature such that the substrate is substantially single-stranded; reducing the temperature under conditions such that the single-stranded substrate forms one or more cleavage structures; reacting the cleavage means with the cleavage structures so that one or more cleavage products are produced; and detecting the one or more cleavage products produced by the method.

The present invention also contemplates a process for creating a record reference library of genetic fingerprints characteristic (i.e., diagnostic) of one or more alleles of the various microorganisms, comprising the steps of providing a cleavage means and nucleic acid substrate derived from microbial gene sequences; contacting the nucleic acid substrate with a cleavage means under conditions such that the extracted nucleic acid forms one or more secondary structures and the cleavage means cleaves the secondary structures, resulting in the generation of multiple cleavage products; separating the multiple cleavage products; and maintaining a testable record reference of the separated cleavage products.

By the term “genetic fingerprint” it is meant that changes in the sequence of the nucleic acid (e.g., a deletion, insertion or a single point substitution) alter the structures formed, thus changing the banding pattern (i.e., the “fingerprint” or “bar code”) to reflect the difference in the sequence, allowing rapid detection and identification of variants.

The methods of the present invention allow for simultaneous analysis of both strands (e.g., the sense and antisense strands) and are ideal for high-level multiplexing. The products produced are amenable to qualitative, quantitative and positional analysis. The methods may be automated and may be practiced in solution or in the solid phase (e.g., on a solid support). The methods are powerful in that they allow for analysis of longer fragments of nucleic acid than current methodologies.

DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1A provides a schematic of one embodiment of the detection method of the present invention.

FIG. 1B provides a schematic of a second embodiment of the detection method of the present invention.

FIG. 2A-H is a comparison of the nucleotide structure of the DNAP genes isolated from Thermus aquaticus (SEQ ID NO:1), Thermus flavus (SEQ ID NO:2) and Thermus thermophilus (SEQ ID NO:3); the consensus sequence (SEQ ID NO:7) is shown at the top of each row.

FIG. 3A-C is a comparison of the amino acid sequence of the DNAP isolated from Thermus aquaticus (SEQ ID NO:4), Thermus flavus (SEQ ID NO:5), and Thermus thermophilus (SEQ ID NO:6); the consensus sequence (SEQ ID NO:8) is shown at the top of each row.

FIGS. 4A-G are a set of diagrams of wild-type and synthesis-deficient DNAPTaq genes.

FIG. 5A depicts the wild-type Thermus flavus polymerase gene.

FIG. 5B depicts a synthesis-deficient Thermus flavus polymerase gene.

FIG. 6 depicts a structure (SEQ ID NOS:15 and 17) which cannot be amplified using DNAPTaq.

FIG. 7 is a ethidium bromide-stained gel demonstrating attempts to amplify a bifurcated duplex using either DNAPTaq or DNAPStf (Stoffel).

FIG. 8 is an autoradiogram of a gel analyzing the cleavage of a bifurcated duplex by DNAPTaq and lack of cleavage by DNAPStf.

FIGS. 9A-B are a set of autoradiograms of gels analyzing cleavage or lack of cleavage upon addition of different reaction components and change of incubation temperature during attempts to cleave a bifurcated duplex with DNAPTaq.

FIGS. 10-B are an autoradiogram displaying timed cleavage reactions, with and without primer.

FIGS. 11A-B are a set of autoradiograms of gels demonstrating attempts to cleave a bifurcated duplex (with and without primer) with various DNAPs.

FIGS. 12A shows the substrates (SEQ ID NO:32) and oligonucleotides (SEQ ID NOS:18 and 19) used to test the specific cleavage of substrate DNAs targeted by pilot oligonucleotides.

FIG. 12B shows an autoradiogram of a gel showing the results of cleavage reactions using the substrates and oligonucleotides shown FIG. 12A.

FIG. 13A shows the substrate (SEQ ID NO:161) and oligonucleotide (SEQ ID NO:20) used to test the specific cleavage of a substrate RNA targeted by a pilot oligonucleotide.

FIG. 13B shows an autoradiogram of a gel showing the results of a cleavage reaction using the substrate and oligonucleotide shown in FIG. 13A.

FIG. 14A-C is a diagram of vector pTTQ18 comprising SEQ ID NO:162.

FIG. 15A-C is a diagram of vector pET-3c comprising SEQ ID NO:163.

FIG. 16A-E depicts a set of molecules which are suitable substrates for cleavage by the 5′ nuclease activity of DNAPs.

FIG. 17 is an autoradiogram of a gel showing the results of a cleavage reaction run with synthesis-deficient DNAPs.

FIG. 18 is an autoradiogram of a PEI chromatogram resolving the products of an assay for synthetic activity in synthesis-deficient DNAPTaq clones.

FIG. 19A depicts the substrate molecule (SEQ ID NO:164) used to test the ability of synthesis-deficient DNAPs to cleave short hairpin structures.

FIG. 19B shows an autoradiogram of a gel resolving the products of a cleavage reaction run using the substrate shown in FIG. 19A.

FIG. 20A shows the A- and T-hairpin molecules (SEQ ID NOS:23-24) used in the trigger/detection assay.

FIG. 20B shows the sequence of the alpha primer (SEQ ID NO:25) used in the trigger/detection assay.

FIG. 20C shows the structure of the cleaved A- (SEQ ID NO:28) and T-hairpin (SEQ ID NO:27) molecules.

FIG. 20D depicts the complementarity between the A- and T-hairpin molecules.

FIG. 21 provides the complete 206-mer duplex sequence (SEQ ID NO:32) employed as a substrate for the 5′ nucleases of the present invention (shown within SEQ ID NO:165).

FIGS. 22A and B show the cleavage of linear nucleic acid substrates (based on the 206-mer of FIG. 21) by wild type DNAPs and 5′ nucleases isolated from Thermus aquaticus and Thermus flavus.

FIG. 23 provides a detailed schematic corresponding to the of one embodiment of the detection method of the present invention.

FIG. 24 shows the propagation of cleavage of the linear duplex nucleic acid structures of FIG. 23 by the 5′ nucleases of the present invention.

FIG. 25A shows the “nibbling” phenomenon detected with the DNAPs of the present invention.

FIG. 25B shows that the “nibbling” of FIG. 25A is 5′ nucleolytic cleavage and not phosphatase cleavage.

FIGS. 26A-B demonstrate that the “nibbling” phenomenon is duplex dependent.

FIG. 27 is a schematic showing how “nibbling” can be employed in a detection assay.

FIGS. 28A-B demonstrate that “nibbling” can be target directed.

FIG. 29 is a schematic showing the CFLP method of generating a characteristic fingerprint from a nucleic acid substrate.

FIG. 30 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run in the presence of either MgCl₂ or MnCl₂.

FIG. 31 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on four similarly sized DNA substrates.

FIG. 32 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run using a wild-type and two mutant tyrosinase gene substrates.

FIG. 33 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run using either a wild-type or mutant tyrosinase substrate varying in length from 157 nucleotides to 1.587 kb.

FIG. 34 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of MnCl₂.

FIG. 35 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 36 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run for different lengths of time.

FIG. 37 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run at different temperatures.

FIG. 38 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run using different amounts of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN.

FIG. 39 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run using four different preparations of the DNA substrate.

FIG. 40 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on either the sense or antisense strand of four different tyrosinase gene substrates.

FIG. 41 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type β-globin substrate in two different concentrations of KCl and at four different temperatures.

FIG. 42 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on two different mutant β-globin substrates in five different concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 43 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and three mutant β-globin substrates.

FIG. 44 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on an RNA substrate.

FIG. 45 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run using either the enzyme CLEAVASE BN or Taq DNA polymerase as the 5′ nuclease.

FIG. 46 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a double-stranded DNA substrate to demonstrate multiplexing of the cleavage reaction.

FIG. 47 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on double-stranded DNA substrates consisting of the 419 and 422 mutant alleles derived from exon 4 of the human tyrosinase gene in the presence of various concentrations of MnCl₂.

FIG. 48 displays two traces representing two channel signals (JOE and FAM fluorescent dyes) for cleavage fragments derived from a cleavage reaction containing two differently labelled substrates (the wild-type and 422 mutant substrates derived from exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene). The thin lines represent the JOE-labelled wild-type substrate and the thick lines represent the FAM-labelled 422 mutant substrate. Above the tracing is an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on double-stranded DNA substrates consisting of the wild-type and 422 mutant alleles derived from exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene.

FIG. 49A-G depicts the nucleotide sequence of six SIV LTR clones corresponding to SEQ ID NOS:76-81.

FIG. 50 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on six different double-stranded SIV LTR substrates which contained a biotin label on the 5′ end of the (−) strand.

FIG. 51 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on six different double-stranded SIV LTR substrates which contained a biotin label on the 5′ end of the (+) strand.

FIG. 52 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of NaCl.

FIG. 53 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of (NH₄)₂SO₄.

FIG. 54 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in increasing concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 55 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in two concentrations of KCl for various periods of time.

FIG. 56 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on either the single-stranded or double-stranded form of the same substrate.

FIG. 57 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 58 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of NaCl.

FIG. 59 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run in various concentrations of (NH₄)₂SO₄.

FIG. 60 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run for various lengths of time.

FIG. 61 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run using various amounts of CLEAVASE BN enzyme for either 5 seconds or 1 minute.

FIG. 62 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run at various temperatures.

FIG. 63 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run using various amounts of CLEAVASE BN enzyme.

FIG. 64A shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in buffers having various pHs.

FIG. 64B shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in buffers having a pH of either 7.5 or 7.8.

FIG. 65A shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run in buffers having a pH of either 8.2 or 7.2.

FIG. 65B shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run in buffers having a pH of either 7.5 or 7.8.

FIG. 66 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run in the presence of various amounts of human genomic DNA.

FIG. 67 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run using the Tfl DNA polymerase in two different concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 68 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run using the Tth DNA polymerase in two different concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 69 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run using the E. coli Exo III enzyme in two different concentrations of KCl.

FIG. 70 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run on three different tyrosinase gene substrates (SEQ ID NOS:47, 54 and 55) using either the Tth DNA polymerase, the E. coli Exo III enzyme or CLEAVASE BN.

FIG. 71 is a schematic drawing depicting the location of the 5′ and 3′ cleavage sites on a cleavage structure.

FIG. 72 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run on three different tyrosinase gene substrates (SEQ ID NOS:47, 54 and 55) using either CLEAVASE BN or the Rad1/Rad10 complex.

FIG. 73 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and two mutant β-globin substrates.

FIG. 74A shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and three mutant β-globin substrates.

FIG. 74B shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of single-stranded cleavage reactions run on five mutant β-globin substrates.

FIG. 75 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of double-stranded cleavage reactions which varied the order of addition of the reaction components.

FIG. 76 depicts the organization of the human p53 gene; exons are represented by the solid black boxes and are labelled 1-11. Five hot spot regions are shown as a blow-up of the region spanning exons 5-8; the hot spot regions are labelled A, A′, B, C, and D.

FIG. 77 provides a schematic showing the use of a first 2-step PCR technique for the generation DNA fragments containing p53 mutations.

FIG. 78 provides a schematic showing the use of a second 2-step PCR technique for the generation DNA fragments containing p53 mutations.

FIG. 79 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and two mutant p53 substrates.

FIG. 80 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and three mutant p53 substrates.

FIG. 81 shows an autoradiograph of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and a mutant p53 substrate where the mutant and wild-type substrates are present in various concentrations relative to one another.

FIG. 82 provides an alignment of HCV clones 1.1 (SEQ ID NO:121), HCV2.1 (SEQ ID NO:122), HCV3.1 (SEQ ID NO:123), HCV4.2 (SEQ ID NO:124), HCV6.1 (SEQ ID NO:125) and HCV7.1 (SEQ ID NO:126).

FIG. 83 shows a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on six double-stranded HCV substrates labeled on either the sense or anti-sense strand.

FIG. 84 shows an autoradiogram of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and two mutant M. tuberculosis rpoB substrates.

FIG. 85A shows a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and two mutant M. tuberculosis rpoB substrates prepared using either dTTP or dUTP.

FIG. 85B shows a fluoroimager scan of the gel shown in FIG. 85A following a longer period of electrophoresis.

FIG. 86 shows an autoradiogram of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and three mutant M. tuberculosis katG substrates labeled on the sense strand.

FIG. 87 shows a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and three mutant M. tuberculosis katG substrates labeled on the anti-sense strand.

FIG. 88A-D shows the location of primers along the sequence of the E. coli rrsE gene (SEQ ID NO:158).

FIG. 89A-F provides an alignment of the E. coli rrsE (SEQ ID NO:158), Cam.jejuni5 (SEQ ID NO:159), and Stp.aureus (SEQ ID NO:160) rRNA genes with the location of consensus PCR rRNA primers indicated in bold type.

FIG. 90 shows a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on four bacterial 16S rRNA substrates.

FIG. 91A shows a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on five bacterial 16S rRNA substrates.

FIG. 91B shows bacterial a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on five bacterial 16S rRNA substrates.

FIG. 92 shows bacterial a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on various bacterial 16S rRNA substrates.

FIG. 93 shows bacterial a fluoroimager scan of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on eight bacterial 16S rRNA substrates.

FIG. 94 shows an autoradiogram of a gel resolving the products of cleavage reactions run on a wild-type and mutant tyrosinase gene substrates prepared using naturally occurring deoxynucleotides or deoxynucleotide analogs.

DEFINITIONS

To facilitate understanding of the invention, a number of terms are defined below.

The term “gene” refers to a DNA sequence that comprises control and coding sequences necessary for the production of a polypeptide or precursor. The polypeptide can be encoded by a full length coding sequence or by any portion of the coding sequence so long as the desired enzymatic activity is retained.

The term “wild-type” refers to a gene or gene product which has the characteristics of that gene or gene product when isolated from a naturally occurring source. A wild-type gene is that which is most frequently observed in a population and is thus arbitrarily designed the “normal” or “wild-type” form of the gene. In contrast, the term “modified” or “mutant” refers to a gene or gene product which displays modifications in sequence and or functional properties (i.e., altered characteristics) when compared to the wild-type gene or gene product. It is noted that naturally-occurring mutants can be isolated; these are identified by the fact that they have altered characteristics when compared to the wild-type gene or gene product.

The term “recombinant DNA vector” as used herein refers to DNA sequences containing a desired coding sequence and appropriate DNA sequences necessary for the expression of the operably linked coding sequence in a particular host organism. DNA sequences necessary for expression in procaryotes include a promoter, optionally an operator sequence, a ribosome binding site and possibly other sequences. Eukaryotic cells are known to utilize promoters, polyadenlyation signals and enhancers.

The term “LTR” as used herein refers to the long terminal repeat found at each end of a provirus (i.e., the integrated form of a retrovirus). The LTR contains numerous regulatory signals including transcriptional control elements, polyadenylation signals and sequences needed for replication and integration of the viral genome. The viral LTR is divided into three regions called U3, R and U5.

The U3 region contains the enhancer and promoter elements. The US region contains the polyadenylation signals. The R (repeat) region separates the U3 and U5 regions and transcribed sequences of the R region appear at both the 5′ and 3′ ends of the viral RNA.

The term “oligonucleotide” as used herein is defined as a molecule comprised of two or more deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, preferably more than three, and usually more than ten. The exact size will depend on many factors, which in turn depends on the ultimate function or use of the oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotide may be generated in any manner, including chemical synthesis, DNA replication, reverse transcription, or a combination thereof.

Because mononucleotides are reacted to make oligonucleotides in a manner such that the 5′ phosphate of one mononucleotide pentose ring is attached to the 3′ oxygen of its neighbor in one direction via a phosphodiester linkage, an end of an oligonucleotide is referred to as the “5′ end” if its 5′ phosphate is not linked to the 3′ oxygen of a mononucleotide pentose ring and as the “3′ end” if its 3′ oxygen is not linked to a 5′ phosphate of a subsequent mononucleotide pentose ring. As used herein, a nucleic acid sequence, even if internal to a larger oligonucleotide, also may be said to have 5′ and 3′ ends.

When two different, non-overlapping oligonucleotides anneal to different regions of the same linear complementary nucleic acid sequence, and the 3′ end of one oligonucleotide points towards the 5′ end of the other, the former may be called the “upstream” oligonucleotide and the latter the “downstream” oligonucleotide.

The term “primer” refers to an oligonucleotide which is capable of acting as a point of initiation of synthesis when placed under conditions in which primer extension is initiated. An oligonucleotide “primer” may occur naturally, as in a purified restriction digest or may be produced synthetically.

A primer is selected to be “substantially” complementary to a strand of specific sequence of the template. A primer must be sufficiently complementary to hybridize with a template strand for primer elongation to occur. A primer sequence need not reflect the exact sequence of the template. For example, a non-complementary nucleotide fragment may be attached to the 5′ end of the primer, with the remainder of the primer sequence being substantially complementary to the strand. Non-complementary bases or longer sequences can be interspersed into the primer, provided that the primer sequence has sufficient complementarity with the sequence of the template to hybridize and thereby form a template primer complex for synthesis of the extension product of the primer.

“Hybridization” methods involve the annealing of a complementary sequence to the target nucleic acid (the sequence to be detected). The ability of two polymers of nucleic acid containing complementary sequences to find each other and anneal through base pairing interaction is a well-recognized phenomenon. The initial observations of the “hybridization” process by Marmur and Lane, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 46:453 (1960) and Doty et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 46:461 (1960) have been followed by the refinement of this process into an essential tool of modern biology. Nonetheless, a number of problems have prevented the wide scale use of hybridization as a tool in human diagnostics. Among the more formidable problems are: 1) the inefficiency of hybridization; 2) the low concentration of specific target sequences in a mixture of genomic DNA; and 3) the hybridization of only partially complementary probes and targets.

With regard to efficiency, it is experimentally observed that only a fraction of the possible number of probe-target complexes are formed in a hybridization reaction. This is particularly true with short oligonucleotide probes (less than 100 bases in length). There are three fundamental causes: a) hybridization cannot occur because of secondary and tertiary structure interactions; b) strands of DNA containing the target sequence have rehybridized (reannealed) to their complementary strand; and c) some target molecules are prevented from hybridization when they are used in hybridization formats that immobilize the target nucleic acids to a solid surface.

Even where the sequence of a probe is completely complementary to the sequence of the target, i.e., the target's primary structure, the target sequence must be made accessible to the probe via rearrangements of higher-order structure. These higher-order structural rearrangements may concern either the secondary structure or tertiary structure of the molecule. Secondary structure is determined by intramolecular bonding. In the case of DNA or RNA targets this consists of hybridization within a single, continuous strand of bases (as opposed to hybridization between two different strands). Depending on the extent and position of intramolecular bonding, the probe can be displaced from the target sequence preventing hybridization.

Solution hybridization of oligonucleotide probes to denatured double-stranded DNA is further complicated by the fact that the longer complementary target strands can renature or reanneal. Again, hybridized probe is displaced by this process. This results in a low yield of hybridization (low “coverage”) relative to the starting concentrations of probe and target.

With regard to low target sequence concentration, the DNA fragment containing the target sequence is usually in relatively low abundance in genomic DNA. This presents great technical difficulties; most conventional methods that use oligonucleotide probes lack the sensitivity necessary to detect hybridization at such low levels.

One attempt at a solution to the target sequence concentration problem is the amplification of the detection signal. Most often this entails placing one or more labels on an oligonucleotide probe. In the case of non-radioactive labels, even the highest affinity reagents have been found to be unsuitable for the detection of single copy genes in genomic DNA with oligonucleotide probes. See Wallace et al., Biochimie 67:755 (1985). In the case of radioactive oligonucleotide probes, only extremely high specific activities are found to show satisfactory results. See Studencki and Wallace, DNA 3:1 (1984) and Studencki et al., Human Genetics 37:42 (1985).

With regard to complementarity, it is important for some diagnostic applications to determine whether the hybridization represents complete or partial complementarity. For example, where it is desired to detect simply the presence or absence of pathogen DNA (such as from a virus, bacterium, fungi, mycoplasma, protozoan) it is only important that the hybridization method ensures hybridization when the relevant sequence is present; conditions can be selected where both partially complementary probes and completely complementary probes will hybridize. Other diagnostic applications, however, may require that the hybridization method distinguish between partial and complete complementarity. It may be of interest to detect genetic polymorphisms. For example, human hemoglobin is composed, in part, of four polypeptide chains. Two of these chains are identical chains of 141 amino acids (alpha chains) and two of these chains are identical chains of 146 amino acids (beta chains). The gene encoding the beta chain is known to exhibit polymorphism. The normal allele encodes a beta chain having glutamic acid at the sixth position. The mutant allele encodes a beta chain having valine at the sixth position. This difference in amino acids has a profound (most profound when the individual is homozygous for the mutant allele) physiological impact known clinically as sickle cell anemia. It is well known that the genetic basis of the amino acid change involves a single base difference between the normal allele DNA sequence and the mutant allele DNA sequence.

Unless combined with other techniques (such as restriction enzyme analysis), methods that allow for the same level of hybridization in the case of both partial as well as complete complementarity are typically unsuited for such applications; the probe will hybridize to both the normal and variant target sequence. Hybridization, regardless of the method used, requires some degree of complementarity between the sequence being assayed (the target sequence) and the fragment of DNA used to perform the test (the probe). (Of course, one can obtain binding without any complementarity but this binding is nonspecific and to be avoided.)

The complement of a nucleic acid sequence as used herein refers to an oligonucleotide which, when aligned with the nucleic acid sequence such that the 5′ end of one sequence is paired with the 3′ end of the other, is in “antiparallel association.” Certain bases not commonly found in natural nucleic acids may be included in the nucleic acids of the present invention and include, for example, inosine and 7-deazaguanine. Complementarity need not be perfect; stable duplexes may contain mismatched base pairs or unmatched bases. Those skilled in the art of nucleic acid technology can determine duplex stability empirically considering a number of variables including, for example, the length of the oligonucleotide, base composition and sequence of the oligonucleotide, ionic strength and incidence of mismatched base pairs.

Stability of a nucleic acid duplex is measured by the melting temperature, or “T_(m).” The T_(m) of a particular nucleic acid duplex under specified conditions is the temperature at which on average half of the base pairs have disassociated.

The term “probe” as used herein refers to a labeled oligonucleotide which forms a duplex structure with a sequence in another nucleic acid, due to complementarity of at least one sequence in the probe with a sequence in the other nucleic acid.

The term “label” as used herein refers to any atom or molecule which can be used to provide a detectable (preferably quantifiable) signal, and which can be attached to a nucleic acid or protein. Labels may provide signals detectable by fluorescence, radioactivity, colorimetry, gravimetry, X-ray diffraction or absorption, magnetism, enzymatic activity, and the like.

The term “cleavage structure” as used herein, refers to a region of a single-stranded nucleic acid substrate containing secondary structure, said region being cleavable by a cleavage means, including but not limited to an enzyme. The cleavage structure is a substrate for specific cleavage by said cleavage means in contrast to a nucleic acid molecule which is a substrate for non-specific cleavage by agents such as phosphodiesterases which cleave nucleic acid molecules without regard to secondary structure (i.e., no folding of the substrate is required).

The term “cleavage means” as used herein refers to any means which is capable of cleaving a cleavage structure, including but not limited to enzymes. The cleavage means may include native DNAPs having 5′ nuclease activity (e.g., Taq DNA polymerase, E. coli DNA polymerase 1) and, more specifically, modified DNAPs having 5′ nuclease but lacking synthetic activity. The ability of 5′ nucleases to cleave naturally occurring structures in nucleic acid templates (structure-specific cleavage) is useful to detect internal sequence differences in nucleic acids without prior knowledge of the specific sequence of the nucleic acid. In this manner, they are structure-specific enzymes. Structure-specific enzymes are enzymes which recognize specific secondary structures in a nucleic molecule and cleave these structures. The site of cleavage may be on either the 5′ or 3′ side of the cleavage structure; alternatively the site of cleavage may be between the 5′ and 3′ side (i.e., within or internal to) of the cleavage structure. The cleavage means of the invention cleave a nucleic acid molecule in response to the formation of cleavage structures; it is not necessary that the cleavage means cleave the cleavage structure at any particular location within the cleavage structure.

The cleavage means is not restricted to enzymes having 5′ nuclease activity. The cleavage means may include nuclease activity provided from a variety of sources including the enzyme CLEAVASE, Taq DNA polymerase, E. coli DNA polymerase I and eukaryotic structure-specific endonucleases, murine FEN-1 endonucleases (Harrington and Liener, (1994) Genes and Develop. 8:1344) and calf thymus 5′ to 3′ exonuclease (Murante, R. S., et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269:1191). In addition, enzymes having 3′ nuclease activity such as members of the family of DNA repair endonucleases (e.g., the RrpI enzyme from Drosophila melanogaster, the yeast RAD1/RAD10 complex and E. coli Exo III), are also suitable cleavage means for the practice of the methods of the invention.

The term “cleavage products” as used herein, refers to products generated by the reaction of a cleavage means with a cleavage structure (i.e., the treatment of a cleavage structure with a cleavage means).

The terms “nucleic acid substrate” and nucleic acid template” are used herein interchangeably and refer to a nucleic acid molecule which when denatured and allowed to renature (i.e., to fold upon itself by the formation of intra-strand hydrogen bonds), forms at least one cleavage structure. The nucleic acid substrate may comprise single- or double-stranded DNA or RNA.

The term “substantially single-stranded” when used in reference to a nucleic acid substrate means that the substrate molecule exists primarily as a single strand of nucleic acid in contrast to a double-stranded substrate which exists as two strands of nucleic acid which are held together by inter-strand base pairing interactions.

Nucleic acids form secondary structures which depend on base-pairing for stability. When single strands of nucleic acids (single-stranded DNA, denatured double-stranded DNA or RNA) with different sequences, even closely related ones, are allowed to fold on themselves, they assume characteristic secondary structures. At “elevated temperatures” the duplex regions of the structures are brought to the brink of instability, so that the effects of small changes in sequence are maximized, and revealed as alterations in the cleavage pattern. In other words, “an elevated temperature” is a temperature at which a given duplex region of the folded substrate molecule is near the temperature at which that duplex melts. An alteration in the sequence of the substrate will then be likely to cause the destruction of a duplex region(s) thereby generating a different cleavage pattern when a cleavage agent which is dependent upon the recognition of structure is utilized in the reaction. While not being limited to any particular theory, it is thought that individual molecules in the target (i.e., the substrate) population may each assume only one or a few of the potential cleavage structures (i.e., duplexed regions), but when the sample is analyzed as a whole, a composite pattern representing all cleavage sites is detected. Many of the structures recognized as active cleavage sites are likely to be only a few base-pairs long and would appear to be unstable when elevated temperatures used in the cleavage reaction. Nevertheless, transient formation of these structures allows recognition and cleavage of these structures by said cleavage means. The formation or disruption of these structures in response to small sequence changes results in changes in the patterns of cleavage. Temperatures in the range of 40-85° C., with the range of 55-85° C. being particularly preferred, are suitable elevated temperatures for the practice of the method of the invention.

The term “sequence variation” as used herein refers to differences in nucleic acid sequence between two nucleic acid templates. For example, a wild-type structural gene and a mutant form of this wild-type structural gene may vary in sequence by the presence of single base substitutions and/or deletions or insertions of one or more nucleotides. These two forms of the structural gene are said to vary in sequence from one another. A second mutant form of the structural gene may exits. This second mutant form is said to vary in sequence from both the wild-type gene and the first mutant form of the gene. It is noted, however, that the invention does not require that a comparison be made between one or more forms of a gene to detect sequence variations. Because the method of the invention generates a characteristic and reproducible pattern of cleavage products for a given nucleic acid substrate, a characteristic “fingerprint” may be obtained from any nucleic substrate without reference to a wild-type or other control. The invention contemplates the use of the method for both “fingerprinting” nucleic acids without reference to a control and identification of mutant forms of a substrate nucleic acid by comparison of the mutant form of the substrate with a wild-type or known mutant control.

The term “liberating” as used herein refers to the release of a nucleic acid fragment from a larger nucleic acid fragment, such as an oligonucleotide, by the action of a 5′ nuclease such that the released fragment is no longer covalently attached to the remainder of the oligonucleotide.

The term “substrate strand” as used herein, means that strand of nucleic acid in a cleavage structure in which the cleavage mediated by the 5′ nuclease activity occurs.

The term “template strand” as used herein, means that strand of nucleic acid in a cleavage structure which is at least partially complementary to the substrate strand and which anneals to the substrate strand to form the cleavage structure.

The term “K_(m)” as used herein refers to the Michaelis-Menten constant for an enzyme and is defined as the concentration of the specific substrate at which a given enzyme yields one-half its maximum velocity in an enzyme catalyzed reaction.

The term “nucleotide analog” as used herein refers to modified or non-naturally occurring nucleotides such as 7-deaza purines (i.e., 7-deaza-dATP and 7-deaza-dGTP). Nucleotide analogs include base analogs and comprise modified forms of deoxyribonucleotides as well as ribonucleotides. As used herein the term “nucleotide analog” when used in reference to substrates present in a PCR mixture refers to the use of nucleotides other than dATP, dGTP, dCTP and dTTP; thus, the use of dUTP (a naturally occurring dNTP) in a PCR would comprise the use of a nucleotide analog in the PCR. A PCR product generated using dUTP, 7-deaza-dATP, 7-deaza-dGTP or any other nucleotide analog in the reaction mixture is said to contain nucleotide analogs.

“Oligonucleotide primers matching or complementary to a gene sequence” refers to oligonucleotide primers capable of facilitating the template-dependent synthesis of single or double-stranded nucleic acids. Oligonucleotide primers matching or complementary to a gene sequence may be used in PCRs, RT-PCRs and the like.

A “consensus gene sequence” refers to a gene sequence which is derived by comparison of two or more gene sequences and which describes the nucleotides most often present in a given segment of the genes; the consensus sequence is the canonical sequence.

The term “polymorphic locus” is a locus present in a population which shows variation between members of the population (i.e., the most common allele has a frequency of less than 0.95). In contrast, a “monomorphic locus” is a genetic locus at little or no variations seen between members of the population (generally taken to be a locus at which the most common allele exceeds a frequency of 0.95 in the gene pool of the population).

The term “microorganism” as used herein means an organism too small to be observed with the unaided eye and includes, but is not limited to bacteria, virus, protozoans, fungi, and ciliates.

The term “microbial gene sequences” refers to gene sequences derived from a microorganism.

The term “bacteria” refers to any bacterial species including eubacterial and archaebacterial species.

The term “virus” refers to obligate, ultramicroscopic, intracellular parasites incapable of autonomous replication (i.e., replication requires the use of the host cell's machinery).

The term “multi-drug resistant” or multiple-drug resistant” refers to a microorganism which is resistant to more than one of the antibiotics or antimicrobial agents used in the treatment of said microorganism.

DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to methods and compositions for treating nucleic acid, and in particular, methods and compositions for detection and characterization of nucleic acid sequences and sequence changes.

The present invention relates to means for cleaving a nucleic acid cleavage structure in a site-specific manner. In particular, the present invention relates to a cleaving enzyme having 5′ nuclease activity without interfering nucleic acid synthetic ability.

This invention provides 5′ nucleases derived from thermostable DNA polymerases which exhibit altered DNA synthetic activity from that of native thermostable DNA polymerases. The 5′ nuclease activity of the polymerase is retained while the synthetic activity is reduced or absent. Such 5′ nucleases are capable of catalyzing the structure-specific cleavage of nucleic acids in the absence of interfering synthetic activity. The lack of synthetic activity during a cleavage reaction results in nucleic acid cleavage products of uniform size.

The novel properties of the polymerases of the invention form the basis of a method of detecting specific nucleic acid sequences. This method relies upon the amplification of the detection molecule rather than upon the amplification of the target sequence itself as do existing methods of detecting specific target sequences.

DNA polymerases (DNAPs), such as those isolated from E. coli or from thermophilic bacteria of the genus Thermus, are enzymes that synthesize new DNA strands. Several of the known DNAPs contain associated nuclease activities in addition to the synthetic activity of the enzyme.

Some DNAPs are known to remove nucleotides from the 5′ and 3′ ends of DNA chains (Komberg, DNA Replication, W.H. Freeman and Co., San Francisco, pp. 127-139 (1980)). These nuclease activities are usually referred to as 5′ exonuclease and 3′ exonuclease activities, respectively. For example, the 5′ exonuclease activity located in the N-terminal domain of several DNAPs participates in the removal of RNA primers during lagging strand synthesis during DNA replication and the removal of damaged nucleotides during repair. Some DNAPs, such as the E. coli DNA polymerase (DNAPEc1), also have a 3′ exonuclease activity responsible for proof-reading during DNA synthesis (Komberg, supra).

A DNAP isolated from Thermus aquaticus, termed Taq DNA polymerase (DNAPTaq), has a 5′ exonuclease activity, but lacks a functional 3′ exonucleolytic domain (Tindall and Kunkell, Biochem. 27:6008 (1988)). Derivatives of DNAPEc1 and DNAPTaq, respectively called the Klenow and Stoffel fragments, lack 5′ exonuclease domains as a result of enzymatic or genetic manipulations (Brutlag et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 37:982 (1969); Erlich et al., Science 252:1643 (1991); Setlow and Komberg, J. Biol. Chem. 247:232 (1972)).

The 5′ exonuclease activity of DNAPTaq was reported to require concurrent synthesis (Gelfand, PCR Technology—Principles and Applications for DNA Amplification (H. A. Erlich, Ed.), Stockton Press, New York, p. 19 (1989)). Although mononucleotides predominate among the digestion products of the 5′ exonucleases of DNAPTaq and DNAPEc1, short oligonucleotides (≦12 nucleotides) can also be observed implying that these so-called 5′ exonucleases can function endonucleolytically (Setlow, supra; Holland et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:7276 (1991)).

In WO 92/06200, Gelfand et al. show that the preferred substrate of the 5′ exonuclease activity of the thermostable DNA polymerases is displaced single-stranded DNA. Hydrolysis of the phosphodiester bond occurs between the displaced single-stranded DNA and the double-helical DNA with the preferred exonuclease cleavage site being a phosphodiester bond in the double helical region. Thus, the 5′ exonuclease activity usually associated with DNAPs is a structure-dependent single-stranded endonuclease and is more properly referred to as a 5′ nuclease. Exonucleases are enzymes which cleave nucleotide molecules from the ends of the nucleic acid molecule. Endonucleases, on the other hand, are enzymes which cleave the nucleic acid molecule at internal rather than terminal sites. The nuclease activity associated with some thermostable DNA polymerases cleaves endonucleolytically but this cleavage requires contact with the 5′ end of the molecule being cleaved. Therefore, these nucleases are referred to as 5′ nucleases.

When a 5′ nuclease activity is associated with a eubacterial Type A DNA polymerase, it is found in the one-third N-terminal region of the protein as an independent functional domain. The C-terminal two-thirds of the molecule constitute the polymerization domain which is responsible for the synthesis of DNA. Some Type A DNA polymerases also have a 3′ exonuclease activity associated with the two-third C-terminal region of the molecule.

The 5′ exonuclease activity and the polymerization activity of DNAPs have been separated by proteolytic cleavage or genetic manipulation of the polymerase molecule. To date thermostable DNAPs have been modified to remove or reduce the amount of 5′ nuclease activity while leaving the polymerase activity intact.

The Klenow or large proteolytic cleavage fragment of DNAPEc1 contains the polymerase and 3′ exonuclease activity but lacks the 5′ nuclease activity. The Stoffel fragment of DNAPTaq (DNAPStf) lacks the 5′ nuclease activity due to a genetic manipulation which deleted the N-terminal 289 amino acids of the polymerase molecule (Erlich et al., Science 252:1643 (1991)). WO 92/06200 describes a thermostable DNAP with an altered level of 5′ to 3′ exonuclease. U.S. Pat. No. 5,108,892 describes a Thermus aquaticus DNAP without a 5′ to 3′ exonuclease. However, the art of molecular biology lacks a thermostable DNA polymerase with a lessened amount of synthetic activity.

The present invention provides 5′ nucleases derived from thermostable Type A DNA polymerases that retain 5′ nuclease activity but have reduced or absent synthetic activity. The ability to uncouple the synthetic activity of the enzyme from the 5′ nuclease activity proves that the 5′ nuclease activity does not require concurrent DNA synthesis as was previously reported (Gelfand, PCR Technology, supra).

The description of the invention is divided into: I. Detection of Specific Nucleic Acid Sequences Using 5′ Nucleases; II. Generation of 5′ Nucleases Derived From Thermostable DNA Polymerases; III. Therapeutic Uses of 5′ Nucleases; IV. Detection of Antigenic or Nucleic Acid Targets by a Dual Capture Assay; and V. CLEAVASE Fragment Length Polymorphism for the Detection of Secondary Structure and VI. Detection of Mutations in the p53 Tumor Suppressor Gene Using the CFLP Method.

I. Detection of Specific Nucleic Acid Sequences Using 5′ Nucleases

The 5′ nucleases of the invention form the basis of a novel detection assay for the identification of specific nucleic acid sequences. This detection system identifies the presence of specific nucleic acid sequences by requiring the annealing of two oligonucleotide probes to two portions of the target sequence. As used herein, the term “target sequence” or “target nucleic acid sequence” refers to a specific nucleic acid sequence within a polynucleotide sequence, such as genomic DNA or RNA, which is to be either detected or cleaved or both.

FIG. 1A provides a schematic of one embodiment of the detection method of the present invention. The target sequence is recognized by two distinct oligonucleotides in the triggering or trigger reaction. It is preferred that one of these oligonucleotides is provided on a solid support. The other can be provided free. In FIG. 1A the free oligo is indicated as a “primer” and the other oligo is shown attached to a bead designated as type 1. The target nucleic acid aligns the two oligonucleotides for specific cleavage of the 5′ arm (of the oligo on bead 1) by the DNAPs of the present invention (not shown in FIG. 1A).

The site of cleavage (indicated by a large solid arrowhead) is controlled by the distance between the 3′ end of the “primer” and the downstream fork of the oligo on bead 1. The latter is designed with an uncleavable region (indicated by the striping). In this manner neither oligonucleotide is subject to cleavage when misaligned or when unattached to target nucleic acid.

Successful cleavage releases a single copy of what is referred to as the alpha signal oligo. This oligo may contain a detectable moiety (e.g., fluorescein). On the other hand, it may be unlabelled.

In one embodiment of the detection method, two more oligonucleotides are provided on solid supports. The oligonucleotide shown in FIG. 1A on bead 2 has a region that is complementary to the alpha signal oligo (indicated as alpha prime) allowing for hybridization. This structure can be cleaved by the DNAPs of the present invention to release the beta signal oligo. The beta signal oligo can then hybridize to type 3 beads having an oligo with a complementary region (indicated as beta prime). Again, this structure can be cleaved by the DNAPs of the present invention to release a new alpha oligo.

At this point, the amplification has been linear. To increase the power of the method, it is desired that the alpha signal oligo hybridized to bead type 2 be liberated after release of the beta oligo so that it may go on to hybridize with other oligos on type 2 beads. Similarly, after release of an alpha oligo from type 3 beads, it is desired that the beta oligo be liberated.

The liberation of “captured” signal oligos can be achieved in a number of ways. First, it has been found that the DNAPs of the present invention have a true 5′ exonuclease capable of “nibbling” the 5′ end of the alpha (and beta) prime oligo (discussed below in more detail). Thus, under appropriate conditions, the hybridization is destabilized by nibbling of the DNAP. Second, the alpha-alpha prime (as well as the beta-beta prime) complex can be destabilized by heat (e.g., thermal cycling).

With the liberation of signal oligos by such techniques, each cleavage results in a doubling of the number of signal oligos. In this manner, detectable signal can quickly be achieved.

FIG. 1B provides a schematic of a second embodiment of the detection method of the present invention. Again, the target sequence is recognized by two distinct oligonucleotides in the triggering or trigger reaction and the target nucleic acid aligns the two oligonucleotides for specific cleavage of the 5′ arm by the DNAPs of the present invention (not shown in FIG. 1B). The first oligo is completely complementary to a portion of the target sequence. The second oligonucleotide is partially complementary to the target sequence; the 3′ end of the second oligonucleotide is fully complementary to the target sequence while the 5′ end is non-complementary and forms a single-stranded arm. The non-complementary end of the second oligonucleotide may be a generic sequence which can be used with a set of standard hairpin structures (described below). The detection of different target sequences would require unique portions of two oligonucleotides: the entire first oligonucleotide and the 3′ end of the second oligonucleotide. The 5′ arm of the second oligonucleotide can be invariant or generic in sequence.

The annealing of the first and second oligonucleotides near one another along the target sequence forms a forked cleavage structure which is a substrate for the 5′ nuclease of DNA polymerases. The approximate location of the cleavage site is again indicated by the large solid arrowhead in FIG. 1B.

The 5′ nucleases of the invention are capable of cleaving this structure but are not capable of polymerizing the extension of the 3′ end of the first oligonucleotide. The lack of polymerization activity is advantageous as extension of the first oligonucleotide results in displacement of the annealed region of the second oligonucleotide and results in moving the site of cleavage along the second oligonucleotide. If polymerization is allowed to occur to any significant amount, multiple lengths of cleavage product will be generated. A single cleavage product of uniform length is desirable as this cleavage product initiates the detection reaction.

The trigger reaction may be run under conditions that allow for thermocycling. Thermocycling of the reaction allows for a logarithmic increase in the amount of the trigger oligonucleotide released in the reaction.

The second part of the detection method allows the annealing of the fragment of the second oligonucleotide liberated by the cleavage of the first cleavage structure formed in the triggering reaction (called the third or trigger oligonucleotide) to a first hairpin structure. This first hairpin structure has a single-stranded 5′ arm and a single-stranded 3′ arm. The third oligonucleotide triggers the cleavage of this first hairpin structure by annealing to the 3′ arm of the hairpin thereby forming a substrate for cleavage by the 5′ nuclease of the present invention. The cleavage of this first hairpin structure generates two reaction products: 1) the cleaved 5′ arm of the hairpin called the fourth oligonucleotide, and 2) the cleaved hairpin structure which now lacks the 5′ arm and is smaller in size than the uncleaved hairpin. This cleaved first hairpin may be used as a detection molecule to indicate that cleavage directed by the trigger or third oligonucleotide occurred. Thus, this indicates that the first two oligonucleotides found and annealed to the target sequence thereby indicating the presence of the target sequence in the sample.

The detection products are amplified by having the fourth oligonucleotide anneal to a second hairpin structure. This hairpin structure has a 5′ single-stranded arm and a 3′ single-stranded arm. The fourth oligonucleotide generated by cleavage of the first hairpin structure anneals to the 3′ arm of the second hairpin structure thereby creating a third cleavage structure recognized by the 5′ nuclease. The cleavage of this second hairpin structure also generates two reaction products: 1) the cleaved 5′ arm of the hairpin called the fifth oligonucleotide which is similar or identical in sequence to the third nucleotide, and 2) the cleaved second hairpin structure which now lacks the 5′ arm and is smaller in size than the uncleaved hairpin. This cleaved second hairpin may be as a detection molecule and amplifies the signal generated by the cleavage of the first hairpin structure. Simultaneously with the annealing of the forth oligonucleotide, the third oligonucleotide is dissociated from the cleaved first hairpin molecule so that it is free to anneal to a new copy of the first hairpin structure. The disassociation of the oligonucleotides from the hairpin structures may be accomplished by heating or other means suitable to disrupt base-pairing interactions.

Further amplification of the detection signal is achieved by annealing the fifth oligonucleotide (similar or identical in sequence to the third oligonucleotide) to another molecule of the first hairpin structure. Cleavage is then performed and the oligonucleotide that is liberated then is annealed to another molecule of the second hairpin structure. Successive rounds of annealing and cleavage of the first and second hairpin structures, provided in excess, are performed to generate a sufficient amount of cleaved hairpin products to be detected. The temperature of the detection reaction is cycled just below and just above the annealing temperature for the oligonucleotides used to direct cleavage of the hairpin structures, generally about 55° C. to 70° C. The number of cleavages will double in each cycle until the amount of hairpin structures remaining is below the K_(m) for the hairpin structures. This point is reached when the hairpin structures are substantially used up. When the detection reaction is to be used in a quantitative manner, the cycling reactions are stopped before the accumulation of the cleaved hairpin detection products reach a plateau.

Detection of the cleaved hairpin structures may be achieved in several ways. In one embodiment detection is achieved by separation on agarose or polyacrylamide gels followed by staining with ethidium bromide. In another embodiment, detection is achieved by separation of the cleaved and uncleaved hairpin structures on a gel followed by autoradiography when the hairpin structures are first labelled with a radioactive probe and separation on chromatography columns using HPLC or FPLC followed by detection of the differently sized fragments by absorption at OD₂₆₀. Other means of detection include detection of changes in fluorescence polarization when the single-stranded 5′ arm is released by cleavage, the increase in fluorescence of an intercalating fluorescent indicator as the amount of primers annealed to 3′ arms of the hairpin structures increases. The formation of increasing amounts of duplex DNA (between the primer and the 3′ arm of the hairpin) occurs if successive rounds of cleavage occur.

The hairpin structures may be attached to a solid support, such as an agarose, styrene or magnetic bead, via the 3′ end of the hairpin. A spacer molecule may be placed between the 3′ end of the hairpin and the bead, if so desired. The advantage of attaching the hairpin structures to a solid support is that this prevents the hybridization of the two hairpin structures to one another over regions which are complementary. If the hairpin structures anneal to one another, this would reduce the amount of hairpins available for hybridization to the primers released during the cleavage reactions. If the hairpin structures are attached to a solid support, then additional methods of detection of the products of the cleavage reaction may be employed. These methods include, but are not limited to, the measurement of the released single-stranded 5′ arm when the 5′ arm contains a label at the 5′ terminus. This label may be radioactive, fluorescent, biotinylated, etc. If the hairpin structure is not cleaved, the 5′ label will remain attached to the solid support. If cleavage occurs, the 5′ label will be released from the solid support.

The 3′ end of the hairpin molecule may be blocked through the use of dideoxynucleotides. A 3′ terminus containing a dideoxynucleotide is unavailable to participate in reactions with certain DNA modifying enzymes, such as terminal transferase. Cleavage of the hairpin having a 3′ terminal dideoxynucleotide generates a new, unblocked 3′ terminus at the site of cleavage. This new 3′ end has a free hydroxyl group which can interact with terminal transferase thus providing another means of detecting the cleavage products.

The hairpin structures are designed so that their self-complementary regions are very short (generally in the range of 3-8 base pairs). Thus, the hairpin structures are not stable at the high temperatures at which this reaction is performed (generally in the range of 50-75° C.) unless the hairpin is stabilized by the presence of the annealed oligonucleotide on the 3′ arm of the hairpin. This instability prevents the polymerase from cleaving the hairpin structure in the absence of an associated primer thereby preventing false positive results due to non-oligonucleotide directed cleavage.

As discussed above, the use of the 5′ nucleases of the invention which have reduced polymerization activity is advantageous in this method of detecting specific nucleic acid sequences. Significant amounts of polymerization during the cleavage reaction would cause shifting of the site of cleavage in unpredictable ways resulting in the production of a series of cleaved hairpin structures of various sizes rather than a single easily quantifiable product. Additionally, the primers used in one round of cleavage could, if elongated, become unusable for the next cycle, by either forming an incorrect structure or by being too long to melt off under moderate temperature cycling conditions. In a pristine system (i.e., lacking the presence of dNTPs), one could use the unmodified polymerase, but the presence of nucleotides (dNTPs) can decrease the per cycle efficiency enough to give a false negative result. When a crude extract (genomic DNA preparations, crude cell lysates, etc.) is employed or where a sample of DNA from a PCR reaction, or any other sample that might be contaminated with dNTPs, the 5′ nucleases of the present invention that were derived from thermostable polymerases are particularly useful.

II. Generation of 5′ Nucleases From Thermostable DNA Polymerases

The genes encoding Type A DNA polymerases share about 85% homology to each other on the DNA sequence level. Preferred examples of thermostable polymerases include those isolated from Thermus aquaticus, Thermus flavus, and Thermus thermophilus. However, other thermostable Type A polymerases which have 5′ nuclease activity are also suitable. FIGS. 2 and 3 compare the nucleotide and amino acid sequences of the three above mentioned polymerases. In FIGS. 2 and 3, the consensus or majority sequence derived from a comparison of the nucleotide (FIG. 2) or amino acid (FIG. 3) sequence of the three thermostable DNA polymerases is shown on the top line. A dot appears in the sequences of each of these three polymerases whenever an amino acid residue in a given sequence is identical to that contained in the consensus amino acid sequence. Dashes are used to introduce gaps in order to maximize alignment between the displayed sequences. When no consensus nucleotide or amino acid is present at a given position, an “X” is placed in the consensus sequence. SEQ ID NOS:1-3 display the nucleotide sequences and SEQ ID NOS:4-6 display the amino acid sequences of the three wild-type polymerases. SEQ ID NO:1 corresponds to the nucleic acid sequence of the wild type Thermus aquaticus DNA polymerase gene isolated from the YT-1 strain (Lawyer et al., J. Biol. Chem. 264:6427 (1989)). SEQ ID NO:2 corresponds to the nucleic acid sequence of the wild type Thermus flavus DNA polymerase gene (Akhmetzjanov and Vakhitov, Nucl. Acids Res. 20:5839 (1992)). SEQ ID NO:3 corresponds to the nucleic acid sequence of the wild type Thermus thermophilus DNA polymerase gene (Gelfand et al., WO 91/09950 (1991)). SEQ ID NOS:7-8 depict the consensus nucleotide and amino acid sequences, respectively for the above three DNAPs (also shown on the top row in FIGS. 2 and 3).

The 5′ nucleases of the invention derived from thermostable polymerases have reduced synthetic ability, but retain substantially the same 5′ exonuclease activity as the native DNA polymerase. The term “substantially the same 5′ nuclease activity” as used herein means that the 5′ nuclease activity of the modified enzyme retains the ability to function as a structure-dependent single-stranded endonuclease but not necessarily at the same rate of cleavage as compared to the unmodified enzyme. Type A DNA polymerases may also be modified so as to produce an enzyme which has increases 5′ nuclease activity while having a reduced level of synthetic activity. Modified enzymes having reduced synthetic activity and increased 5′ nuclease activity are also envisioned by the present invention.

By the term “reduced synthetic activity” as used herein it is meant that the modified enzyme has less than the level of synthetic activity found in the unmodified or “native” enzyme. The modified enzyme may have no synthetic activity remaining or may have that level of synthetic activity that will not interfere with the use of the modified enzyme in the detection assay described below. The 5′ nucleases of the present invention are advantageous in situations where the cleavage activity of the polymerase is desired, but the synthetic ability is not (such as in the detection assay of the invention).

As noted above, it is not intended that the invention be limited by the nature of the alteration necessary to render the polymerase synthesis deficient. The present invention contemplates a variety of methods, including but not limited to: 1) proteolysis; 2) recombinant constructs (including mutants); and 3) physical and/or chemical modification and/or inhibition.

1. Proteolysis

Thermostable DNA polymerases having a reduced level of synthetic activity are produced by physically cleaving the unmodified enzyme with proteolytic enzymes to produce fragments of the enzyme that are deficient in synthetic activity but retain 5′ nuclease activity. Following proteolytic digestion, the resulting fragments are separated by standard chromatographic techniques and assayed for the ability to synthesize DNA and to act as a 5′ nuclease. The assays to determine synthetic activity and 5′ nuclease activity are described below.

2. Recombinant Constructs

The examples below describe a preferred method for creating a construct encoding a 5′ nuclease derived from a thermostable DNA polymerase. As the Type A DNA polymerases are similar in DNA sequence, the cloning strategies employed for the Thermus aquaticus and flavus polymerases are applicable to other thermostable Type A polymerases. In general, a thermostable DNA polymerase is cloned by isolating genomic DNA using molecular biological methods from a bacteria containing a thermostable Type A DNA polymerase. This genomic DNA is exposed to primers which are capable of amplifying the polymerase gene by PCR.

This amplified polymerase sequence is then subjected to standard deletion processes to delete the polymerase portion of the gene. Suitable deletion processes are described below in the examples.

The example below discusses the strategy used to determine which portions of the DNAPTaq polymerase domain could be removed without eliminating the 5′ nuclease activity. Deletion of amino acids from the protein can be done either by deletion of the encoding genetic material, or by introduction of a translational stop codon by mutation or frame shift. In addition, proteolytic treatment of the protein molecule can be performed to remove segments of the protein.

In the examples below, specific alterations of the Taq gene were: a deletion between nucleotides 1601 and 2502 (the end of the coding region), a 4 nucleotide insertion at position 2043, and deletions between nucleotides 1614 and 1848 and between nucleotides 875 and 1778 (numbering is as in SEQ ID NO:1). These modified sequences are described below in the examples and at SEQ ID NOS:9-12.

Those skilled in the art understand that single base pair changes can be innocuous in terms of enzyme structure and function. Similarly, small additions and deletions can be present without substantially changing the exonuclease or polymerase function of these enzymes.

Other deletions are also suitable to create the 5′ nucleases of the present invention. It is preferable that the deletion decrease the polymerase activity of the 5′ nucleases to a level at which synthetic activity will not interfere with the use of the 5′ nuclease in the detection assay of the invention. Most preferably, the synthetic ability is absent. Modified polymerases are tested for the presence of synthetic and 5′ nuclease activity as in assays described below. Thoughtful consideration of these assays allows for the screening of candidate enzymes whose structure is heretofore as yet unknown. In other words, construct “X” can be evaluated according to the protocol described below to determine whether it is a member of the genus of 5′ nucleases of the present invention as defined functionally, rather than structurally.

In the example below, the PCR product of the amplified Thermus aquaticus genomic DNA did not have the identical nucleotide structure of the native genomic DNA and did not have the same synthetic ability of the original clone. Base pair changes which result due to the infidelity of DNAPTaq during PCR amplification of a polymerase gene are also a method by which the synthetic ability of a polymerase gene may be inactivated. The examples below and FIGS. 4A and 5A indicate regions in the native Thermus aquaticus and flavus DNA polymerases likely to be important for synthetic ability. There are other base pair changes and substitutions that will likely also inactivate the polymerase.

It is not necessary, however, that one start out the process of producing a 5′ nuclease from a DNA polymerase with such a mutated amplified product. This is the method by which the examples below were performed to generate the synthesis-deficient DNAPTaq mutants, but it is understood by those skilled in the art that a wild-type DNA polymerase sequence may be used as the starting material for the introduction of deletions, insertion and substitutions to produce a 5′ nuclease. For example, to generate the synthesis-deficient DNAPTfl mutant, the primers listed in SEQ ID NOS:13-14 were used to amplify the wild type DNA polymerase gene from Thermus flavus strain AT-62. The amplified polymerase gene was then subjected to restriction enzyme digestion to delete a large portion of the domain encoding the synthetic activity.

The present invention contemplates that the nucleic acid construct of the present invention be capable of expression in a suitable host. Those in the art know methods for attaching various promoters and 3′ sequences to a gene structure to achieve efficient expression. The examples below disclose two suitable vectors and six suitable vector constructs. Of course, there are other promoter/vector combinations that would be suitable. It is not necessary that a host organism be used for the expression of the nucleic acid constructs of the invention. For example, expression of the protein encoded by a nucleic acid construct may be achieved through the use of a cell-free in vitro transcription/translation system. An example of such a cell-free system is the commercially available TNT Coupled Reticulocyte Lysate System (Promega Corporation, Madison, Wis.).

Once a suitable nucleic acid construct has been made, the 5′ nuclease may be produced from the construct. The examples below and standard molecular biological teachings enable one to manipulate the construct by different suitable methods.

Once the 5′ nuclease has been expressed, the polymerase is tested for both synthetic and nuclease activity as described below.

3. Physical and/or Chemical Modification and/or Inhibition

The synthetic activity of a thermostable DNA polymerase may be reduced by chemical and/or physical means. In one embodiment, the cleavage reaction catalyzed by the 5′ nuclease activity of the polymerase is run under conditions which preferentially inhibit the synthetic activity of the polymerase. The level of synthetic activity need only be reduced to that level of activity which does not interfere with cleavage reactions requiring no significant synthetic activity.

As shown in the examples below, concentrations of Mg⁺⁺ greater than 5 mM inhibit the polymerization activity of the native DNAPTaq. The ability of the 5′ nuclease to function under conditions where synthetic activity is inhibited is tested by running the assays for synthetic and 5′ nuclease activity, described below, in the presence of a range of Mg⁺⁺ concentrations (5 to 10 mM). The effect of a given concentration of Mg⁺⁺ is determined by quantitation of the amount of synthesis and cleavage in the test reaction as compared to the standard reaction for each assay.

The inhibitory effect of other ions, polyamines, denaturants, such as urea, formamide, dimethylsulfoxide, glycerol and non-ionic detergents (TRITON X-100 and TWEEN-20), nucleic acid binding chemicals such as, actinomycin D, ethidium bromide and psoralens, are tested by their addition to the standard reaction buffers for the synthesis and 5′ nuclease assays. Those compounds having a preferential inhibitory effect on the synthetic activity of a thermostable polymerase are then used to create reaction conditions under which 5′ nuclease activity (cleavage) is retained while synthetic activity is reduced or eliminated.

Physical means may be used to preferentially inhibit the synthetic activity of a polymerase. For example, the synthetic activity of thermostable polymerases is destroyed by exposure of the polymerase to extreme heat (typically 96 to 100° C.) for extended periods of time (greater than or equal to 20 minutes). While these are minor differences with respect to the specific heat tolerance for each of the enzymes, these are readily determined. Polymerases are treated with heat for various periods of time and the effect of the heat treatment upon the synthetic and 5′ nuclease activities is determined.

III. Therapeutic Utility of 5′ Nucleases

The 5′ nucleases of the invention have not only the diagnostic utility discussed above, but additionally have therapeutic utility for the cleavage and inactivation of specific mRNAs inside infected cells. The mRNAs of pathogenic agents, such as viruses, bacteria, are targeted for cleavage by a synthesis-deficient DNA polymerase by the introduction of a oligonucleotide complementary to a given mRNA produced by the pathogenic agent into the infected cell along with the synthesis-deficient polymerase. Any pathogenic agent may be targeted by this method provided the nucleotide sequence information is available so that an appropriate oligonucleotide may be synthesized. The synthetic oligonucleotide anneals to the complementary mRNA thereby forming a cleavage structure recognized by the modified enzyme. The ability of the 5′ nuclease activity of thermostable DNA polymerases to cleave RNA-DNA hybrids is shown herein in Example 1D.

Liposomes provide a convenient delivery system. The synthetic oligonucleotide may be conjugated or bound to the nuclease to allow for co-delivery of these molecules. Additional delivery systems may be employed.

Inactivation of pathogenic mRNAs has been described using antisense gene regulation and using ribozymes (Rossi, U.S. Pat. No. 5,144,019, hereby incorporated by reference). Both of these methodologies have limitations.

The use of antisense RNA to impair gene expression requires stoichiometric and therefore, large molar excesses of anti-sense RNA relative to the pathogenic RNA to be effective. Ribozyme therapy, on the other hand, is catalytic and therefore lacks the problem of the need for a large molar excess of the therapeutic compound found with antisense methods. However, ribozyme cleavage of a given RNA requires the presence of highly conserved sequences to form the catalytically active cleavage structure. This requires that the target pathogenic mRNA contain the conserved sequences (GAAAC (X)_(n) GU) thereby limiting the number of pathogenic mRNAs that can be cleaved by this method. In contrast, the catalytic cleavage of RNA by the use of a DNA oligonucleotide and a 5′ nuclease is dependent upon structure only; thus, virtually any pathogenic RNA sequence can be used to design an appropriate cleavage structure.

IV. Detection of Antigenic or Nucleic Acid Targets by a Dual Capture Assay

The ability to generate 5′ nucleases from thermostable DNA polymerases provides the basis for a novel means of detecting the presence of antigenic or nucleic acid targets. In this dual capture assay, the polymerase domains encoding the synthetic activity and the nuclease activity are covalently attached to two separate and distinct antibodies or oligonucleotides. When both the synthetic and the nuclease domains are present in the same reaction and dATP, dTTP and a small amount of poly d(A-T) are provided, an enormous amount of poly d(A-T) is produced. The large amounts of poly d(A-T) are produced as a result of the ability of the 5′ nuclease to cleave newly made poly d(A-T) to generate primers that are, in turn, used by the synthetic domain to catalyze the production of even more poly d(A-T). The 5′ nuclease is able to cleave poly d(A-T) because poly d(A-T) is self-complementary and easily forms alternate structures at elevated temperatures. These structures are recognized by the 5′ nuclease and are then cleaved to generate more primer for the synthesis reaction.

The following is an example of the dual capture assay to detect an antigen(s): A sample to be analyzed for a given antigen(s) is provided. This sample may comprise a mixture of cells; for example, cells infected with viruses display virally-encoded antigens on their surface. If the antigen(s) to be detected are present in solution, they are first attached to a solid support such as the wall of a microtiter dish or to a bead using conventional methodologies. The sample is then mixed with 1) the synthetic domain of a thermostable DNA polymerase conjugated to an antibody which recognizes either a first antigen or a first epitope on an antigen, and 2) the 5′ nuclease domain of a thermostable DNA polymerase conjugated to a second antibody which recognizes either a second, distinct antigen or a second epitope on the same antigen as recognized by the antibody conjugated to the synthetic domain. Following an appropriate period to allow the interaction of the antibodies with their cognate antigens (conditions will vary depending upon the antibodies used; appropriate conditions are well known in the art), the sample is then washed to remove unbound antibody-enzyme domain complexes. dATP, dTTP and a small amount of poly d(A-T) is then added to the washed sample and the sample is incubated at elevated temperatures (generally in the range of 60-80° C. and more preferably, 70-75° C.) to permit the thermostable synthetic and 5′ nuclease domains to function. If the sample contains the antigen(s) recognized by both separately conjugated domains of the polymerase, then an exponential increase in poly d(A-T) production occurs. If only the antibody conjugated to the synthetic domain of the polymerase is present in the sample such that no 5′ nuclease domain is present in the washed sample, then only an arithmetic increase in poly d(A-T) is possible. The reaction conditions may be controlled in such a way so that an arithmetic increase in poly d(A-T) is below the threshold of detection. This may be accomplished by controlling the length of time the reaction is allowed to proceed or by adding so little poly d(A-T) to act as template that in the absence of nuclease activity to generate new poly d(A-T) primers very little poly d(A-T) is synthesized.

It is not necessary for both domains of the enzyme to be conjugated to an antibody. One can provide the synthetic domain conjugated to an antibody and provide the 5′ nuclease domain in solution or vice versa. In such a case the conjugated antibody-enzyme domain is added to the sample, incubated, then washed. dATP, dTTP, poly d(A-T) and the remaining enzyme domain in solution is then added.

Additionally, the two enzyme domains may be conjugated to oligonucleotides such that target nucleic acid sequences can be detected. The oligonucleotides conjugated to the two different enzyme domains may recognize different regions on the same target nucleic acid strand or may recognize two unrelated target nucleic acids.

The production of poly d(A-T) may be detected in many ways including: 1) use of a radioactive label on either the dATP or dTTP supplied for the synthesis of the poly d(A-T), followed by size separation of the reaction products and autoradiography; 2) use of a fluorescent probe on the dATP and a biotinylated probe on the dTTP supplied for the synthesis of the poly d(A-T), followed by passage of the reaction products over an avidin bead, such as magnetic beads conjugated to avidin; the presence of the florescent probe on the avidin-containing bead indicates that poly d(A-T) has been formed as the fluorescent probe will stick to the avidin bead only if the fluorescenated dATP is incorporated into a covalent linkage with the biotinylated dTTP; and 3) changes fluorescence polarization indicating an increase in size. Other means of detecting the presence of poly d(A-T) include the use of intercalating fluorescence indicators to monitor the increase in duplex DNA formation.

The advantages of the above dual capture assay for detecting antigenic or nucleic acid targets include:

1) No thermocycling of the sample is required. The polymerase domains and the dATP and dTTP are incubated at a fixed temperature (generally about 70° C.). After 30 minutes of incubation up to 75% of the added dNTPs are incorporated into poly d(A-T). The lack of thermocycling makes this assay well suited to clinical laboratory settings; there is no need to purchase a thermocycling apparatus and there is no need to maintain very precise temperature control.

2) The reaction conditions are simple. The incubation of the bound enzymatic domains is done in a buffer containing 0.5 mM MgCl₂ (higher concentrations may be used), 2-10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.5, approximately 50 μM dATP and dTTP. The reaction volume is 10-20 μl and reaction products are detectable within 10-20 minutes.

3) No reaction is detected unless both the synthetic and nuclease activities are present. Thus, a positive result indicates that both probes (antibody or oligonucleotide) have recognized their targets thereby increasing the specificity of recognition by having two different probes bind to the target.

The ability to separate the two enzymatic activities of the DNAP allows for exponential increases in poly d(A-T) production. If a DNAP is used which lacks 5′ nuclease activity, such as the Klenow fragment of DNAPEc1, only a linear or arithmetic increase in poly d(A-T) production is possible (Setlow et al., J. Biol. Chem. 247:224 (1972)). The ability to provide an enzyme having 5′ nuclease activity but lacking synthetic activity is made possible by the disclosure of this invention.

V. CLEAVASE Fragment Length Polymorphism for The Detection of Secondary Structure

Nucleic acids assume secondary structures which depend on base-pairing for stability. When single strands of nucleic acids (single-stranded DNA, denatured DNA or RNA) with different sequences, even closely related ones, are allowed to fold on themselves, they assume characteristic secondary structures. These differences in structures account for the ability of single strand conformation polymorphism (SSCP) analysis to distinguish between DNA fragments having closely related sequences.

The 5′ nuclease domains of certain DNA polymerases are specific endonucleases that recognize and cleave nucleic acids at specific structures rather than in a sequence-specific manner (as do restriction endonucleases). The isolated nuclease domain of DNAPTaq described herein (termed the enzyme CLEAVASE) recognizes the end of a duplex that has non-base paired strands at the ends. The strand with the 5′ end is cleaved at the junction between the single strand and the duplex.

FIG. 29 depicts a wild-type substrate and a mutant substrate wherein the mutant substrate differs from the wild-type by a single base change (A to G as indicated). According to the method of the present invention, substrate structures form when nucleic acids are denatured and allowed to fold on themselves (See FIG. 29, steps 1 and 2). The step of denaturation may be achieved by treating the nucleic acid with heat, low (<3) or high pH (>10), the use of low salt concentrations, the absence of cations, chemicals (e.g., urea, formamide) or proteins (e.g., helicases). Folding or renaturation of the nucleic acid is achieved by lowering of the temperature, addition of salt, neutralization of the pH, withdrawal of the chemicals or proteins.

The manner in which the substrate folds is dependent upon the sequence of the substrate. The 5′ nucleases of the invention cleave the structures (See FIG. 29, step 3). The end points of the resulting fragments reflect the locations of the cleavage sites. The cleavage itself is dependent upon the formation of a particular structure, not upon a particular sequence at the cleavage site.

When the 5′ nucleases of the invention cleave a nucleic acid substrate, a collection of cleavage products or fragments is generated. These fragments constitute a characteristic fingerprint of the nucleic acid which can be detected (e.g., by electrophoresis on a gel (see step 4)). Changes in the sequence of a nucleic acid (e.g., single point mutation between a wild-type and mutant gene) alter the pattern of cleavage structures formed. When the 5′ nucleases of the invention cleave the structures formed by a wild-type and an altered or mutant form of the substrate, the distribution of the cleavage fragments generated will differ between the two substrates reflecting the difference in the sequence of the two substrates (See FIG. 39, step 5).

The CLEAVASE enzyme generates a unique pattern of cleavage products for a substrate nucleic acid. Digestion with the CLEAVASE enzyme can be used to detect single base changes in DNA molecules of great length (e.g., 1.6 kb in length) to produce a characteristic pattern of cleavage products. The method of the invention is termed “CLEAVASE Fragment Length Polymorphism” (CFLP). However, it is noted that the invention is not limited to the use of the enzyme CLEAVASE; suitable enzymatic cleavage activity may be provided from a variety of sources including the CLEAVASE enzyme, Taq DNA polymerase, E. coli DNA polymerase I and eukaryotic structure-specific endonucleases (e.g., the yeast RAD2 protein and RAD1/RAD10 complex (Harrington, J. J. and Liener (1994) Genes and Develop. 8:1344), murine FEN-1 endonucleases (Harrington and Liener, supra) and calf thymus 5′ to 3′ exonuclease (Murante, R. S., et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269:1191). Indeed actual experimental data is provided herein which demonstrates that numerous enzymes may be used to generate a unique pattern of cleavage products for a substrate nucleic acid. Enzymes which are shown herein to be suitable for use in the CFLP method include the CLEAVASE BN enzyme, Taq DNA polymerase, Tth DNA polymerase, Tfl DNA polymerase, E. coli Exo III, and the yeast Rad1/Rad10 complex.

The invention demonstrates that numerous enzymes may be suitable for use in the CFLP method including enzymes which have been characterized in the literature a being 3′ exonucleases. In order to test whether an enzyme is suitable for use as a cleavage means in the CFLP method (i.e., capable of generating a unique pattern of cleavage products for a substrate nucleic acid), the following steps are taken. Careful consideration of the steps described below allows the evaluation of any enzyme (“enzyme X”) for use in the CFLP method.

An initial CFLP reaction is prepared using a previously characterized substrate nucleic acid (for example the 157 nucleotide fragment of exon 4 of the human tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47)). The substrate nucleic acid (approximately 100 fmoles; the nucleic acid template may contain a 5′ end or other label to permit easy detection of the cleavage products) is placed into a thin wall microcentrifuge tube in a solution which comprises reaction conditions reported to be optimal for the characterized activity of the enzyme (i.e., enzyme X). For example, if the enzyme X is a DNA polymerase, the initial reaction conditions would utilize a buffer which has been reported to be optimal for the polymerization activity of the polymerase. If enzyme X is not a polymerase, or if no specific components are reported to be needed for activity, the initial reaction may be assembled by placing the substrate nucleic acid in a solution comprising 1× CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, 0.05% TWEEN-20, 0.05% NONIDET P-40), pH 7.2 to 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂.

The substrate nucleic acid is denatured by heating the sample tube to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then the reaction is cooled to a temperature suitable for the enzyme being tested (e.g., if a thermostable polymerase is being tested the cleavage reaction may proceed at elevated temperatures such as 72° C.; if a mesophilic enzyme is being tested the tube is cooled to 37 C. for the cleavage reaction). Following denaturation and cooling to the target temperature, the cleavage reaction is initiated by the addition of a solution comprising 1 to 200 units of the enzyme to be tested (i.e., enzyme X; the enzyme may be diluted into 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 if desired).

Following the addition of the enzyme X solution, the cleavage reaction is allowed to proceed at the target temperature for 2 to 5 minutes. The cleavage reaction is then terminated (this may be accomplished by the addition of a stop solution (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol)) and the cleavage products are resolved and detected using any suitable method (e.g., electrophoresis on a denaturing polyacrylamide gel followed by transfer to a solid support and nonisotopic detection). The cleavage pattern generated is examined by the criteria described below for the CFLP optimization test.

An enzyme is suitable for use in the CFLP method if it is capable of generating a unique (i.e., characteristic) pattern of cleavage products from a substrate nucleic acid; this cleavage must be shown to be dependent upon the presence of the enzyme. Additionally, an enzyme must be able to reproducibly generate the same cleavage pattern when a given substrate is cleaved under the same reaction conditions. To test for reproducibility, the enzyme to be evaluated is used in at least two separate cleavage reactions run on different occasions using the same reaction conditions. If the same cleavage pattern is obtained on both occasions, the enzyme is capable of reproducibly generating a cleavage pattern and is therefore suitable for use in the CFLP method.

When enzymes derived from mesophilic organisms are to be tested in the CFLP reaction they may be initially tested at 37° C. However it may be desirable to use theses enzymes at higher temperatures in the cleavage reaction. The ability to cleave nucleic acid substrates over a range of temperatures is desirable when the cleavage reaction is being used to detect sequence variation (i.e., mutation) between different substrates. Strong secondary structures that may dominate the cleavage pattern are less likely to be destabilized by single-base changes and may therefore interfere with mutation detection. Elevated temperatures can then be used to bring these persistent structures to the brink of instability, so that the effects of small changes in sequence are maximized and revealed as alterations in the cleavage pattern. Mesophilic enzymes may be used at temperatures greater than 37° C. under certain conditions known to the art. These conditions include the use of high (i.e., 10-30%) concentrations of glycerol in the reaction conditions. Furthermore, it is noted that while an enzyme may be isolated from a mesophilic organism this fact alone does not mean that the enzyme may not demonstrate thermostability; therefore when testing the suitability of a mesophilic enzyme in the CFLP reaction, the reaction should be run at 37° C. and at higher temperatures. Alternatively, mild denaturants can be used to destablize the nucleic acid substrate at a lower temperature (e.g., 1-10% formamide, 1-10% DMSO and 1-10% glycerol have been used in enzymatic reactions to mimic thermal destablization).

Nucleic acid substrates that may be analyzed using a cleavage means, such as a 5′ nuclease, include many types of both RNA and DNA. Such nucleic acid substrates may all be obtained using standard molecular biological techniques. For example, substrates may be isolated from a tissue sample, tissue culture cells, bacteria or viruses, may be transcribed in vitro from a DNA template, or may be chemically synthesized. Furthermore, substrates may be isolated from an organism, either as genomic material or as a plasmid or similar extrachromosomal DNA, or it may be a fragment of such material generated by treatment with a restriction endonuclease or other cleavage agents or it may be synthetic.

Substrates may also be produced by amplification using the PCR. When the substrate is to be a single-stranded substrate molecule, the substrate may be produced using the PCR with preferential amplification of one strand (asymmetric PCR). Single-stranded substrates may also be conveniently generated in other ways. For example, a double-stranded molecule containing a biotin label at the end of one of the two strands may be bound to a solid support (e.g., a magnetic bead) linked to a streptavidin moiety. The biotin-labeled strand is selectively captured by binding to the streptavidin-bead complex. It is noted that the subsequent cleavage reaction may be performed using substrate attached to the solid support, as the enzyme CLEAVASE can cleave the substrate while it is bound to the bead. A single-stranded substrate may also be produced from a double-stranded molecule by digestion of one strand with exonuclease.

The nucleic acids of interest may contain a label to aid in their detection following the cleavage reaction. The label may be a radioisotope (e.g., a ³²P or ³⁵S-labeled nucleotide) placed at either the 5′ or 3′ end of the nucleic acid or alternatively the label may be distributed throughout the nucleic acid (i.e., an internally labeled substrate). The label may be a nonisotopic detectable moiety, such as a fluorophore which can be detected directly, or a reactive group which permits specific recognition by a secondary agent. For example, biotinylated nucleic acids may be detected by probing with a streptavidin molecule which is coupled to an indicator (e.g., alkaline phosphatase or a fluorophore), or a hapten such as digoxigenin may be detected using a specific antibody coupled to a similar indicator. Alternatively, unlabeled nucleic acid may be cleaved and visualized by staining (e.g., ethidium bromide staining) or by hybridization using a labeled probe. In a preferred embodiment, the substrate nucleic acid is labeled at the 5′ end with a biotin molecule and is detected using avidin or streptavidin coupled to alkaline phosphatase. In another preferred embodiment the substrate nucleic acid is labeled at the 5′ end with a fluorescein molecule and is detected using an anti-fluorescein antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate.

The cleavage patterns are essentially partial digests of the substrate in the reaction. When the substrate is labelled at one end (e.g., with biotin), all detectable fragments share a common end. The extension of the time of incubation of the enzyme CLEAVASE reaction does not significantly increase the proportion of short fragments, indicating that each potential cleavage site assumes either an active or inactive conformation and that there is little inter-conversion between the states of any potential site, once they have formed. Nevertheless, many of the structures recognized as active cleavage sites are likely to be only a few base-pairs long and would appear to be unstable at the elevated temperatures used in the CLEAVASE reaction. The formation or disruption of these structures in response to small sequence changes results in changes in the patterns of cleavage.

The products of the cleavage reaction are a collection of fragments generated by structure specific cleavage of the input nucleic acid. Nucleic acids which differ in size may be analyzed and resolved by a number of methods including electrophoresis, chromatography, fluorescence polarization, mass spectrometry and chip hybridization. The invention is illustrated using electrophoretic separation. However, it is noted that the resolution of the cleavage products is not limited to electrophoresis. Electrophoresis is chosen to illustrate the method of the invention because electrophoresis is widely practiced in the art and is easily accessible to the average practitioner.

If abundant quantities of DNA are available for the analysis, it may be advantageous to use direct fluorescence to detect the cleavage fragments, raising the possibility of analyzing several samples in the same tube and on the same gel. This “multiplexing” would permit automated comparisons of closely related substrates such as wild-type and mutant forms of a gene.

The CFLP reaction is useful to rapidly screen for differences between similar nucleic acid molecules. To optimize the CFLP reaction for any desired nucleic acid system (e.g., a wild-type nucleic acid and one or more mutant forms of the wild-type nucleic acid), it is most convenient to use a single substrate from the test system (for example, the wild-type substrate) to determine the best CFLP reaction conditions. A single suitable condition is chosen for doing the comparison CFLP reactions on the other molecules of interest. For example, a cleavage reaction may be optimized for a wild-type sequence and mutant sequences may subsequently be cleaved under the same conditions for comparison with the wild-type pattern. The objective of the CFLP optimization test is the identification of a set of conditions which allow the test molecule to form an assortment (i.e., a population) of intra-strand structures that are sufficiently stable such that treatment with a structure-specific cleavage agent such as the CLEAVASE enzyme or DNAPTaq will yield a signature array of cleavage products, yet are sufficiently unstable that minor or single-base changes within the test molecule are likely to result in a noticeable change in the array of cleavage products.

The following discussion illustrates the optimization of the CFLP method for use with a single-stranded substrate.

A panel of reaction conditions with varying salt concentration and temperature is first performed to identify an optimal set of conditions for the single-stranded CFLP. “Optimal CFLP” is defined for this test case as the set of conditions that yields the most widely spaced set of bands after electrophoretic separation, with the most even signal intensity between the bands.

Two elements of the cleavage reaction that significantly affect the stability of the nucleic acid structures are the temperature at which the cleavage reaction is performed and the concentration of salt in the reaction solution. Likewise, other factors affecting nucleic acid structures, such as, formamide, urea or extremes in pH may be used. The initial test typically will comprise reactions performed at four temperatures (60° C., 65° C., 70° C. and 75° C.) in three different salt concentrations (0 mM, 25 mM and 50 mM) for a total of twelve individual reactions. It is not intended that the present invention be limited by the salt utilized. The salt utilized may be chosen from potassium chloride, sodium chloride, etc. with potassium chloride being a preferred salt.

For each salt concentration to be tested, 30 μl of a master mix containing a DNA substrate, buffer and salt is prepared. When the substrate is DNA, suitable buffers include 3-(N-Morpholino)propanesulfonic acid (MOPS), pH 6.5 to 9.0, with pH 7.5 to 8.4 being particularly preferred and other “Good” biological buffers such as tris(Hydroxymethyl)aminomethane(Tris) or N,N-bis(2-Hydroxyethyl)glycine(Bicine), pH 6.5 to 9.0, with pH 7.5 to 8.4 being particularly preferred. When the nucleic acid substrate is RNA, the pH of the buffer is reduced to the range of 6.0 to 8.5, with pH 6.0 to 7.0 being particularly preferred. When manganese is to used as the divalent cation in the reaction, the use of Tris buffers is not preferred. Manganese tends to precipitate as manganous oxide in Tris if the divalent cation is exposed to the buffer for prolonged periods (such as in incubations of greater than 5 minutes or in the storage of a stock buffer). When manganese is to be used as the divalent cation, a preferred buffer is the MOPS buffer.

For reactions containing no salt (the “0 mM KCl” mix), the mix includes enough detectable DNA for 5 digests (e.g., approximately 500 fmoles of 5′ biotinylated DNA or approximately 100 fmoles of ³²P 5′ end labeled DNA) in 30 μl of 1× CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2) with 1.7 mM MnCl₂ or MgCl₂ (the final concentration of the divalent cation will be 1 mM). Other concentrations of the divalent cation may be used if appropriate for the cleavage agent chosen (e.g., E. coli DNA polymerase I is commonly used in a buffer containing 5 mM MgCl₂). The “25 mM KCl” mix includes 41.5 mM KCl in addition to the above components; the “50 mM KCl” mix includes 83.3 mM KCl in addition to the above components.

The mixes are distributed into labeled reaction tubes (0.2 ml, 0.5 ml or 1.5 ml “Eppendorf” style microcentrifuge tubes) in 6 μl aliquots, overlaid with light mineral oil or a similar barrier, and stored on ice until use. Sixty microliters of an enzyme dilution cocktail is assembled, comprising a 5′ nuclease at a suitable concentration in 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. Preferred 5′ nucleases and concentrations are 750 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN or 15 units of Taq DNA polymerase (or another eubacterial Pol A-type DNA polymerase). Suitable amounts of a similar structure-specific cleavage agent in 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂ may also be utilized.

If a strong (i.e., stable) secondary structure is formed by the substrates, a single nucleotide change is unlikely to significantly alter that structure, or the cleavage pattern it produces. Elevated temperatures can be used to bring structures to the brink of instability, so that the effects of small changes in sequence are maximized, and revealed as alterations in the cleavage pattern within the target substrate, thus allowing the cleavage reaction to occur at that point. Consequently, it is often desirable to run the reaction at an elevated temperature (i.e., above 55° C.).

Preferably, reactions are performed at 60° C., 65° C., 70° C. and 75° C. For each temperature to be tested, a trio of tubes at each of the three KCl concentrations are brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds, then cooled to the selected temperature. The reactions are then started immediately by the addition of 4 μl of the enzyme cocktail. A duplicate trio of tubes may be included (these tubes receiving 4 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without enzyme or MnCl₂), to assess the nucleic acid stability in these reaction conditions. All reactions proceed for 5 minutes, and are stopped by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% xylene cyanol and 0.05% bromophenol blue. Reactions may be assembled and stored on ice if necessary. Completed reactions are stored on ice until all reactions in the series have been performed.

Samples are heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction is resolved by electrophoresis through a suitable gel, such as 6 to 10% polyacrylarnide (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA for nucleic acids up to approximately 1.5 kb, or native or denaturing agarose gels for larger molecules. The nucleic acids may be visualized as described above, by staining, autoradiography (for radioisotopes) or by transfer to a nylon or other membrane support with subsequent hybridization and/or nonisotopic detection. The patterns generated are examined by the criteria described above and a reaction condition is chosen for the performance of the variant comparison CFLP patterns.

A “no enzyme” control allows the assessment of the stability of the nucleic acid substrate under particular reaction conditions. In this instance, the substrate is placed in a tube containing all reaction components except the enzyme and treated the same as the enzyme-containing reactions. Other control reactions may be run. A wild-type substrate may be cleaved each time a new mutant substrate is tested. Alternatively, a previously characterized mutant may be run in parallel with a substrate suspected of containing a different mutation. Previously characterized substrates allow for the comparison of the cleavage pattern produced by the new test substrate with a known cleavage pattern. In this manner, alterations in the new test substrate may be identified.

When the CFLP pattern generated by cleavage of a single-stranded substrate contains an overly strong (i.e., intense) band, this indicates the presence of a very stable structure. The preferred method for redistributing the signal is to alter the reaction conditions to increase structure stability (e.g., lower the temperature of the cleavage reaction, raise the monovalent salt concentration); this allows other less stable structures to compete more effectively for cleavage.

When the single-stranded substrate is labelled at one end (e.g., with biotin or 32P) all detectable fragments share a common end. For short DNA substrates (less than 250 nucleotides) the concentration of the enzyme (e.g., CLEAVASE BN) and the length of the incubation have minimal influence on the distribution of signal intensity, indicating that the cleavage patterns are not partial digests of a single structure assumed by the nucleic acid substrate, but rather are relatively complete digests of a collection of stable structures formed by the substrate. With longer DNA substrates (greater than 250 nucleotides) there is a greater chance of having multiple cleavage sites on each structure, giving apparent overdigestion as indicated by the absence of any residual full-length materials. For these DNA substrates, the enzyme concentration may be lowered in the cleavage reaction (for example, if 50 ng of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme were used initially and overdigestion was apparent, the concentration of enzyme may be reduced to 25, 10 or 1 ng per reaction).

When the CFLP reaction is to optimized for the cleavage a double-stranded substrate the following steps are taken. The cleavage of double-stranded DNA substrates up to 2,000 base pairs may be optimized in this manner.

The double-stranded substrate is prepared such that it contains a single end-label using any of the methods known to the art. The molar amount of DNA used in the optimization reactions is the same as that use for the optimization of reactions utilizing single-stranded substrates. The most notable differences between the optimization of the CFLP reaction for single- versus double-stranded substrates is that the double-stranded substrate is denatured in distilled water without buffer, the concentration of MnCl₂ in the reaction is reduced to 0.2 mM, the KCl (or other monovalent salt) is omitted, and the enzyme concentration is reduced to 10 to 25 ng per reaction. In contrast to the optimization of the single-stranded CFLP reaction (described above) where the variation of the monovalent salt (e.g., KCl) concentration is a critical controlling factor, in the optimization of the double-stranded CFLP reaction the range of temperature is the more critical controlling factor for optimization of the reaction. When optimizing the double-stranded CFLP reaction a reaction tube containing the substrate and other components described below is set up to allow performance of the reaction at each of the following temperatures: 40° C., 45° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 65° C., 70° C., and 75° C.

For each temperature to be tested, a mixture comprising the single end labelled double-stranded DNA substrate and distilled water in a volume of 15 μl is prepared and placed into a thin walled microcentrifuge tube. This mixture may be overlaid with light mineral oil or liquid wax (this overlay is not generally required but may provide more consistent results with some double-stranded DNA substrates).

A 2 mM solution of MnCl₂ is prepared. For each CFLP reaction, 5 μl of a diluted enzyme solution is prepared comprising 2 μl of 10× CFLP buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.2 to 8.2, 0.5% TWEEN-20, 0.5% NONIDET P-40), 2 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂ and 25 ng of CLEAVASE BN enzyme and distilled water to yield a final volume of 5 μl.

The DNA mixture is heated to 95° C. for 10 to 30 seconds and then individual tubes are cooled to the reaction temperatures to be tested (e.g., 40° C., 45° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 65° C., 70° C., and 75° C.). The cleavage reaction is started by adding 5 μl of the dilute enzyme solution to each tube at the target reaction temperature. The reaction is incubated at the target temperature for 5 minutes and the reaction is terminated (e.g., by the addition of 16 μl of stop solution comprising 95% formamide with 10 mM EDTA and 0.05% xylene cyanol and 0.05% bromophenol blue).

Samples are heated to 72° C. for 1 to 2 minutes and 3 to 7 μl of each reaction is resolved by electrophoresis through a suitable gel, such as 6 to 10% polyacrylamide (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA for nucleic acids up to approximately 1.5 kb, or native or denaturing agarose gels for larger molecules. The nucleic acids may be visualized as described above, by staining, autoradiography (for radioisotopes) or by transfer to a nylon or other membrane support with subsequent hybridization and/or nonisotopic detection. The patterns generated are examined by the criteria described above and a reaction condition is chosen for the performance of the double-stranded CFLP.

A “no enzyme” control allows the assessment of the stability of the nucleic acid substrate under particular reaction conditions. In this instance, the substrate is placed in a tube containing all reaction components except the enzyme and treated the same as the enzyme-containing reactions. Other control reactions may be run. A wild-type substrate may be cleaved each time a new mutant substrate is tested. Alternatively, a previously characterized mutant may be run in parallel with a substrate suspected of containing a different mutation. Previously characterized substrates allow for the comparison of the cleavage pattern produced by the new test substrate with a known cleavage pattern. In this manner, alterations in the new test substrate may be identified.

When performing double-stranded CFLP reactions the MnCl₂ concentration preferably will not exceed 0.25 mM. If the end label on the double-stranded DNA substrate disappears (i.e., loses its 5′ end label as judged by a loss of signal upon detection of the cleavage products), the concentration of MnCl₂ may be reduced to 0.1 mM. Any EDTA present in the DNA storage buffer will reduce the amount of free Mn²⁺ in the reaction, so double-stranded DNA should be dissolved in water or Tris-HCl with a EDTA concentration of 0.1 mM or less.

Cleavage products produced by cleavage of either single-or double-stranded substrates which contain a biotin label may be detected using the following nonisotopic detection method. After electrophoresis of the reaction products, the gel plates are separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A positively charged nylon membrane (preferred membranes include NYTRAN Plus, 0.2 or 0.45 mm-pore size, Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), cut to size and pre-wetted in 0.5× TBE (45 mM tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), is laid on top of the exposed gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane are removed (e.g., by rolling a 10 ml pipet firmly across the membrane). Two pieces of 3 MM filter paper (Whatman) are then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate is replaced, and the sandwich is clamped with binder clips or pressed with books or weights. The transfer is allowed to proceed 2 hours to overnight (the signal increases with longer transfer).

After transfer, the membrane is carefully peeled from the gel and allowed to air dry. Distilled water from a squeeze bottle can be used to loosen any gel that sticks to the membrane. After complete drying, the membrane is agitated for 30 minutes in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio; avoid any precipitates in the blocking buffer by decanting or filtering); 0.3 ml of the buffer is used per cm² of membrane (e.g., 30 mls for a 10 cm×10 cm blot). A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United Stated Biochemical) is added at a 1:4000 dilution directly to the blocking solution (avoid spotting directly on membrane), and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane is rinsed briefly with dH₂O and then washed 3 times (5 minutes of shaking per/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), using 0.5 ml buffer/cm² of membrane, with brief water rinses between each wash. The membrane is then washed twice in 1× SAAP buffer (no SDS) with 1 mM MgCl₂, drained thoroughly, and placed in a plastic heat-sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) is added to the bag and distributed over the entire membrane for 5 minutes. The bag is drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles, sealed, and the membrane is exposed to X-ray film (e.g., Kodak XRP) for 30 minutes. Exposure times are adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity.

To date, every nucleic acid substrate tested in the CFLP system has produced a reproducible pattern of fragments. The sensitivity and specificity of the cleavage reaction make this method of analysis very suitable for the rapid screening of mutations in cancer diagnostics, tissue typing, genetic identity, bacterial and viral typing, polymorphism analysis, structure analysis, mutant screening in genetic crosses, etc. It could also be applied to enhanced RNA analysis, high level multiplexing and extension to longer fragments. One distinct benefit of using the CLEAVASE reaction to characterize nucleic acids is that the pattern of cleavage products constitutes a characteristic fingerprint, so a potential mutant can be compared to previously characterized mutants without sequencing. Also, the place in the fragment pattern where a change is observed gives a good indication of the position of the mutation. But it is noted that the mutation need not be at the precise site of cleavage, but only in an area that affects the stability of the structure.

VI. Detection of Mutations in the p53 Tumor Suppressor Gene Using the CFLP Method

Tumor supressor genes control cellular proliferation and a variety of other processes important for tissue homeostasis. One of the most extensively studied of these, the p53 gene, encodes a regulator of the cell cycle machinery that can suppress the growth of cancer cells as well as inhibit cell transformation (Levine, Annu. Rev. Biochem. 62:623 (1993)). Tumor supressor mutations that alter or obliterate normal p53 function are common.

Mutations in the p53 tumor supressor gene are found in about half of all cases of human cancer making alterations in the p53 gene the most common cancer-related genetic change known at the gene level. In the wild-type or non-mutated form, the p53 gene encodes a 53-kD nuclear phosphoprotein, comprising 393 amino acids, which is involved in the control of cellular proliferation. Mutations in the p53 gene are generally (greater than 90%) missense mutations which cause a change in the identity of an amino acid rather than nonsense mutations which cause inactivation of the protein. It has been postulated that the high frequency of p53 mutation seen in human tumors is due to the fact that the missense mutations cause both a loss of tumor supressor function and a gain of oncogenic function (Lane, D. P. and Benchimol, S., Genes Dev. 4:1 (1990)).

The gene encoding the p53 protein is large, spanning 20,000 base pairs, and is divided into 11 exons (see FIG. 76). The ability to scan the large p53 gene for the presence of mutations has important clinical applications. In several major human cancers the presence of a tumor p53 mutation is associated with a poor prognosis. p53 mutation has been shown to be an independent marker of reduced survival in lymph node-negative breast cancers, a finding that may assist clinicians in reaching decisions regarding more aggressive therapeutic treatment. Also, Lowe and co-workers have demonstrated that the vulnerability of tumor cells to radiation or chemotherapy is greatly reduced by mutations which abolish p53-dependent apoptosis (Lowe et al., Cell 74:957 (1995)).

Regions of the p53 gene from approximately 10,000 tumors have been sequenced in the last 4 to 5 years, resulting in characterization of over 3,700 mutations of which approximately 1,200 represent independent p53 mutations (i.e., point mutations, insertion or deletions). A database has been compiled and deposited with the European Molecular Biology Laboratory (EMBL) Data Library and is available in electronic form (Hollstein, M. et al. (1994) Nucleic Acids Res. 22:3551 and Cariello, N. F. et al. (1994) Nucleic Acids Res. 22:3549). In addition, an IBM PC compatible software package to analyze the information in the database has been developed. (Cariello et al., Nucel. Acids Res. 22:3551 (1994)). The point mutations in the database were identified by DNA sequencing of PCR-amplified products. In most cases, preliminary screening for mutations by SSCP or DGGE was performed.

Analysis of the p53 mutations shows that the p53 gene contains 5 hot spot regions (HSR) most frequently mutated in human tumors that show a tight correlation between domains of the protein that are evolutionary highly conserved (ECDs) and seem to be specifically involved in the transformation process (see FIG. 76; the hieght of the bar represent the relative percentage of total mutations associated with the five HSRs). The five HSRs are confined to exons 5 to 8 and account for over 85% of the mutations detected. However, becuase these studies generally confined their analysis to PCR amplifications and sequencing of regions located between exons 5 to 8, it should be kept in mind that mutations outside this region are underrepresented. As 10% to 15% of the mutations lie outside this region, a clinically effective p53 gene DNA diagnostic should be able to cost-effectively scan for life-threatening mutations scattered across the entire gene (33).

The following table lists a number of the known p53 mutations.

HUMAN p53 Gene Mutations

TABLE 2 CODON NO. WILD-TYPE MUTANT EVENT TUMOR TYPE 36 CCG CCA GC→AT Lung 49 GAT CAT GC→CG CML 53 TGG TGT GC→TA CML 60 CCA TCA GC→AT CML 68 GAG TAG GC→TA SCLC 110 CGT TGT GC→AT Hepatoca 113 TTC TGT Double M NSCLC 128 CCT CCG T→G Breast 128 TCT C→T Breast 129 GCC GAC GC→TA Neurofibrosa 130 CTC CTG GC→CG MDS 132 AAG AAC GC→CG Colorectal ca 132 CAG AT→CG Breast ca 132 AAT GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 132 CAG AT→CG Pancreatic ca 132 AGG AT→GC CML 133 ATG TTG AT→TA Colorectal ca 133 AAG AT→TA Burkitt lymphoma 134 TTT TTA AT→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 135 TGC TAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 135 TCC GC→CG AML 135 TAC GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 135 TGG GC→CG MDS 136 CAA GAG Double M Breast ca 138 GCC GTC GC→AT Rhabdomyosa 138 GGC GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 140 ACC TAC AT→TA CML 141 TGC TAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 141 TAC GC→AT Bladder ca 143 GTG GCG AT→GC Colorectal ca 143 TTG GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 144 CAG TAG GC→AT Esophageal ca 144 CCG AT→CG Burkitt lymphoma 151 CCC CAT Double M Leiomyosa 151 CAC GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 151 TCC GC→AT Glioblastoma 151 TCC GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 152 CCG CTG GC→AT Leiomyosa 152 TCG GC→AT Breast ca 154 GGC GTC GC→TA Esophageal ca 154 GTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 154 GTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 154 GTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 156 CGC CCC GC→CG Rhabdomyosa 156 CCC GC→CG Osteosa 156 CGT GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 156 CCC GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 157 GTC TTC GC→TA Hepatoca 157 TTC GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 157 TTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 157 TTC GC→TA Breast ca 157 TTC GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 157 TTC GC→TA Bladder ca 158 CGC CGT GC→AT Neurofibrosa 158 CAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 159 GCC GTC GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 159 CCC GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 163 TAC TGC AT→GC Breast ca 163 CAC AT→GC Burkitt lymphoma 164 AAG CAG AT→CG Breast ca 171 GAG TAG GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 172 GTT TTT GC→TA Burkitt lymphoma 173 GTG TTG GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 173 TTG GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 173 GGG AT→CG Burkitt lymphoma 173 GTA GC→AT Gastric ca 175 CGC CAC GC→AT Colorectal ad 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ad 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ad 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 175 CAC GC→AT T-ALL 175 CAC GC→AT Brain tumor 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 175 CAC GC→AT Leiomyosa 175 CAC GC→AT Esophageal ca 175 CAC GC→AT Glioblastoma 175 CAC GC→AT Colorectal ca 175 CAC GC→AT T-ALL 175 CAC GC→AT Breast ca 175 CTC GC→TA Breast ca 175 AGC GC→TA Hepatoca 175 CAC GC→AT B-ALL 175 CAC GC→AT B-ALL 175 CAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 175 CAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 175 CAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 175 CAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 175 CAC GC→AT Gastric ca 176 TGC TTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 176 TTC GC→TA Esophageal ca 176 TTC GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 176 TAC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 177 CCC CGC GC→CG PTLC 179 CAT TAT GC→AT Neurofibrosa 179 CAG AT→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 179 CTT AT→TA Esophageal ca 179 GAT GC→CG Breast ca 179 CTT AT→TA Cholangiosa 179 CTT AT→TA Cholangiosa 181 CGC CAC GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 187 GGT TGT GC→TA Breast ca 192 CAG TAG GC→AT Esophageal ca 193 CAT CGT AT→GC Lung (SCLC) ca 193 TAT GC→AT Esophageal ca 193 CGT AT→GC AML 194 CTT TTT GC→AT Breast ca 194 CGT AT→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 194 CGT AT→CG Esophageal ca 194 CGT AT→CG Esophageal ca 194 CGT AT→CG B-CLL 196 CGA TGA GC→AT Colorectal ca 196 TGA GC→AT T-ALL 196 TGA GC→AT T-cell lymphoma 196 TGA GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 196 TGA GC→AT Bladder ca 198 GAA TAA GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 198 TAA GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 202 CGT CTT GC→TA CML 204 GAG GGG AT→GC CML 205 TAT TGT AT→GC B-ALL 205 TGT AT→GC B-CLL 205 TTT AT→TA Gastric ca 211 ACT GCT AT→GC Colorectal ca 213 CGA TGA GC→AT Colorectal ca 213 CAA GC→AT B-cell lymphoma 213 CAA GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 213 CGG AT→GC Lung (SCLC) ca 213 CGG AT→GC Esophageal ca 213 TGA GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 213 CGG AT→GC Lung (NSCLC) ca 213 TGA GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 213 TGA GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 215 AGT GGT AT→GC Colorectal ca 216 GTG ATG GC→AT Brain tumor 216 GAG AT→TA Burkitt lymphoma 216 TTG GC→TA Gastric ca 216 ATG GC→AT Ovarian ca 220 TAT TGT AT→GC Colorectal ca 229 TGT TGA AT→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 232 ATC AGC AT→CG B-CLL 234 TAC CAC AT→GC B-cell lymphoma 234 CAC AT→GC Burkitt lymphoma 234 TGC AT→GC Burkitt lymphoma 236 TAC TGC AT→GC Burkitt lymphoma 237 ATG AGG AT→CG T-ALL 237 ATA GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 237 ATA GC→AT AML 237 ATA GC→AT Breast ca 237 ATA GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 237 ATA GC→AT Richter's sdm 238 TGT TTT GC→TA Larynx ca 238 TAT GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 238 TAT GC→AT CML 239 AAC AGC AT→GC Colorectal ca 239 AGC AT→GC Colorectal ca 239 AGC AT→GC Burkitt lymphoma 239 AGC AT→GC CML 239 AGC AT→GC CML 239 AGC AT→GC B-CLL 241 TCC TTC GC→AT Colorectal ca 241 TGC GC→CG Colorectal ca 241 TGC GC→CG Bladder ca 242 TGC TCC GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 242 TTC GC→TA Breast ca 242 TCC GC→CG MDS 242 TAC GC→AT Ependymoma 244 GGC TGC GC→TA T-ALL 244 TGC GC→TA Esphageal ca 244 TGC GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 244 AGC GC→AT Hepatoca 245 GGC GTC GC→TA Esophageal ca 245 TGC GC→TA Li-Fraumeni sdm 245 AGC GC→AT Leyomyosa 245 GAC GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 245 AGC GC→AT Esophageal ca 245 GCC GC→CG Bladder ca 245 GAC GC→AT Breast ca 245 GAC GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 245 GGC TGC GC→TA Li-Fraumeni sdm 245 GTC GC→TA Cervical ca 246 ATG GTG AT→GC AML 246 ATC GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 246 GTG AT→GC Hepatoca 246 GTG AT→GC Bladder ca 247 AAC ATC AT→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 248 CGG TGG GC→AT Colorectal ad 248 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 CAG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 CAG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 CAG GC→AT T-ALL 248 CAG GC→AT Esophageal ca 248 TGG GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 248 TGG GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 248 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 TGG GC→AT Rhabdomyosa 248 CTG GC→TA Esophageal ca 248 TGG GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 248 CAG GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 248 CTG GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 248 CAG GC→AT T-ALL 248 TGG GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 248 CTG GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 248 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 248 CAG GC→AT Bladder ca 248 CAG GC→AT MDS 248 TGG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 248 CAG GC→AT Breast ca 248 CAG GC→AT B-CLL 248 CAG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 248 TGG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 248 CAG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 248 TGG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 248 CAG GC→AT Gastric ca 248 TGG GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 248 CAG GC→AT Breast ca 248 CAG GC→AT CML 248 TGG GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 248 CAG GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 248 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 249 AGG AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGC GC→CG Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 249 AGT GC→TA Esophageal ca 249 AGC GC→CG Breast ca 249 AGT GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 249 AGT GC→TA Hepatoca 250 CCC CTC GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 251 ATC AGC AT→CG Gastric ca 252 CTC CCC AT→GC Li-Fraumeni sdm 252 CTC CCC AT→GC Li-Fraumeni sdm 254 ATC GAC Double M Burkitt lymphoma 254 AAC AT→TA Breast ca 256 ACA GCA AT→GC T-ALL 258 GAA AAA GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 258 AAA GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 258 AAA GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 259 GAC GGC AT→GC T-ALL 260 TCC GCC AT→CG T-ALL 266 GGA GTA GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 266 GTA GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 266 GTA GC→TA Breast ca 267 CGG CCG GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 270 TTT TGT AT→CG Esophageal ca 270 TGT AT→CG T-ALL 272 GTG ATG GC→AT Brain tumor 272 CTG GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca 272 ATG GC→AT Hepatoca 272 ATG GC→AT AML 273 CGT TGT GC→AT Colorectal ad 273 TGT GC→AT Brain tumor 273 CAT GC→AT Breast ca 273 CAT GC→AT Colorectal ca 273 TGT GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 273 CTT GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 273 CAT GC→AT Colorectal ca 273 CAT GC→AT Colorectal ca 273 CAT GC→AT Colorectal ca 273 CAT GC→AT Lung (NSCLC) ca 273 CCT GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 273 CTT GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 273 CTT GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca 273 CAT GC→AT Thyroid ca 273 CAT GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 273 TGT GC→AT B-cell lymphoma 273 TGT GC→AT B-ALL 273 TGT GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 273 TGT GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 273 CAT GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 273 TGT GC→AT Cervical ca 273 TGT GC→AT AML 273 CAT GC→AT B→CLL 273 CTT GC→TA B-CLL 274 GTT GAT AT→TA Erythroleukemia 276 GCC CCC GC→CG B-ALL 276 GAC GC→TA Hepatoca 277 TGT TTT GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 278 CCT TCT GC→AT Esophageal ca 278 CTT GC→AT Esophageal ca 278 GCT GC→CG Breast ca 278 TCT GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca 278 CGT GC→CG Ovarian ca 280 AGA AAA GC→AT Esophageal ca 280 AAA GC→AT Breast ca 281 GAC GGC AT→GC Colorectal ca 281 GGC AT→GC Breast ca 281 GAC GAG GC→CG Richter's sdm 281 TAC GC→TA B-CLL 282 CGG TGG GC→AT Colorectal ad 282 TGG GC→AT Colorectal ca 282 CGG TGG GC→AT Rhabdomyosa 282 GGG GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 282 CCG GC→CG Breast ca 282 TGG GC→AT Bladder ca 282 TGG GC→AT AML 282 CTG GC→TA Breast ca 282 TGG GC→AT B-ALL 282 TGG GC→AT Burkitt lymphoma 282 TGG GC→AT Richter's sdm 282 TGG GC→AT Ovarian ca 282 TGG GC→AT Li-Fraumeni sdm 283 CGC TGC GC→AT Colorectal ca 283 CCC GC→CG Lung (NSCLC) ca 285 GAG AAG GC→AT Breast ca 286 GAA AAA GC→AT Colorectal ca 286 GGA AT→GC Lung (SCLC) ca 286 GCA AT→CG Li-Fraumeni sdm 287 GAG TAG GC→TA Burkitt lymphoma 293 GGG TGG GC→TA Glioblastoma 298 GAG TAG GC→TA Bladder ca 302 GGG GGT GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 305 AAG TAG AT→TA Esophageal ca 305 TAG AT→TA Esophageal ca 307 GCA ACA GC→AT Breast ca 309 CCC TCC GC→AT Colorectal ca 334 GGG GTG GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca 342 CGA TGA GC→AT Lung (SCLC) ca

DELETIONS/INSERTIONS CODON EVENT TUMOR TYPE 137 del 7 Gastric ca 143 del 1 Gastric ca 152 del 13 Colorectal ad 167 del 1 Breast ca 168 del 31 Hepatoca 175 del 18 Breast ca 190 del 3 nul ALL 201 del 1 Breast ca 206 del 1 Burkitt lymphoma 206 del 1 Burkitt lymphoma 214 del 1 B-ALL 236 del 27 Bladder ca 239 del 1 Lung (NSCLC) ca 262 del 1 Astrocytoma 262 del 24 Gastric ca 262 del 24 Lung (NSCLC) ca 263 del 1 Esophageal ca 264 del 1 AML 286 del 8 Hepatoca 293 del 1 Lung (NSCLC) ca 307 del 1 Li-Fraumeni sdm 381 del 1 Hepatoca Exon 5 del 15 B-ALL 152 ins 1 B-CLL 239 ins 1 Waldenstrom sdm 252 ins 4 Gastric ca 256 ins 1 AML 275 ins 1 B-CLL 301 ins 1 MDS 307 ins 1 Glioblastoma Exon 8 ins 25 HCL

SPLICE MUTATIONS INTRON SITE EVENT TUMOR TYPE Intron 3 Accept GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 4 Donor GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 4 Donor GC→AT T→ALL Intron 5 Donor GC→AT CML Intron 6 Donor AT→CG Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 6 Accept AT→TA Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 6 Accept AT→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca Intron 7 Donor GC→TA Lung (NSCLC) ca Intron 7 Accept GC→CG Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 7 Accept CG→AT AML Intron 7 Donor GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca Intron 9 Donor GC→TA Lung (SCLC) ca

A. CFLP Analysis of p53 Mutations in Clinical Samples

To permit the identiifcation of mutations in the p53 gene from clinical samples, nucleic acid comprising p53 gene sequences are prepared. The nucleic acid may comprise genomic DNA, RNA or cDNA forms of the p53 gene. Nucleic acid may be extracted from a variety of clinical samples (fresh or frozen tissue, suspensions of cells (e.g., blood), cerebral spinal fluid, sputum, etc.) using a variety of standard techniques or commerically available kits. For example, kits which allow the isolation of RNA or DNA from tissue samples are available from Qiagen, Inc. (Chatsworth, Calif.) and Stratagene (LaJolla, Calif.), respectively. Total RNA may be isolated from tissues and tumors by a number of methods known to those skilled in the art and commercial kits are available to facilitate the isolation. For example, the RNEASY kit (Qiagen Inc., Chatsworth, Calif.) provides protocol, reagents and plasticware to permit the isolation of total RNA from tissues, cultured cells or bacteria, with no modification to the manufacturer's instructions, in approximately 20 minutes. Should it be desirable, in the case of eukaryotic RNA isolates, to further enrich for messenger RNAs, the polyadenylated RNAs in the mixture may be specifically isolated by binding to an oligo-deoxythymidine matrix, through the use of a kit such as the OLIGOTEX kit (Qiagen). Comparable isolation kits for both of these steps are available through a number of commercial suppliers.

In addition, RNA may be extracted from samples, including biopsy specimens, convienently by lysing the homogenized tissue in a buffer containing 0.22 M NaCl, 0.75 mM MgCl₂, 0.1 M Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 12.5 mM EDTA, 0.25% NP40, 1% SDS, 0.5 mM DTT, 500 u/ml placental RNAse inhibitor and 200 μg/ml Proteinase K. Following incubation at 37° C. for 30 min, the RNA is extracted with phenol:chloroform (1:1) and the RNA is recovered by ethanol precipitation.

Since the majority of p53 mutations are found within exons 5-8, it is convenient as a first analysis to examine a PCR fragment spanning this region. PCR fragments spanning exons 5-8 may be amplified from clinical samples using the technique of RT-PCR (reverse transcription-PCR); kits which permit the user to start with tissue and produce a PCR product are available from Perkin Elmer (Norwalk, Conn.) and Stratagene (LaJolla, Calif.). The RT-PCR technique generates a single-stranded cDNA corresponding to a chosen segment of the coding region of a gene by using reverse transcription of RNA; the single-stranded cDNA is then used as template in the PCR. In the case of the p53 gene, an approximately 600 bp fragment spanning exons 5-8 is generated using primers located in the coding region immediately adjacent to exons 5 and 8 in the RT-PCR. The PCR amplified segment is then subjected to the CFLP reaction and the reaction products are analysed as described above in section VIII.

Fragments suitable for CFLP analysis may also be generated by PCR amplification of genomic DNA. DNA is extracted from a sample and primers corresponding to sequences present in introns 4 and 8 are used to amplify a segment of the p53 gene spanning exons 5-8 which includes introns 5-7 (an approximately 2 kb fragment). If it is desirable to use smaller fragments of DNA in the CFLP reaction, primers may be chosen to amplify smaller (1 kb or less) segments of genomic DNA or alternatively a large PCR fragment may be divided into two or more smaller frgaments using restriction enzymes.

In order to facilitate the identification of p53 mutations in the clinical setting, a library containing the CFLP pattern produced by previously characterized mutations may be provided. Comparision of the pattern generated using nucleic acid derived from a clinical sample with the patterns produced by cleavage of known and characterized p53 mutations will allow the rapid identification of the specific p53 mutation present in the patient's tissue. The comparison of CFLP patterns from clinical samples to the patterns present in the library may be accomplished by a variety of means. The simplest and least expensive comparision involves visual comparision. Given the large number of unique mutations known at the p53 locus, visual (i.e., manual) comparision may be too time-consuming, especially when large numbers of clinical isolates are to be screened. Therefore the CFLP patterns or “bar codes” may be provided in an electronic format for ease and efficiency in comparision. Electronic entry may comprise storage of scans of gels containing the CFLP products of the reference p53 mutations (using for example, the GENEREADER and GEL DOCTOR Fluorescence Gel documentation system (BioRad, Hercules, Calif.) or the IMAGE MASTER (Pharmacia Biotech, Piscataway, N.J.). Alternatively, as the detection of cleavage patterns may be automated using DNA sequencing instrumentation (see Example 20), the banding pattern may be stored as the signal collected from the appropriate channels during an automated run (examples of instrumentation suitable for such analysis and data collection include fluorescence-based gel imagers such as fluoroimagers produced by Molecular Dynamics and Hitachi or by real-time electrophoresis detection systems such as the ABI 377 or Pharmacia ALF DNA Sequencer).

B. Generation of a Library of Characterized p53 Mutations

The generation of a library of characterized mutations will enable clinical samples to be rapidly and directly screened for the presence of the most common p53 mutations. Comparision of CFLP patterns generated from clinical samples to the p53 bar code library will establish both the presence of a mutation in the p53 gene and its precise identity without the necessity of costly and time consuming DNA sequence analysis.

The p53 bar code library is generated using reverse genetics. Engineering of p53 mutations ensures the identity and purity of each of the mutations as each engineered mutation is confirmed by DNA sequencing. The individual p53 mutations in p53 bar code library are generated using the 2-step “recombinant PCR” technique (Higuchi, R. (1991) In Ehrlich, H. A. (Ed.), PCR Technology: Principles and Applications for DNA Amplification, Stockton Press, New York, pp. 61-70 and Nelson, R. M. and Long, G. L. (1989) Analytical Biochem. 180:147). FIG. 77 provides a schematic representation of one method of a 2-step recombinant PCR technique that may be used for the generation of p53 mutations.

The template for the PCR amplifications is the entire human p53 cDNA gene. In the first of the two PCRs (designated “PCR 1” in FIG. 77), an oligonucleotide containing the engineered mutation (“oligo A” in FIG. 77) and an oligonucleotide containing a 5′ arm of approximately 20 non-complementary bases (“oligo B”) are used to amplify a relatively small region of the target DNA (100-200 bp). The resulting amplification product will contain the mutation at its extreme 5′ end and a foreign sequence at its 3′ end. The 3′ sequence is designed to include a unique restriction site (e.g., Eco RI) to aid in the directional cloning of the final amplification fragment (important for purposes of sequencing and archiving the DNA containing the mutation). The product generated in the upstream or first PCR may be gel purified if desired prior to the use of this first PCR product in the second PCR; however gel purification is not required once it is established that this fragment is the only species amplified in the PCR.

The small PCR fragment containing the engineered mutation is then used to direct a second round of PCR (PCR 2). In PCR 2, the target DNA is a larger fragment (approximately 1 kb) of the same subcloned region of the p53 cDNA. Because the sequence at the 3′ end of the small PCR fragment is not complementary to any of the sequences present in the target DNA, only that strand in which the mismatch is at the extreme 5′ end is amplified in PCR 2 (a 3′ non-templated arm cannot be extended in PCR). Amplification is accomplished by the addition of a primer complementary to a region of the target DNA upstream of the locus of the engineered mutation (“oligo C”) and by the addition of a primer complementary to the 5′ noncomplementary sequence of the small product of PCR 1 (“oligo D”). By directing amplification from the noncomplementary sequence, this procedure results in the specific amplification of only those sequences containing the mutation. In order to facilitate cloning of these PCR products into a standard vector, a second unique restriction site can be engineered into oligo C (e.g., HindIII).

The use of this 2-step PCR approach requires that only one primer be synthesized for each mutant to be generated after the initial set-up of the system (i.e., oligo A). Oligos B, C and D can be used for all mutations generated within a given region. Because oligos C and D are designed to include different and unique restriction sites, subsequent directional cloning of these PCR products into plasmid vectors (such as pUC 19) is greatly simplified. Selective amplification of only those sequences that include the desired mutational change simplifies identification of mutation-containing clones as only verification of the sequence of insert containing plasmids is required. Once the sequence of the insert has been verified, each mutation-containing clone may be maintained indefinitely as a bacterial master stock. In addition, DNA stocks of each mutant can be maintained in the form of large scale PCR preparations. This permits distribution of either bactera harboring plasmids containing a given mutation or a PCR preparation to be distributed as individual controls in kits containing reagents for the scanning of p53 mutations in clinical samples or as part of a supplemental master p53 mutation library control kit.

An alternative 2-step recombinant PCR is diagrammed in FIG. 78, and described in Example 32. In this method two mutagenic oligonucleotides, one for each strand, are synthesized. These oligonucleotides are substantially complementary to each other but are opposite in orientation. That is, one is positioned to allow amplification of an “upstream” region of the DNA, with the mutation incorporated into the 3′ proximal region of the upper, or sense strand, while the other is positioned to allow amplification of a “downstream” segment with the intended mutation incorporated into the 5′ proximal region of the upper, or sense strand. These two double stranded products share the sequence provided by these mutagenic oligonucleotides. When purified, combined, denatured and annealed, those strands that anneal with recessed 3′ ends can be extended or filled in by the action of DNA polymerase, thus recreating a full length molecules with the mutation in the central region. This recombinant can be amplified by the use of the “outer” primer pair,those used to make the 5′ end of the “upstream” and the 3′ end of the “downstream” intermediate fragments.

While extra care must be taken with this method (in comparison with the method described above) because the outer primers can amplify both the recombinant and the unmodified sequence, this method does allow rapid recombinant PCR to be performed using existing end primers, and without the introduction of foreign sequences. In summary, this method is often used if only a few recombinations are to be performed. When large volumes of mutagenic PCRs are to be performed, the first described method is preferable as the first method requires a single oligo be synthesized for each mutagenesis and only recombinants are amplified.

An important feature of kits designed for the identifcation of p53 mutations in clinical samples is the inclusion of the specific primers to be used for generating PCR fragments to be analyzed for CFLP. While DNA fragments from 100 to over 1500 bp can be reproducibly and accurately analyzed for the presence of sequence polymorphisms by this technique, the precise patterns generated from different length fragments of the same input DNA sequence will of course vary. Not only are patterns shifted relative to one another depending on the length of the input DNA, but in some cases, more long range interactions between distant regions of long DNA fragments may result in the generation of additional cleavage products not seen with shorter input DNA products. For this reason, exact matches with the bar code library will be assured through the use of primers designed to amplify the same size fragment from the clinical samples as was used to generate a given version of the p53 bar code library.

C. Detection of Unique CFLP Patterns for p53 Mutations

The simplest and most direct method of analyzing the DNA fragments produced in the CFLP reaction is by gel electrophoresis. Because electrophoresis is widely practiced and easily accessible, initial efforts have been aimed at generating a database in this familiar format. It should, however, be noted that resolution of DNA fragments generated by CFLP analysis is not limited to electrophoretic methods. Mass spectrometry, chromotography, fluorescence polarization, and chip hybridization are all approaches that are currently being refined and developed in a number of research laboratories. Once generated, the CFLP database is easily adapted to analysis by any of these methods.

There are several possible alternatives available for detection of CFLP patterns. A critical user benefit of CFLP analysis is that the results are not dependent on the chosen method of DNA detection. DNA fragments may be labeled with a radioisotope (e.g., a ³²P or ³⁵S-labeled nucleotide) placed at either the 5′ or 3′ end of the nucleic acid or alternatively the label may be distributed throughout the nucleic acid (i.e., an internally labeled substrate). The label may be a nonisotopic detectable moiety, such as a fluorophore which can be detected directly, or a reactive group which permits specific recognition by a secondary agent. CFLP patterns have been detected by immunostaining, biotin-avidin interactions, autoradiography and direct fluorescence imaging. Since radiation use is in rapid decline in clinical settings and since both immunostaining and biotin-avidin based detection schemes require time-consuming transfer of DNA onto an expensive membrane support, fluorescence-based detection methods may be preferred. It is important to note, however, that any of the above methods may be used to generate CFLP bar codes to be input into the database.

In addition to their being a direct, non-isotopic means of detecting CFLP patterns, fluorescence-based schemes offer a noteworthy additional advantage in clinical applications. CFLP allows the analysis of several samples in the same tube and in the same lane on a gel. This “multiplexing” permits rapid and automated comparison of a large number of samples in a fraction of the time and for a lower cost than can be realized through individual analysis of each sample. This approach opens the door to several alternative applications. A researcher could decide to double, triple or quadruple (up to 4 dyes have been demonstrated to be detectable and compatible in a single lane in commerically available DNA sequencing instrumentation such as the ABI 373/377) the number of samples run on a given gel. Alternatively, the analyst may include a normal p53 gene sample in each tube, and each gel lane, along with a differentially labeled size standard, as a internal standard to verify both the presence and the exact location(s) of a pattern difference(s) between the normal p53 gene and putative mutants.

IV. Detection and Identification of Pathogens Using the CFLP Method

A. Detection and Identification of Hepatitis C Virus

Hepatitis C virus (HCV) infection is the predominant cause of post-transfusion non-A, non-B (NANB) hepatitis around the world. In addition, HCV is the major etiologic agent of hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC) and chronic liver disease world wide. HCV infection is transmitted primarily to blood transfusion recipients and intravenous drug users although maternal transmission to offspring and transmission to recipients of organ transplants have been reported.

The genome of the positive-stranded RNA hepatitis C virus comprises several regions including 5′ and 3′ noncoding regions (i.e., 5′ and 3′ untranslated regions) and a polyprotein coding region which encodes the core protein (C), two envelope glycoproteins (E1 and E2/NS1) and six nonstructural glycoproteins (NS2-NS5b). Molecular biological analysis of the small (9.4 kb) RNA genome has showed that some regions of the genome are very highly conserved between isolates, while other regions are fairly rapidly changeable. The 5′ noncoding region (NCR) is the most highly conserved region in the HCV. These analyses have allowed these viruses to be divided into six basic genotype groups, and then further classified into over a dozen sub-types (the nomenclature and division of HCV genotypes is evolving; see Altamirano et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:1034 (1995) for a recent classification scheme). These viral groups are associated with different geographical areas, and accurate identification of the agent in outbreaks is important in monitoring the disease. While only Group 1 HCV has been observed in the United States, multiple HCV genotypes have been observed in both Europe and Japan.

The ability to determine the genotype of viral isolates also allows comparisons of the clinical outcomes from infection by the different types of HCV, and from infection by multiple types in a single individual. HCV type has also been associated with differential efficacy of treatment with interferon, with Group 1 infected individuals showing little response (Kanai et al., Lancet 339:1543 (1992) and Yoshioka et al., Hepatology 16:293 (1992)). Pre-screening of infected individuals for the viral type will allow the clinician to make a more accurate diagnosis, and to avoid costly but fruitless drug treatment.

Existing methods for determining the genotype of HCV isolates include PCR amplification of segments of the HCV genome coupled with either DNA sequencing or hybridization to HCV-specific probes, RFLP analysis of PCR amplified HCV DNA anything else? All of these methods suffer from the limitations discussed above (i.e., DNA sequencing is too labor-intensive and expensive to be practical in clinical laboratory settings; RFLP analysis suffers from low sensitivity).

Universal and genotype specific primers have been designed for the amplification of HCV sequences from RNA extracted from plasma or serum (Okamoto et al. J. Gen. Virol. 73:673 (1992); Yoshioka et al., Hepatology 16:293 (1992) and Altamirano et al., supra). These primers can be used to generate PCR products which serve as substrates in the CFLP assay of the present invention. As shown herein CFLP analysis provides a rapid and accurate method of typing HCV isolates. CFLP analysis of HCV substrates allows a distinction to be made between the major genotypes and subtypes of HCV thus providing improved methods for the genotyping of HCV isolates.

B. Detection and Identification of Multi-Drug Resistant M. tuberculosis

In the past decade there has been a tremendous resurgence in the incidence of tuberculosis in this country and throughout the world. In the United States, the incidence of tuberculosis has risen steadily during past decade, accounting for 2000 deaths annually, with as many as 10 million Americans infected with the disease. The situation is critical in New York City, where the incidence has more than doubled in the past decade, accounting for 14% of all new cases in the United States in 1990 (Frieden et al., New Engl. J. Med. 328:521 (1993)).

The crisis in New York City is particularly dire because a significant proportion (as many as one-third) of the recent cases are resistant to one or more antituberculosis drugs (Frieden et al, supra and Hughes, Scrip Magazine May (1994)). Multi-drug resistant tuberculosis (MDR-TB) is an iatrogenic disease that arises from incomplete treatment of a primary infection (Jacobs, Jr., Clin. Infect. Dis. 19:1 (1994)). MDR-TB appears to pose an especially serious risk to the immunocompromised, who are more likely to be infected with MDR-TB strains than are otherwise healthy individuals (Jacobs, Jr., supra). The mortality rate of MDR-TB in immunocompromised individuals is alarmingly high, often exceeding 90%, compared to a mortality rate of <50% in otherwise uncompromised individuals (Donnabella et al., Am. J. Respir. Dis. 11:639 (1994)).

From a clinical standpoint, tuberculosis has always been difficult to diagnose because of the extremely long generation time of Mycobacterium tuberculosis as well as the environmental prevalence of other, faster growing mycobacterial species. The doubling time of M. tuberculosis is 20-24 hours, and growth by conventional methods typically requires 4 to 6 weeks to positively identify M. tuberculosis (Jacobs, Jr. et al., Science 260:819 (1993) and Shinnick and Jones in Tuberculosis: Pathogenesis, Protection and Control, Bloom, ed., American Society of Microbiology, Washington, D.C. (1994), pp. 517-530). It can take an additional 3 to 6 weeks to diagnose the drug susceptibility of a given strain (Shinnick and Jones, supra). Needless to say, the health risks to the infected individual, as well as to the public, during a protracted period in which the patient may or may not be symptomatic, but is almost certainly contagious, are considerable. Once a drug resistance profile has been elucidated and a diagnosis made, treatment of a single patient can cost up to $250,000 and require 24 months.

The recent explosion in the incidence of the disease, together with the dire risks posed by MDR strains, have combined to spur a burst of research activity and commercial development of procedures and products aimed at accelerating the detection of M. tuberculosis as well the elucidation of drug resistance profiles of M. tuberculosis clinical isolates. A number of these methods are devoted primarily to the task of determining whether a given strain is M. tuberculosis or a mycobacterial species other than tuberculosis. Both culture based methods and nucleic-acid based methods have been developed that allow M. tuberculosis to be positively identified more rapidly than by classical methods: detection times have been reduced from greater than 6 weeks to as little as two weeks (culture-based methods) or two days (nucleic acid-based methods). While culture-based methods are currently in wide-spread use in clinical laboratories, a number of rapid nucleic acid-based methods that can be applied directly to clinical samples are under development. For all of the techniques described below, it is necessary to first “decontaminate” the clinical samples, such as sputum (usually done by pretreatment with N-acetyl L-cysteine and NaOH) to reduce contamination by non-mycobacterial species (Shinnick and Jones, supra.)

The polymerase chain reaction (PCR) has been applied to the detection of M. tuberculosis and can be used to detect its presence directly from clinical specimens within one to two days. The more sensitive techniques rely on a two-step procedure: the first step is the PCR amplification itself, the second is an analytical step such as hybridization of the amplicon to a M. tuberculosis-specific oligonucleotide probe, or analysis by RFLP or DNA sequencing (Shinnick and Jones, supra).

The Amplified M. tuberculosis Direct Test (AMTDT; Gen-Probe) relies on Transcription Mediated Amplification (TMA; essentially a self-sustained sequence reaction (3SR) amplification) to amplify target rRNA sequences directly from clinical specimens. Once the rRNA has been amplified, it is then detected by a dye-labeled assay such as the PACE2. This assay is highly subject to inhibition by substances present in clinical samples.

The Cycling Probe Reaction (CPR; ID Biomedical). This technique, which is under development as a diagnostic tool for detecting the presence of M. tuberculosis, measures the accumulation of signal probe molecules. The signal amplification is accomplished by hybridizing tripartite DNA-RNA-DNA probes to target nucleic acids, such as M. tuberculosis-specific sequences. Upon the addition of RNAse H, the RNA portion of the chimeric probe is degraded, releasing the DNA portions, which accumulate linearly over time to indicate that the target sequence is present (Yule, Bio/Technology 12:1335 (1994)). The need to use of RNA probes is a drawback, particularly for use in crude clinical samples, where RNase contamination is often rampant.

The above nucleic acid-based detection and differentiation methods offer a clear time savings over the more traditional, culture-based methods. While they are beginning to enter the clinical setting, their usefulness in the routine diagnosis of M. tuberculosis is still in question, in large part because of problems with associated with cross-contamination and low-sensitivity relative to culture-based methods. In addition, many of these procedures are limited to analysis of respiratory specimens (Yule, Bio/Technology 12:1335 (1994)).

ii) Determination of the Antibiotic Resistance Profile of M. tuberculosis

a) Culture-based methods: Once a positive identification of M. tuberculosis has been made, it is necessary to characterize the extent and nature of the strain's resistance to antibiotics. The traditional method used to determine antibiotic resistance is the direct proportion agar dilution method, in which dilutions of culture are plated on media containing antibiotics and on control media without antibiotics. This method typically adds an additional 2-6 weeks to the time required for diagnosis and characterization of an unknown clinical sample (Jacobs, Jr., supra).

The Luciferase Reporter Mycobacteriophage (LRM) assay was first described in 1993 (Jacobs, Jr. et al., Science 260:819 (1993)). In this assay, a mycobacteriophage containing a cloned copy of the luciferase gene is used to infect mycobacterial cultures. In the presence of luciferin and ATP, the expressed luciferase produces photons, easily distinguishable by eye or by a luminometer, allowing a precise determination of the extent of mycobacterial growth in the presence of antibiotics. Once sufficient culture has been obtained (usually 10-14 days post-inoculation), the assay can be completed in 2 days. This method suffers from the fact that the LRM are not specific for M. tuberculosis: they also infect M. smegmatis and M. bovis (e.g., BCG), thereby complicating the interpretation of positive results. Discrimination between the two species must be accomplished by growth on specialized media which does not support the growth of M. tuberculosis (e.g., NAP media). This confirmation requires another 2 to 4 days.

The above culture-based methods for determining antibiotic resistance will continue to play a role in assessing the effectiveness of putative new anti-mycobacterial agents and those drugs for which a genetic target has not yet been identified. However, recent success in elucidating the molecular basis for resistance to a number of anti-mycobacterial agents, including many of the front-line drugs, has made possible the use of much faster, more accurate and more informative DNA polymorphism-based assays.

b) DNA-based methods: Genetic loci involved in resistance to isoniazid, rifampin, streptomycin, fluoroquinolones, and ethionamide have been identified (Jacobs, Jr., supra; Heym et al., Lancet 344:293 (1994) and Morris et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:954 (1995)). A combination of isoniazid (inh) and rifampin (rif) along with pyrazinamide and ethambutol or streptomycin, is routinely used as the first line of attack against confirmed cases of M. tuberculosis (Banerjee et al., Science 263:227 (1994)). Consequently, resistance to one or more of these drugs can have disastrous implications for short course chemotherapy treatment. The increasing incidence of such resistant strains necessitates the development of rapid assays to detect them and thereby reduce the expense and community health hazards of pursuing ineffective, and possibly detrimental, treatments. The identification of some of the genetic loci involved in drug resistance has facilitated the adoption of mutation detection technologies for rapid screening of nucleotide changes that result in drug resistance. The availability of amplification procedures such as PCR and SDA, which have been successful in replicating large amounts of target DNA directly from clinical specimens, makes DNA-based approaches to antibiotic profiling far more rapid than conventional, culture-based methods.

The most widely employed techniques in the genetic identification of mutations leading to drug resistance are DNA sequencing, Restriction Fragment Length Polymorphism (RFLP), PCR-Single Stranded Conformational Polymorphism (PCR-SSCP), and PCR-dideoxyfingerprinting (PCR-ddF). All of these techniques have drawbacks as discussed above. None of them offers a rapid, reproducible means of precisely and uniquely identifying individual alleles.

In contrast the CFLP method of the present invetion provides an approach that relies on structure specific cleavage to generate distinct collections of DNA fragments. This method is highly sensitive (>98%) in its ability to detect sequence polymorphisms, and requires a fraction of the time, skill and expense of the techniques described above.

The application of the CFLP method to the detection of MDR-TB is illustrated herein using segments of DNA amplified from the rpoB and katG genes. Other genes associated with MDR-TB, including but not limited to those involved in conferring resistance to isoniazid (inhA), streptomycin (rpsl and rrs), and fluoroquinoline (gyrA), are equally well suited to the CFLP assay.

C. Detection and Identification of Bacterial Pathogens

Identification and typing of bacterial pathogens is critical in the clinical management of infectious diseases. Precise identity of a microbe is used not only to differentiate a disease state from a healthy state, but is also fundamental to determining whether and which antibiotics or other antimicrobial therapies are most suitable for treatment. Traditional methods of pathogen typing have used a variety of phenotypic features, including growth characteristics, color, cell or colony morphology, antibiotic susceptibility, staining, smell and reactivity with specific antibodies to identify bacteria. All of these methods require culture of the suspected pathogen, which suffers from a number of serious shortcomings, including high material and labor costs, danger of worker exposure, false positives due to mishandling and false negatives due to low numbers of viable cells or due to the fastidious culture requirements of many pathogens. In addition, culture methods require a relatively long time to achieve diagnosis, and because of the potentially life-threatening nature of such infections, antimicrobial therapy is often started before the results can be obtained. In many cases the pathogens are very similar to the organisms that make up the normal flora, and may be indistinguishable from the innocuous strains by the methods cited above. In these cases, determinion of the presence of the pathogenic strain may require the higher resolution afforded by more recently developed molecular typing methods.

A number of methods of examining the genetic material from organisms of interest have been developed. One way of performing this type of analysis is by hybridization of species-specific nucleic acid probes to the DNA or RNA from the organism to be tested. This may be done by immobilizing the denatured nucleic acid to be tested on a membrane support, and probing with labeled nucleic acids that will bind only in the presence of the DNA or RNA from the pathogen. In this way, pathogens can be identified. Organisms can be further diffrentiated by using the RFLP method described above, in which the genomic DNA is digested with one or more restriction enzymes before electrophoretic separation and transfer to a nitrocellulose or nylon membrane support. Probing with the species-specific nucleic acid probes will reveal a banding pattern that, if it shows variation between isolates, can be used as a reproducible way of discriminating between strains. However, these methods are susceptible to the drawbacks outlined above: hybridization-based assays are time-consuming and may give false or misleading results if the stringency of the hybridization is not well controlled, and RFLP identification is dependent on the presence of suitable restriction sites in the DNA to be analyzed.

To address these concerns about hybridization and RFLP as diagnostic tools, several methods of molecular analysis based on polymerase chain reaction (PCR) amplification have gained popularity. In one well-accepted method, called PCR fingerprinting, the size of a fragment generated by PCR is used as an identifier. In this type of assay, the primers are targeted to regions containing variable numbers of tandem repeated sequences (referred to as VNTRs an eukaryotes). The number of repeats, and thus the length of the PCR amplicon, can be characteristic of a given pathogen, and co-amplification of several of these loci in a single reaction can create specific and reproducible fingerprints, allowing discrimination between closely related species.

In some cases where organisms are very closely related, however, the target of the amplification does not display a size difference, and the amplified segment must be further probed to achieve more precise identification. This may be done on a solid support, in a fashion analogous to the whole-genome hybridization described above, but this has the same problem with variable stringency as that assay. Alternatively, the interior of the PCR fragment may be used as a template for a sequence-specific ligation event. As outlined above for the LCR, in this method, single stranded probes to be ligated are positioned along the sequence of interest on either side of an identifying polymorphism, so that the success or failure of the ligation will indicate the presence or absence of a specifice nucleotide sequence at that site. With either hybridization or ligation methods of PCR product analysis, knowledge of the precise sequence in the area of probe binding must be obtained in advance, and differences outside the probe binding area are not detected. These methods are poorly suited to the examination and typing of new isolates that have not been fully characterized.

In the methods of the present invention, primers that recognize conserved regions of bacterial ribosomal RNA genes allow amplification of segments of these genes that include sites of variation. The variations in ribosomal gene sequences have become an accepted method not only of differentiating between similar organisms on a DNA sequence level, but their consistent rate of change allows these sequences to be used to evaluate the evolutionary relatedness of organisms. That is to say, the more similar the nucleic acid is at the sequence level, the more closely related the organisms in discussion are considered to be. (Woese, Bacterial Evolution. Microbiological Reviews, vol 51, No. 2. 1987). The present invention allows the amplification products derived from these sequences to be used to create highly individual barcodes (i.e., cleavage patterns), allowing the detection of sequence polymorphisms without prior knowledge of the site, character or even the presence of said polymorphisms. With appropriate selection of primers, amplification can be made to be either all-inclusive (e.g., using the most highly conserved ribosomal sequences) to allow comparison of distantly related organisms, or the primers can be chosen to be very specific for a given genus, to allow examination at the species and subspecies level. While the examination of ribosomal genes is extremely useful in these characterizations, the use of the CFLP method in bacterial typing is not limited to these genes. Other genes, including but not limited to those associated with specific growth characteristics, (e.g., carbon source preference, antibiotic resistance, resistance to methycillin or antigen production), or with particular cell morphologies (such as pilus formation) are equally well suited to the CFLP assay.

D. Extraction of Nucleic Acids From Clinical Samples

To provide nucleic acid substrates for use in the detection and identification of microorganisms in clinical samples using the CFLP assay, nucleic acid is extracted from the sample. The nucleic acid may be extracted from a variety of clinical samples (fresh or frozen tissue, suspensions of cells (e.g., blood), cerebral spinal fluid, sputum, urine, etc.) using a variety of standard techniques or commercially available kits. For example, kits which allow the isolation of RNA or DNA from tissue samples are available from Qiagen, Inc. (Chatsworth, Calif.) and Stratagene (LaJolla, Calif.). For example, the QIAAMP Blood kits permit the isolation of DNA from blood (fresh, frozen or dried) as well as bone marrow, body fluids or cell suspensions. QIAAMP tissue kits permit the isolation of DNA from tissues such as muscles, organs and tumors.

It has been found that crude extracts from relatively homogenous specimens (such as blood, bacterial colonies, viral plaques, or cerebral spinal fluid) are better suited to severing as templates for the amplification of unique PCR products than are more composite specimens (such as urine, sputum or feces;) (Shibata in PCR: The Polymerase Chain Reaction, Mullis et al., eds., Birkhauser, Boston (1994), pp. 47-54). Samples which contain relatively few copies of the material to be amplified (i.e., the target nucleic acid), such as cerebral spinal fluid, can be added directly to a PCR. Blood samples have posed a special problem in PCRs due to the inhibitory properties of red blood cells. The red blood cells must be removed prior to the use of blood in a PCR; there are both classical and commercially available methods for this purpose (e.g., QIAAMP Blood kits, passage through a CHELEX 100 column (BioRad), etc.). Extraction of nucleic acid from sputum, the specimen of choice for the direct detection of M. tuberculosis, requires prior decontamination to kill or inhibit the growth of other bacterial species. This decontamination is typically accomplished by treatment of the sample with N-acetyl L-cysteine and NaOH (Shinnick and Jones, supra). This decontamination process is necessary only when the sputum specimen is to be cultured prior to analysis.

EXPERIMENTAL

The following examples serve to illustrate certain preferred embodiments and aspects of the present invention and are not to be construed as limiting the scope thereof.

In the disclosure which follows, the following abbreviations apply: ° C. (degrees Centigrade); g (gravitational field); vol (volume); w/v (weight to volume); v/v (volume to volume); BSA (bovine serum albumin); CTAB (cetyltrimethylammonium bromide); HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography); DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid); IVS (intervening sequence); p (plasmid); μl (microliters); ml (milliliters); μg (micrograms); pmoles (picomoles); mg (milligrams); MOPS (3-(N-Morpholino)propanesulfonic acid); M (molar); mM (milliMolar); μM (microMolar); nm (nanometers); kdal (kilodaltons); OD (optical density); EDTA (ethylene diamine tetra-acetic acid); FITC (fluorescein isothiocyanate); SDS (sodium dodecyl sulfate); NaPO₄ (sodium phosphate); Tris (tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane); PMSF (phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride); TBE (Tris-Borate-EDTA, i.e., Tris buffer titrated with boric acid rather than HCl and containing EDTA); PBS (phosphate buffered saline); PPBS (phosphate buffered saline containing 1 mM PMSF); PAGE (polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis); TWEEN (polyoxyethylene-sorbitan); Boehringer Mannheim (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.); Dynal (Dynal A.S., Oslo, Norway); Epicentre (Epicentre Technologies, Madison, Wis.); National Biosciences (National Biosciences, Plymouth, Minn.); New England Biolabs (New England Biolabs, Beverly, Mass.); Novagen (Novagen, Inc., Madison, Wis.); Perkin Elmer (Perkin Ehner, Norwalk, Conn.); Promega Corp. (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.); RJ Research (RJ Research, Inc., Watertown, Mass.); Stratagene (Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, Calif.); USB (U.S. Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio).

EXAMPLE 1 Characteristics of Native Thermostable DNA Polymerases

A. 5′ Nuclease Activity pf DNAPTaq

During the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (Saiki et al., Science 239:487 (1988); Mullis and Faloona, Methods in Enzymology 155:335 (1987)), DNAPTaq is able to amplify many, but not all, DNA sequences. One sequence that cannot be amplified using DNAPTaq is shown in FIG. 6 (Hairpin structure is SEQ ID NO:15, PRIMERS are SEQ ID NOS:16-17.) This DNA sequence has the distinguishing characteristic of being able to fold on itself to form a hairpin with two single-stranded arms, which correspond to the primers used in PCR.

To test whether this failure to amplify is due to the 5′ nuclease activity of the enzyme, we compared the abilities of DNAPTaq and DNAPStf to amplify this DNA sequence during 30 cycles of PCR. Synthetic oligonucleotides were obtained from The Biotechnology Center at the University of Wisconsin-Madison. The DNAPTaq and DNAPStf were from Perkin Elmer (i.e., AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase and the Stoffel fragment of AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase). The substrate DNA comprised the hairpin structure shown in FIG. 6 cloned in a double-stranded form into pUC19. The primers used in the amplification are listed as SEQ ID NOS:16-17. Primer SEQ ID NO:17 is shown annealed to the 3′ arm of the hairpin structure in FIG. 6. Primer SEQ ID NO:16 is shown as the first 20 nucleotides in bold on the 5′ arm of the hairpin in FIG. 6.

Polymerase chain reactions comprised 1 ng of supercoiled plasmid target DNA, 5 pmoles of each primer, 40 μM each dNTP, and 2.5 units of DNAPTaq or DNAPStf, in a 50 μl solution of 10 mM Tris-Cl pH 8.3. The DNAPTaq reactions included 50 mM KCl and 1.5 mM MgCl₂. The temperature profile was 95° C. for 30 sec., 55° C. for 1 min. and 72° C. for 1 min., through 30 cycles. Ten percent of each reaction was analyzed by gel electrophoresis through 6% polyacrylamide (cross-linked 29:1) in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

The results are shown in FIG. 7. The expected product was made by DNAPStf (indicated simply as “S”) but not by DNAPTaq (indicated as “T”). We conclude that the 5′ nuclease activity of DNAPTaq is responsible for the lack of amplification of this DNA sequence.

To test whether the 5′ unpaired nucleotides in the substrate region of this structured DNA are removed by DNAPTaq, the fate of the end-labeled 5′ arm during four cycles of PCR was compared using the same two polymerases (FIG. 8). The hairpin templates, such as the one described in FIG. 6, were made using DNAPStf and a ³²P-5′-end-labeled primer. The 5′-end of the DNA was released as a few large fragments by DNAPTaq but not by DNAPStf. The sizes of these fragments (based on their mobilities) show that they contain most or all of the unpaired 5′ arm of the DNA. Thus, cleavage occurs at or near the base of the bifurcated duplex. These released fragments terminate with 3′ OH groups, as evidenced by direct sequence analysis, and the abilities of the fragments to be extended by terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase.

FIGS. 9-11 show the results of experiments designed to characterize the cleavage reaction catalyzed by DNAPTaq. Unless otherwise specified, the cleavage reactions comprised 0.01 pmoles of heat-denatured, end-labeled hairpin DNA (with the unlabeled complementary strand also present), 1 pmole primer (complementary to the 3′ arm) and 0.5 units of DNAPTaq (estimated to be 0.026 pmoles) in a total volume of 10 μl of 10 mM Tris-Cl, ph 8.5, 50 mM KCl and 1.5 mM MgCl₂. As indicated, some reactions had different concentrations of KCl, and the precise times and temperatures used in each experiment are indicated in the individual figures. The reactions that included a primer used the one shown in FIG. 6 (SEQ ID NO:17). In some instances, the primer was extended to the junction site by providing polymerase and selected nucleotides.

Reactions were initiated at the final reaction temperature by the addition of either the MgCl₂ or enzyme. Reactions were stopped at their incubation temperatures by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes. The T_(m) calculations listed were made using the OLIGO primer analysis software from National Biosciences, Inc. These were determined using 0.25 μM as the DNA concentration, at either 15 or 65 mM total salt (the 1.5 mM MgCl₂ in all reactions was given the value of 15 mM salt for these calculations).

FIG. 9 is an autoradiogram containing the results of a set of experiments and conditions on the cleavage site. FIG. 9A is a determination of reaction components that enable cleavage. Incubation of 5′-end-labeled hairpin DNA was for 30 minutes at 55° C., with the indicated components. The products were resolved by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and the lengths of the products, in nucleotides, are indicated. FIG. 9B describes the effect of temperature on the site of cleavage in the absence of added primer. Reactions were incubated in the absence of KCl for 10 minutes at the indicated temperatures. The lengths of the products, in nucleotides, are indicated.

Surprisingly, cleavage by DNAPTaq requires neither a primer nor dNTPs (see FIG. 9A). Thus, the 5′ nuclease activity can be uncoupled from polymerization. Nuclease activity requires magnesium ions, though manganese ions can be substituted, albeit with potential changes in specificity and activity. Neither zinc nor calcium ions support the cleavage reaction. The reaction occurs over a broad temperature range, from 25° C. to 85° C., with the rate of cleavage increasing at higher temperatures.

Still referring to FIG. 9, the primer is not elongated in the absence of added dNTPs. However, the primer influences both the site and the rate of cleavage of the hairpin. The change in the site of cleavage (FIG. 9A) apparently results from disruption of a short duplex formed between the arms of the DNA substrate. In the absence of primer, the sequences indicated by underlining in FIG. 6 could pair, forming an extended duplex. Cleavage at the end of the extended duplex would release the 11 nucleotide fragment seen on the FIG. 9A lanes with no added primer. Addition of excess primer (FIG. 9A, lanes 3 and 4) or incubation at an elevated temperature (FIG. 9B) disrupts the short extension of the duplex and results in a longer 5′ arm and, hence, longer cleavage products.

The location of the 3′ end of the primer can influence the precise site of cleavage. Electrophoretic analysis revealed that in the absence of primer (FIG. 9B), cleavage occurs at the end of the substrate duplex (either the extended or shortened form, depending on the temperature) between the first and second base pairs. When the primer extends up to the base of the duplex, cleavage also occurs one nucleotide into the duplex. However, when a gap of four or six nucleotides exists between the 3′ end of the primer and the substrate duplex, the cleavage site is shifted four to six nucleotides in the 5′ direction.

FIG. 10 describes the kinetics of cleavage in the presence (FIG. 10A) or absence (FIG. 10B) of a primer oligonucleotide. The reactions were run at 55° C. with either 50 mM KCl (FIG. 10A) or 20 mM KCl (FIG. 10B). The reaction products were resolved by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis and the lengths of the products, in nucleotides, are indicated. “M”, indicating a marker, is a 5′ end-labeled 19-nt oligonucleotide. Under these salt conditions, FIGS. 10A and 10B indicate that the reaction appears to be about twenty times faster in the presence of primer than in the absence of primer. This effect on the efficiency may be attributable to proper alignment and stabilization of the enzyme on the substrate.

The relative influence of primer on cleavage rates becomes much greater when both reactions are run in 50 mM KCl. In the presence of primer, the rate of cleavage increases with KCl concentration, up to about 50 mM. However, inhibition of this reaction in the presence of primer is apparent at 100 mM and is complete at 150 mM KCl. In contrast, in the absence of primer the rate is enhanced by concentration of KCl up to 20 mM, but it is reduced at concentrations above 30 mM. At 50 mM KCl, the reaction is almost completely inhibited. The inhibition of cleavage by KCl in the absence of primer is affected by temperature, being more pronounced at lower temperatures.

Recognition of the 5′ end of the arm to be cut appears to be an important feature of substrate recognition. Substrates that lack a free 5′ end, such as circular M13 DNA, cannot be cleaved under any conditions tested. Even with substrates having defined 5′ arms, the rate of cleavage by DNAPTaq is influenced by the length of the arm. In the presence of primer and 50 mM KCl, cleavage of a 5′ extension that is 27 nucleotides long is essentially complete within 2 minutes at 55° C. In contrast, cleavages of molecules with 5′ arms of 84 and 188 nucleotides are only about 90% and 40% complete after 20 minutes. Incubation at higher temperatures reduces the inhibitory effects of long extensions indicating that secondary structure in the 5′ arm or a heat-labile structure in the enzyme may inhibit the reaction. A mixing experiment, run under conditions of substrate excess, shows that the molecules with long arms do not preferentially tie up the available enzyme in non-productive complexes. These results may indicate that the 5′ nuclease domain gains access to the cleavage site at the end of the bifurcated duplex by moving down the 5′ arm from one end to the other. Longer 5′ arms would be expected to have more adventitious secondary structures (particularly when KCl concentrations are high), which would be likely to impede this movement.

Cleavage does not appear to be inhibited by long 3′ arms of either the substrate strand target molecule or pilot nucleic acid, at least up to 2 kilobases. At the other extreme, 3′ arms of the pilot nucleic acid as short as one nucleotide can support cleavage in a primer-independent reaction, albeit inefficiently. Fully paired oligonucleotides do not elicit cleavage of DNA templates during primer extension.

The ability of DNAPTaq to cleave molecules even when the complementary strand contains only one unpaired 3′ nucleotide may be useful in optimizing allele-specific PCR. PCR primers that have unpaired 3′ ends could act as pilot oligonucleotides to direct selective cleavage of unwanted templates during preincubation of potential template-primer complexes with DNAPTaq in the absence of nucleoside triphosphates.

B. 5′ Nuclease Activities of Other DNAPs

To determine whether other 5′ nucleases in other DNAPs would be suitable for the present invention, an array of enzymes, several of which were reported in the literature to be free of apparent 5′ nuclease activity, were examined. The ability of these other enzymes to cleave nucleic acids in a structure-specific manner was tested using the hairpin substrate shown in FIG. 6 under conditions reported to be optimal for synthesis by each enzyme.

DNAPEc1 and DNAP Klenow were obtained from Promega Corporation; the DNAP of Pyrococcus furious (“Pfu”, Bargseid et al., Strategies 4:34 (1991)) was from Stratagene; the DNAP of Thermococcus litoralis (“Tli”, VENT (exo-), Perler et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:5577 (1992)) was from New England Biolabs; the DNAP of Thermus flavus (“Tfl”, Kaledin et al., Biokhimiya 46:1576 (1981)) was from Epicentre Technologies; and the DNAP of Thermus thermophilus (“Tth”, Carballeira et al., Biotechniques 9:276 (1990); Myers et al., Biochem. 30:7661 (1991)) was from U.S. Biochemicals.

0.5 units of each DNA polymerase was assayed in a 20 μl reaction, using either the buffers supplied by the manufacturers for the primer-dependent reactions, or 10 mM Tris.Cl, pH 8.5, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, and 20 mM KCl. Reaction mixtures were at held 72° C. before the addition of enzyme.

FIG. 11 is an autoradiogram recording the results of these tests. FIG. 11A demonstrates reactions of endonucleases of DNAPs of several thermophilic bacteria. The reactions were incubated at 55° C. for 10 minutes in the presence of primer or at 72° C. for 30 minutes in the absence of primer, and the products were resolved by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis. The lengths of the products, in nucleotides, are indicated. FIG. 11B demonstrates endonucleolytic cleavage by the 5′ nuclease of DNAPEc1. The DNAPEc1 and DNAP Klenow reactions were incubated for 5 minutes at 37° C. Note the light band of cleavage products of 25 and 11 nucleotides in the DNAPEc1 lanes (made in the presence and absence of primer, respectively). FIG. 7B also demonstrates DNAPTaq reactions in the presence (+) or absence (−) of primer. These reactions were run in 50 mM and 20 mM KCl, respectively, and were incubated at 55° C. for 10 minutes.

Referring to FIG. 11A, DNAPs from the eubacteria Thermus thermophilus and Thermus flavus cleave the substrate at the same place as DNAPTaq, both in the presence and absence of primer. In contrast, DNAPs from the archaebacteria Pyrococcus furiosus and Thermococcus litoralis are unable to cleave the substrates endonucleolytically. The DNAPs from Pyrococcus furious and Thermococcus litoralis share little sequence homology with eubacterial enzymes (Ito et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4045 (1991); Mathur et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 19:6952 (1991); see also Perler et al.). Referring to FIG. 11B, DNAPEc1 also cleaves the substrate, but the resulting cleavage products are difficult to detect unless the 3′ exonuclease is inhibited. The amino acid sequences of the 5′ nuclease domains of DNAPEc1 and DNAPTaq are about 38% homologous (Gelfand, supra).

The 5′ nuclease domain of DNAPTaq also shares about 19% homology with the 5′ exonuclease encoded by gene 6 of bacteriophage T7 (Dunn et al., J. Mol. Biol. 166:477 (1983)). This nuclease, which is not covalently attached to a DNAP polymerization domain, is also able to cleave DNA endonucleolytically, at a site similar or identical to the site that is cut by the 5′ nucleases described above, in the absence of added primers.

C. Transcleavage

The ability of a 5′ nuclease to be directed to cleave efficiently at any specific sequence was demonstrated in the following experiment. A partially complementary oligonucleotide termed a “pilot oligonucleotide” was hybridized to sequences at the desired point of cleavage. The non-complementary part of the pilot oligonucleotide provided a structure analogous to the 3′ arm of the template (see FIG. 6), whereas the 5′ region of the substrate strand became the 5′ arm. A primer was provided by designing the 3′ region of the pilot so that it would fold on itself creating a short hairpin with a stabilizing tetra-loop (Antao et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:5901 (1991)). Two pilot oligonucleotides are shown in FIG. 12A. Oligonucleotides 19-12 (SEQ ID NO:18) and 30-12 (SEQ ID NO:19) are 31 or 42 or nucleotides long, respectively. However, oligonucleotides 19-12 (SEQ ID NO:18) and 34-19 (SEQ ID NO:19) have only 19 and 30 nucleotides, respectively, that are complementary to different sequences in the substrate strand. The pilot oligonucleotides are calculated to melt off their complements at about 50° C. (19-12) and about 75° C. (30-12). Both pilots have 12 nucleotides at their 3′ ends, which act as 3′ arms with base-paired primers attached.

To demonstrate that cleavage could be directed by a pilot oligonucleotide, we incubated a single-stranded target DNA with DNAPTaq in the presence of two potential pilot oligonucleotides. The transcleavage reactions, where the target and pilot nucleic acids are not covalently linked, includes 0.01 pmoles of single end-labeled substrate DNA, 1 unit of DNAPTaq and 5 pmoles of pilot oligonucleotide in a volume of 20 μl of the same buffers. These components were combined during a one minute incubation at 95° C., to denature the PCR-generated double-stranded substrate DNA, and the temperatures of the reactions were then reduced to their final incubation temperatures. Oligonucleotides 30-12 and 19-12 can hybridize to regions of the substrate DNAs that are 85 and 27 nucleotides from the 5′ end of the targeted strand.

FIG. 21 shows the complete 206-mer sequence (SEQ ID NO:32). The 206-mer was generated by PCR. The M13/pUC 24-mer reverse sequencing (−48) primer and the M13/pUC sequencing (−47) primer from New England Biolabs (catalogue nos. 1233 and 1224 respectively) were used (50 pmoles each) with the pGEM3z(f+) plasmid vector (Promega Corp.) as template (10 ng) containing the target sequences. The conditions for PCR were as follows: 50 μM of each dNTP and 2.5 units of Taq DNA polymerase in 100 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl with 0.05% TWEEN-20 and 0.05% NP-40. Reactions were cycled 35 times through 95° C. for 45 seconds, 63° C. for 45 seconds, then 72° C. for 75 seconds. After cycling, reactions were finished off with an incubation at 72° C. for 5 minutes. The resulting fragment was purified by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross link) in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, visualized by ethidium bromide staining or autoradiography, excised from the gel, eluted by passive diffusion, and concentrated by ethanol precipitation.

Cleavage of the substrate DNA occurred in the presence of the pilot oligonucleotide 19-12 at 50° C. (FIG. 12B, lanes 1 and 7) but not at 75° C. (lanes 4 and 10). In the presence of oligonucleotide 30-12 cleavage was observed at both temperatures. Cleavage did not occur in the absence of added oligonucleotides (lanes 3, 6 and 12) or at about 80° C. even though at 50° C. adventitious structures in the substrate allowed primer-independent cleavage in the absence of KCl (FIG. 12B, lane 9). A non-specific oligonucleotide with no complementarity to the substrate DNA did not direct cleavage at 50° C., either in the absence or presence of 50 mM KCl (lanes 13 and 14). Thus, the specificity of the cleavage reactions can be controlled by the extent of complementarity to the substrate and by the conditions of incubation.

D. Cleavage of RNA

An shortened RNA version of the sequence used in the transcleavage experiments discussed above was tested for its ability to serve as a substrate in the reaction. The RNA is cleaved at the expected place, in a reaction that is dependent upon the presence of the pilot oligonucleotide. The RNA substrate, made by T7 RNA polymerase in the presence of (α-³²P)UTP, corresponds to a truncated version of the DNA substrate used in FIG. 12B. Reaction conditions were similar to those in used for the DNA substrates described above, with 50 mM KCl; incubation was for 40 minutes at 55° C. The pilot oligonucleotide used is termed 30-0 (SEQ ID NO:20) and is shown in FIG. 13A.

The results of the cleavage reaction is shown in FIG. 13B. The reaction was run either in the presence or absence of DNAPTaq or pilot oligonucleotide as indicated in FIG. 13B.

Strikingly, in the case of RNA cleavage, a 3′ arm is not required for the pilot oligonucleotide. It is very unlikely that this cleavage is due to previously described RNaseH, which would be expected to cut the RNA in several places along the 30 base-pair long RNA-DNA duplex. The 5′ nuclease of DNAPTaq is a structure-specific RNaseH that cleaves the RNA at a single site near the 5′ end of the heteroduplexed region.

It is surprising that an oligonucleotide lacking a 3′ arm is able to act as a pilot in directing efficient cleavage of an RNA target because such oligonucleotides are unable to direct efficient cleavage of DNA targets using native DNAPs. However, some 5′ nucleases of the present invention (for example, clones E, F and G of FIG. 4) can cleave DNA in the absence of a 3′ arm. In other words, a non-extendable cleavage structure is not required for specific cleavage with some 5′ nucleases of the present invention derived from thermostable DNA polymerases.

We tested whether cleavage of an RNA template by DNAPTaq in the presence of a fully complementary primer could help explain why DNAPTaq is unable to extend a DNA oligonucleotide on an RNA template, in a reaction resembling that of reverse transcriptase. Another thermophilic DNAP, DNAPTth, is able to use RNA as a template, but only in the presence of Mn++, so we predicted that this enzyme would not cleave RNA in the presence of this cation. Accordingly, we incubated an RNA molecule with an appropriate pilot oligonucleotide in the presence of DNAPTaq or DNAPTth, in buffer containing either Mg++or Mn++. As expected, both enzymes cleaved the RNA in the presence of Mg++. However, DNAPTaq, but not DNAPTth, degraded the RNA in the presence of Mn++. We conclude that the 5′ nuclease activities of many DNAPs may contribute to their inability to use RNA as templates.

EXAMPLE 2 Generation of 5′ Nucleases from Thermostable DNA Polymerases

Thermostable DNA polymerases were generated which have reduced synthetic activity, an activity that is an undesirable side-reaction during DNA cleavage in the detection assay of the invention, yet have maintained thermostable nuclease activity. The result is a thermostable polymerase which cleaves nucleic acids DNA with extreme specificity.

Type A DNA polymerases from eubacteria of the genus Thermus share extensive protein sequence identity (90% in the polymerization domain, using the Lipman-Pearson method in the DNA analysis software from DNAStar, WI) and behave similarly in both polymerization and nuclease assays. Therefore, we have used the genes for the DNA polymerase of Thermus aquaticus (DNAPTaq) and Thermus flavus (DNAPTfl) as representatives of this class. Polymerase genes from other eubacterial organisms, such as Thermus thermophilus, Thermus sp., Thermotoga maritima, Thermosipho africanus and Bacillus stearothermophilus are equally suitable. The DNA polymerases from these thermophilic organisms are capable of surviving and performing at elevated temperatures, and can thus be used in reactions in which temperature is used as a selection against non-specific hybridization of nucleic acid strands.

The restriction sites used for deletion mutagenesis, described below, were chosen for convenience. Different sites situated with similar convenience are available in the Thermus thermophilus gene and can be used to make similar constructs with other Type A polymerase genes from related organisms.

A. Creation of 5′ Nuclease Constructs

1. Modified DNAPTaq Genes

The first step was to place a modified gene for the Taq DNA polymerase on a plasmid under control of an inducible promoter. The modified Taq polymerase gene was isolated as follows: The Taq DNA polymerase gene was amplified by polymerase chain reaction from genomic DNA from Thermus aquaticus, strain YT-1 (Lawyer et al., supra), using as primers the oligonucleotides described in SEQ ID NOS:13-14. The resulting fragment of DNA has a recognition sequence for the restriction endonuclease EcoRI at the 5′ end of the coding sequence and a BglII sequence at the 3′ end. Cleavage with BglII leaves a 5′ overhang or “sticky end” that is compatible with the end generated by BamHI. The PCR-amplified DNA was digested with EcoRI and BamHI. The 2512 bp fragment containing the coding region for the polymerase gene was gel purified arid then ligated into a plasmid which contains an inducible promoter.

In one embodiment of the invention, the pTTQ18 vector, which contains the hybrid trp-lac (tac) promoter, was used (M. J. R. Stark, Gene 5:255 (1987)) and shown in FIG. 14. The tac promoter is under the control of the E. coli lac repressor. Repression allows the synthesis of the gene product to be suppressed until the desired level of bacterial growth has been achieved, at which point repression is removed by addition of a specific inducer, isopropyl-β-D-thiogalactopyranoside (IPTG). Such a system allows the expression of foreign proteins that may slow or prevent growth of transformants.

Bacterial promoters, such as tac, may not be adequately suppressed when they are present on a multiple copy plasmid. If a highly toxic protein is placed under control of such a promoter, the small amount of expression leaking through can be harmful to the bacteria. In another embodiment of the invention, another option for repressing synthesis of a cloned gene product was used. The non-bacterial promoter, from bacteriophage T7, found in the plasmid vector series pET-3 was used to express the cloned mutant Taq polymerase genes (FIG. 15; Studier and Moffatt, J. Mol. Biol. 189:113 (1986)). This promoter initiates transcription only by T7 RNA polymerase. In a suitable strain, such as BL21(DE3)pLYS, the gene for this RNA polymerase is carried on the bacterial genome under control of the lac operator. This arrangement has the advantage that expression of the multiple copy gene (on the plasmid) is completely dependent on the expression of T7 RNA polymerase, which is easily suppressed because it is present in a single copy.

For ligation into the pTTQ18 vector (FIG. 14), the PCR product DNA containing the Taq polymerase coding region (mutTaq, clone 4B, SEQ ID NO:21) was digested with EcoRI and BglII and this fragment was ligated under standard “sticky end” conditions (Sambrook et al. Molecular Cloning, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, pp. 1.63-1.69 (1989)) into the EcoRI and BamHI sites of the plasmid vector pTTQ18. Expression of this construct yields a translational fusion product in which the first two residues of the native protein (Met-Arg) are replaced by three from the vector (Met-Asn-Ser), but the remainder of the natural protein would not change. The construct was transformed into the JM109 strain of E. coli and the transformants were plated under incompletely repressing conditions that do not permit growth of bacteria expressing the native protein. These plating conditions allow the isolation of genes containing pre-existing mutations, such as those that result from the infidelity of Taq polymerase during the amplification process.

Using this amplification/selection protocol, we isolated a clone (depicted in FIG. 4B) containing a mutated Taq polymerase gene (mutTaq, clone 4B). The mutant was first detected by its phenotype, in which temperature-stable 5′ nuclease activity in a crude cell extract was normal, but polymerization activity was almost absent (approximately less than 1% of wild type Taq polymerase activity).

DNA sequence analysis of the recombinant gene showed that it had changes in the polymerase domain resulting in two amino acid substitutions: an A to G change at nucleotide position 1394 causes a Glu to Gly change at amino acid position 465 (numbered according to the natural nucleic and amino acid sequences, SEQ ID NOS:1 and 4) and another A to G change at nucleotide position 2260 causes a Gln to Arg change at amino acid position 754. Because the Gln to Gly mutation is at a nonconserved position and because the Glu to Arg mutation alters an amino acid that is conserved in virtually all of the known Type A polymerases, this latter mutation is most likely the one responsible for curtailing the synthesis activity of this protein. The nucleotide sequence for the FIG. 4B construct is given in SEQ ID NO:21. The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:21 is listed in SEQ ID NO:85.

Subsequent derivatives of DNAPTaq constructs were made from the mutTaq gene, thus, they all bear these amino acid substitutions in addition to their other alterations, unless these particular regions were deleted. These mutated sites are indicated by black boxes at these locations in the diagrams in FIG. 4. In FIG. 4, the designation “3′ Exo” is used to indicate the location of the 3′ exonuclease activity associated with Type A polymerases which is not present in DNAPTaq. All constructs except the genes shown in FIGS. 4E, F and G were made in the pTTQ 18 vector.

The cloning vector used for the genes in FIGS. 4E and F was from the commercially available pET-3 series, described above. Though this vector series has only a BamHI site for cloning downstream of the T7 promoter, the series contains variants that allow cloning into any of the three reading frames. For cloning of the PCR product described above, the variant called pET-3c was used (FIG. 15). The vector was digested with BamHI, dephosphorylated with calf intestinal phosphatase, and the sticky ends were filled in using the Klenow fragment of DNAPEc1 and dNTPs. The gene for the mutant Taq DNAP shown in FIG. 4B (mutTaq, clone 4B) was released from pTTQ18 by digestion with EcoRI and SalI, and the “sticky ends” were filled in as was done with the vector. The fragment was ligated to the vector under standard blunt-end conditions (Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, supra), the construct was transformed into the BL21 (DE3)pLYS strain of E. coli, and isolates were screened to identify those that were ligated with the gene in the proper orientation relative to the promoter. This construction yields another translational fusion product, in which the first two amino acids of DNAPTaq (Met-Arg) are replaced by 13 from the vector plus two from the PCR primer (Met-Ala-Ser-Met-Thr-Gly-Gly-Gln-Gln-Met-Gly-Arg-Ile-Asn-Ser) (SEQ ID NO:29).

Our goal was to generate enzymes that lacked the ability to synthesize DNA, but retained the ability to cleave nucleic acids with a 5′ nuclease activity. The act of primed, templated synthesis of DNA is actually a coordinated series of events, so it is possible to disable DNA synthesis by disrupting one event while not affecting the others. These steps include, but are not limited to, primer recognition and binding, dNTP binding and catalysis of the inter-nucleotide phosphodiester bond. Some of the amino acids in the polymerization domain of DNAPEcI have been linked to these functions, but the precise mechanisms are as yet poorly defined.

One way of destroying the polymerizing ability of a DNA polymerase is to delete all or part of the gene segment that encodes that domain for the protein, or to otherwise render the gene incapable of making a complete polymerization domain. Individual mutant enzymes may differ from each other in stability and solubility both inside and outside cells. For instance, in contrast to the 5′ nuclease domain of DNAPEcI, which can be released in an active form from the polymerization domain by gentle proteolysis (Setlow and Kornberg, J. Biol. Chem. 247:232 (1972)), the Thermus nuclease domain, when treated similarly, becomes less soluble and the cleavage activity is often lost.

Using the mutant gene shown in FIG. 4B as starting material, several deletion constructs were created. All cloning technologies were standard (Sambrook et al., supra) and are summarized briefly, as follows:

FIG. 4C: The mutTaq construct was digested with PstI, which cuts once within the polymerase coding region, as indicated, and cuts immediately downstream of the gene in the multiple cloning site of the vector. After release of the fragment between these two sites, the vector was re-ligated, creating an 894-nucleotide deletion, and bringing into frame a stop codon 40 nucleotides downstream of the junction. The nucleotide sequence of this 5′ nuclease (clone 4C) is given in SEQ ID NO:9. The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:9 is listed in SEQ ID NO:86.

FIG. 4D: The mutTaq construct was digested with NheI, which cuts once in the gene at position 2047. The resulting four-nucleotide 5′ overhanging ends were filled in, as described above, and the blunt ends were re-ligated. The resulting four-nucleotide insertion changes the reading frame and causes termination of translation ten amino acids downstream of the mutation. The nucleotide sequence of this 5′ nuclease (clone 4D) is given in SEQ ID NO:10. The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:10 is listed in SEQ ID NO:87.

FIG. 4E: The entire mutTaq gene was cut from PTTQ18 using EcoRI and SalI and cloned into pET-3c, as described above. This clone was digested with BstXI and XcmI, at unique sites that are situated as shown in FIG. 4E. The DNA was treated with the Klenow fragment of DNAPEc1 and dNTPs, which resulted in the 3′ overhangs of both sites being trimmed to blunt ends. These blunt ends were ligated together, resulting in an out-of-frame deletion of 1540 nucleotides. An in-frame termination codon occurs 18 triplets past the junction site. The nucleotide sequence of this 5′ nuclease (clone 4E) is given in SEQ ID NO:11 (The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:11 is listed in SEQ ID NO:88)., with the appropriate leader sequence given in SEQ ID NO:30 (The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:30 is listed in SEQ ID NO:89). It is also referred to as the enzyme CLEAVASE BX.

FIG. 4F: The entire mutTaq gene was cut from pTTQ18 using EcoRI and SalI and cloned into pET-3c, as described above. This clone was digested with BstXI and BamHI, at unique sites that are situated as shown in the diagram. The DNA was treated with the Klenow fragment of DNAPEc1 and dNTPs, which resulted in the 3′ overhang of the BstX I site being trimmed to a blunt end, while the 5′ overhang of the Bam HI site was filled in to make a blunt end. These ends were ligated together, resulting in an in-frame deletion of 903 nucleotides. The nucleotide sequence of the 5′ nuclease (clone 4F) is given in SEQ ID NO:12. It is also referred to as the enzyme CLEAVASE BB. The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:12 is listed in SEQ ID NO:90.

FIG. 4G: This polymerase is a variant of that shown in FIG. 4E. It was cloned in the plasmid vector pET-21 (Novagen). The non-bacterial promoter from bacteriophage T7, found in this vector, initiates transcription only by T7 RNA polymerase. See Studier and Moffatt, supra. In a suitable strain, such as (DES)pLYS, the gene for this RNA polymerase is carried on the bacterial genome under control of the lac operator. This arrangement has the advantage that expression of the multiple copy gene (on the plasmid) is completely dependent on the expression of T7 RNA polymerase, which is easily suppressed because it is present in a single copy. Because the expression of these mutant genes is under this tightly controlled promoter, potential problems of toxicity of the expressed proteins to the host cells are less of a concern.

The pET-21 vector also features a “His-Tag” , a stretch of six consecutive histidine residues that are added on the carboxy terminus of the expressed proteins. The resulting proteins can then be purified in a single step by metal chelation chromatography, using a commercially available (Novagen) column resin with immobilized Ni⁺⁺ ions. The 2.5 ml columns are reusable, and can bind up to 20 mg of the target protein under native or denaturing (guanidine-HCl or urea) conditions.

E. coli (DES)PLYS cells are transformed with the constructs described above using standard transformation techniques, and used to inoculate a standard growth medium (e.g., Luria-Bertani broth). Production of T7 RNA polymerase is induced during log phase growth by addition of IPTG and incubated for a further 12 to 17 hours. Aliquots of culture are removed both before and after induction and the proteins are examined by SDS-PAGE. Staining with Coomassie Blue allows visualization of the foreign proteins if they account for about 3-5% of the cellular protein and do not co-migrate with any of the major host protein bands. Proteins that co-migrate with major host proteins must be expressed as more than 10% of the total protein to be seen at this stage of analysis.

Some mutant proteins are sequestered by the cells into inclusion bodies. These are granules that form in the cytoplasm when bacteria are made to express high levels of a foreign protein, and they can be purified from a crude lysate, and analyzed by SDS-PAGE to determine their protein content. If the cloned protein is found in the inclusion bodies, it must be released to assay the cleavage and polymerase activities. Different methods of solubilization may be appropriate for different proteins, and a variety of methods are known. See e.g., Builder & Ogez, U.S. Pat. No. 4,511,502 (1985); Olson, U.S. Pat. No. 4,518,526 (1985); Olson & Pai, U.S. Pat. No. 4,511,503 (1985); Jones et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,512,922 (1985), all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

The solubilized protein is then purified on the Ni⁺⁺ column as described above, following the manufacturers instructions (Novagen). The washed proteins are eluted from the column by a combination of imidazole competitor (1 M) and high salt (0.5 M NaCl), and dialyzed to exchange the buffer and to allow denatured proteins to refold. Typical recoveries result in approximately 20 μg of specific protein per ml of starting culture. The DNAP mutant is referred to as the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and the sequence is given in SEQ ID NO:31. The corresponding amino acid sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO:31 is listed in SEQ ID NO:91.

2. Modified DNAPTfl Gene

The DNA polymerase gene of Thermus flavus was isolated from the “T. flavus” AT-62 strain obtained from the American Type Tissue Collection (ATCC 33923). This strain has a different restriction map then does the T. flavus strain used to generate the sequence published by Akhmetzjanov and Vakhitov, supra. The published sequence is listed as SEQ ID NO:2. No sequence data has been published for the DNA polymerase gene from the AT-62 strain of T. flavus.

Genomic DNA from T. flavus was amplified using the same primers used to amplify the T. aquaticus DNA polymerase gene (SEQ ID NOS:13-14). The approximately 2500 base pair PCR fragment was digested with EcoRI and BamHI. The over-hanging ends were made blunt with the Klenow fragment of DNAPEc1 and dNTPs. The resulting approximately 1800 base pair fragment containing the coding region for the N-terminus was ligated into pET-3c, as described above. This construct, clone 5B, is depicted in FIG. 5B. The wild type T. flavus DNA polymerase gene is depicted in FIG. 5A. In FIG. 5, the designation “3′ Exo” is used to indicate the location of the 3′ exonuclease activity associated with Type A polymerases which is not present in DNAPTfl. The 5B clone has the same leader amino acids as do the DNAPTaq clones 4E and F which were cloned into pET-3c; it is not known precisely where translation termination occurs, but the vector has a strong transcription termination signal immediately downstream of the cloning site.

B. Growth And Induction of Transformed Cells

Bacterial cells were transformed with the constructs described above using standard transformation techniques and used to inoculate 2 mls of a standard growth medium (e.g., Luria-Bertani broth). The resulting cultures were incubated as appropriate for the particular strain used, and induced if required for a particular expression system. For all of the constructs depicted in FIGS. 4 and 5, the cultures were grown to an optical density (at 600 nm wavelength) of 0.5 OD.

To induce expression of the cloned genes, the cultures were brought to a final concentration of 0.4 mM IPTG and the incubations were continued for 12 to 17 hours. 50 μl aliquots of each culture were removed both before and after induction and were combined with 20 μl of a standard gel loading buffer for sodium dodecyl sulfate-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE). Subsequent staining with Coomassie Blue (Sambrook et al., supra) allows visualization of the foreign proteins if they account for about 3-5% of the cellular protein and do not co-migrate with any of the major E. coli protein bands. Proteins that do co-migrate with a major host protein must be expressed as more than 10% of the total protein to be seen at this stage of analysis.

C. Heat Lysis and Fractionation

Expressed thermostable proteins, i.e., the 5′ nucleases, were isolated by heating crude bacterial cell extracts to cause denaturation and precipitation of the less stable E. coli proteins. The precipitated E. coli proteins were then, along with other cell debris, removed by centrifugation. 1.7 mls of the culture were pelleted by microcentrifugation at 12,000 to 14,000 rpm for 30 to 60 seconds. After removal of the supernatant, the cells were resuspended in 400 μl of buffer A (50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.9, 50 mM dextrose, 1 mM EDTA), re-centrifuged, then resuspended in 80 μl of buffer A with 4 mg/ml lysozyme. The cells were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes, then combined with 80 μl of buffer B (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.9, 50 mM KCl, 1 mM EDTA, 1 mM PMSF, 0.5% TWEEN-20, 0.5% NONIDET-P40).

This mixture was incubated at 75° C. for 1 hour to denature and precipitate the host proteins. This cell extract was centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 15 minutes at 4° C., and the supernatant was transferred to a fresh tube. An aliquot of 0.5 to 1 μl of this supernatant was used directly in each test reaction, and the protein content of the extract was determined by subjecting 7 μl to electrophoretic analysis, as above. The native recombinant Taq DNA polymerase (Englke, Anal. Biochem 191:396 (1990)), and the double point mutation protein shown in FIG. 4B are both soluble and active at this point.

The foreign protein may not be detected after the heat treatments due to sequestration of the foreign protein by the cells into inclusion bodies. These are granules that form in the cytoplasm when bacteria are made to express high levels of a foreign protein, and they can be purified from a crude lysate, and analyzed SDS PAGE to determine their protein content. Many methods have been described in the literature, and one approach is described below.

D. Isolation and Solubilization of Inclusion Bodies

A small culture was grown and induced as described above. A 1.7 ml aliquot was pelleted by brief centrifugation, and the bacterial cells were resuspended in 100 μl of Lysis buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl). 2.5 μl of 20 mM PMSF were added for a final concentration of 0.5 mM, and lysozyme was added to a concentration of 1.0 mg/ml. The cells were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes, deoxycholic acid was added to 1 mg/ml (1 μl of 100 mg/ml solution), and the mixture was further incubated at 37° C. for about 15 minutes or until viscous. DNAse I was added to 10 μg/ml and the mixture was incubated at room temperature for about 30 minutes or until it was no longer viscous.

From this mixture the inclusion bodies were collected by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm for 15 minutes at 4° C., and the supernatant was discarded. The pellet was resuspended in 100 μl of lysis buffer with 10 mM EDTA (pH 8.0) and 0.5% TRITON X-100. After 5 minutes at room temperature, the inclusion bodies were pelleted as before, and the supernatant was saved for later analysis. The inclusion bodies were resuspended in 50 μl of distilled water, and 5 μl was combined with SDS gel loading buffer (which dissolves the inclusion bodies) and analyzed electrophoretically, along with an aliquot of the supernatant.

If the cloned protein is found in the inclusion bodies, it may be released to assay the cleavage and polymerase activities and the method of solubilization must be compatible with the particular activity. Different methods of solubilization may be appropriate for different proteins, and a variety of methods are discussed in Molecular Cloning (Sambrook et al., supra). The following is an adaptation we have used for several of our isolates.

20 μl of the inclusion body-water suspension were pelleted by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm for 4 minutes at room temperature, and the supernatant was discarded. To further wash the inclusion bodies, the pellet was resuspended in 20 μl of lysis buffer with 2M urea, and incubated at room temperature for one hour. The washed inclusion bodies were then resuspended in 2 μl of lysis buffer with 8M urea; the solution clarified visibly as the inclusion bodies dissolved. Undissolved debris was removed by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm for 4 minutes at room temperature, and the extract supernatant was transferred to a fresh tube.

To reduce the urea concentration, the extract was diluted into KH₂PO₄. A fresh tube was prepared containing 180 μl of 50 mM KH₂PO₄, pH 9.5, 1 mM EDTA and 50 mM NaCl. A 2 μl aliquot of the extract was added and vortexed briefly to mix. This step was repeated until all of the extract had been added for a total of 10 additions. The mixture was allowed to sit at room temperature for 15 minutes, during which time some precipitate often forms. Precipitates were removed by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm, for 15 minutes at room temperature, and the supernatant was transferred to a fresh tube. To the 200 μl of protein in the KH₂PO₄ solution, 140-200 μl of saturated (NH₄)₂SO₄ were added, so that the resulting mixture was about 41% to 50% saturated (NH₄)₂SO₄. The mixture was chilled on ice for 30 minutes to allow the protein to precipitate, and the protein was then collected by centrifugation at 14,000 rpm, for 4 minutes at room temperature. The supernatant was discarded, and the pellet was dissolved in 20 μl Buffer C (20 mM HEPES, pH 7.9, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5% PMSF, 25 mM KCl and 0.5% each of TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P 40). The protein solution was centrifuged again for 4 minutes to pellet insoluble materials, and the supernatant was removed to a fresh tube. The protein contents of extracts prepared in this manner were visualized by resolving 1-4 μl by SDS-PAGE; 0.5 to 1 μl of extract was tested in the cleavage and polymerization assays as described.

E. Protein Analysis for Presence of Nuclease and Synthetic Activity

The 5′ nucleases described above and shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 were analyzed by the following methods.

1. Structure Specific Nuclease Assay

A candidate modified polymerase is tested for 5′ nuclease activity by examining its ability to catalyze structure-specific cleavages. By the term “cleavage structure” as used herein, is meant a nucleic acid structure which is a substrate for cleavage by the 5′ nuclease activity of a DNAP.

The polymerase is exposed to test complexes that have the structures shown in FIG. 16. Testing for 5′ nuclease activity involves three reactions: 1) a primer-directed cleavage (FIG. 16B) is performed because it is relatively insensitive to variations in the salt concentration of the reaction and can, therefore, be performed in whatever solute conditions the modified enzyme requires for activity; this is generally the same conditions preferred by unmodified polymerases; 2) a similar primer-directed cleavage is performed in a buffer which permits primer-independent cleavage, i.e., a low salt buffer, to demonstrate that the enzyme is viable under these conditions; and 3) a primer-independent cleavage (FIG. 16A) is performed in the same low salt buffer.

The bifurcated duplex is formed between a substrate strand and a template strand as shown in FIG. 16. By the term “substrate strand” as used herein, is meant that strand of nucleic acid in which the cleavage mediated by the 5′ nuclease activity occurs. The substrate strand is always depicted as the top strand in the bifurcated complex which serves as a substrate for 5′ nuclease cleavage (FIG. 16). By the term “template strand” as used herein, is meant the strand of nucleic acid which is at least partially complementary to the substrate strand and which anneals to the substrate strand to form the cleavage structure. The template strand is always depicted as the bottom strand of the bifurcated cleavage structure (FIG. 16). If a primer (a short oligonucleotide of 19 to 30 nucleotides in length) is added to the complex, as when primer-dependent cleavage is to be tested, it is designed to anneal to the 3′ arm of the template strand (FIG. 16B). Such a primer would be extended along the template strand if the polymerase used in the reaction has synthetic activity.

The cleavage structure may be made as a single hairpin molecule, with the 3′ end of the target and the 5′ end of the pilot joined as a loop as shown in FIG. 16E. A primer oligonucleotide complementary to the 3′ arm is also required for these tests so that the enzyme's sensitivity to the presence of a primer may be tested.

Nucleic acids to be used to form test cleavage structures can be chemically synthesized, or can be generated by standard recombinant DNA techniques. By the latter method, the hairpin portion of the molecule can be created by inserting into a cloning vector duplicate copies of a short DNA segment, adjacent to each other but in opposing orientation. The double-stranded fragment encompassing this inverted repeat, and including enough flanking sequence to give short (about 20 nucleotides) unpaired 5′ and 3′ arms, can then be released from the vector by restriction enzyme digestion, or by PCR performed with an enzyme lacking a 5′ exonuclease (e.g., the Stoffel fragment of AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, VENT DNA polymerase).

The test DNA can be labeled on either end, or internally, with either a radioisotope, or with a non-isotopic tag. Whether the hairpin DNA is a synthetic single strand or a cloned double strand, the DNA is heated prior to use to melt all duplexes. When cooled on ice, the structure depicted in FIG. 16E is formed, and is stable for sufficient time to perform these assays.

To test for primer-directed cleavage (Reaction 1), a detectable quantity of the test molecule (typically 1-100 fmol of ³²P-labeled hairpin molecule) and a 10 to 100-fold molar excess of primer are placed in a buffer known to be compatible with the test enzyme. For Reaction 2, where primer-directed cleavage is performed under condition which allow primer-independent cleavage, the same quantities of molecules are placed in a solution that is the same as the buffer used in Reaction 1 regarding pH, enzyme stabilizers (e.g., bovine serum albumin, nonionic detergents, gelatin) and reducing agents (e.g., dithiothreitol, 2-mercaptoethanol) but that replaces any monovalent cation salt with 20 mM KCl; 20 mM KCl is the demonstrated optimum for primer-independent cleavage. Buffers for enzymes, such as DNAPEc1, that usually operate in the absence of salt are not supplemented to achieve this concentration. To test for primer-independent cleavage (Reaction 3) the same quantity of the test molecule, but no primer, are combined under the same buffer conditions used for Reaction 2.

All three test reactions are then exposed to enough of the enzyme that the molar ratio of enzyme to test complex is approximately 1:1. The reactions are incubated at a range of temperatures up to, but not exceeding, the temperature allowed by either the enzyme stability or the complex stability, whichever is lower, up to 80° C. for enzymes from thermophiles, for a time sufficient to allow cleavage (10 to 60 minutes). The products of Reactions 1, 2 and 3 are resolved by denaturing polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, and visualized by autoradiography or by a comparable method appropriate to the labeling system used. Additional labeling systems include chemiluminescence detection, silver or other stains, blotting and probing and the like. The presence of cleavage products is indicated by the presence of molecules which migrate at a lower molecular weight than does the uncleaved test structure. These cleavage products indicate that the candidate polymerase has structure-specific 5′ nuclease activity.

To determine whether a modified DNA polymerase has substantially the same 5′ nuclease activity as that of the native DNA polymerase, the results of the above-described tests are compared with the results obtained from these tests performed with the native DNA polymerase. By “substantially the same 5′ nuclease activity” we mean that the modified polymerase and the native polymerase will both cleave test molecules in the same manner. It is not necessary that the modified polymerase cleave at the same rate as the native DNA polymerase.

Some enzymes or enzyme preparations may have other associated or contaminating activities that may be functional under the cleavage conditions described above and that may interfere with 5′ nuclease detection. Reaction conditions can be modified in consideration of these other activities, to avoid destruction of the substrate, or other masking of the 5′ nuclease cleavage and its products. For example, the DNA polymerase I of E. coli (Pol I), in addition to its polymerase and 5′ nuclease activities, has a 3′ exonuclease that can degrade DNA in a 3′ to 5′ direction. Consequently, when the molecule in FIG. 16E is exposed to this polymerase under the conditions described above, the 3′ exonuclease quickly removes the unpaired 3′ arm, destroying the bifurcated structure required of a substrate for the 5′ exonuclease cleavage and no cleavage is detected. The true ability of Pol I to cleave the structure can be revealed if the 3′ exonuclease is inhibited by a change of conditions (e.g., pH), mutation, or by addition of a competitor for the activity. Addition of 500 pmoles of a single-stranded competitor oligonucleotide, unrelated to the FIG. 16E structure, to the cleavage reaction with Pol I effectively inhibits the digestion of the 3′ arm of the FIG. 16E structure without interfering with the 5′ exonuclease release of the 5′ arm. The concentration of the competitor is not critical, but should be high enough to occupy the 3′ exonuclease for the duration of the reaction.

Similar destruction of the test molecule may be caused by contaminants in the candidate polymerase preparation. Several sets of the structure specific nuclease reactions may be performed to determine the purity of the candidate nuclease and to find the window between under and over exposure of the test molecule to the polymerase preparation being investigated.

The above described modified polymerases were tested for 5′ nuclease activity as follows: Reaction 1 was performed in a buffer of 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.5 at 20° C., 1.5 mM MgCl₂ and 50 mM KCl and in Reaction 2 the KCl concentration was reduced to 20 mM. In Reactions 1 and 2, 10 fmoles of the test substrate molecule shown in FIG. 16E were combined with 1 pmole of the indicated primer and 0.5 to 1.0 μl of extract containing the modified polymerase (prepared as described above). This mixture was then incubated for 10 minutes at 55° C. For all of the mutant polymerases tested these conditions were sufficient to give complete cleavage. When the molecule shown in FIG. 16E was labeled at the 5′ end, the released 5′ fragment, 25 nucleotides long, was conveniently resolved on a 20% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-linked) with 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-borate pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. Clones 4C-F and 5B exhibited structure-specific cleavage comparable to that of the unmodified DNA polymerase. Additionally, clones 4E, 4F and 4G have the added ability to cleave DNA in the absence of a 3′ arm as discussed above. Representative cleavage reactions are shown in FIG. 17.

For the reactions shown in FIG. 17, the mutant polymerase clones 4E (Taq mutant) and 5B (Tfl mutant) were examined for their ability to cleave the hairpin substrate molecule shown in FIG. 16E. The substrate molecule was labeled at the 5′ terminus with ³²P. Ten fmoles of heat-denatured, end-labeled substrate DNA and 0.5 units of DNAPTaq (lane 1) or 0.5 μl of 4e or 5b extract (FIG. 17, lanes 2-7, extract was prepared as described above) were mixed together in a buffer containing 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.5, 50 mM KCl and 1.5 mM MgCl₂. The final reaction volume was 10 μl. Reactions shown in lanes 4 and 7 contain in addition 50 μM of each dNTP. Reactions shown in lanes 3, 4, 6 and 7 contain 0.2 μM of the primer oligonucleotide (complementary to the 3′ arm of the substrate and shown in FIG. 16E). Reactions were incubated at 55° C. for 4 minutes. Reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide containing 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes per 10 μl reaction volume. Samples were then applied to 12% denaturing acrylamide gels. Following electrophoresis, the gels were autoradiographed. FIG. 17 shows that clones 4E and 5B exhibit cleavage activity similar to that of the native DNAPTaq. Note that some cleavage occurs in these reactions in the absence of the primer. When long hairpin structure, such as the one used here (FIG. 16E), are used in cleavage reactions performed in buffers containing 50 mM KCl a low level of primer-independent cleavage is seen. Higher concentrations of KCl suppress, but do not eliminate, this primer-independent cleavage under these conditions.

2. Assay for Synthetic Activity

The ability of the modified enzyme or proteolytic fragments is assayed by adding the modified enzyme to an assay system in which a primer is annealed to a template and DNA synthesis is catalyzed by the added enzyme. Many standard laboratory techniques employ such an assay. For example, nick translation and enzymatic sequencing involve extension of a primer along a DNA template by a polymerase molecule.

In a preferred assay for determining the synthetic activity of a modified enzyme an oligonucleotide primer is annealed to a single-stranded DNA template, e.g., bacteriophage M13 DNA, and the primer/template duplex is incubated in the presence of the modified polymerase in question, deoxynucleoside triphosphates (dNTPs) and the buffer and salts known to be appropriate for the unmodified or native enzyme. Detection of either primer extension (by denaturing gel electrophoresis) or dNTP incorporation (by acid precipitation or chromatography) is indicative of an active polymerase. A label, either isotopic or non-isotopic, is preferably included on either the primer or as a dNTP to facilitate detection of polymerization products. Synthetic activity is quantified as the amount of free nucleotide incorporated into the growing DNA chain and is expressed as amount incorporated per unit of time under specific reaction conditions.

Representative results of an assay for synthetic activity is shown in FIG. 18. The synthetic activity of the mutant DNAPTaq clones 4B-F was tested as follows: A master mixture of the following buffer was made: 1.2× PCR buffer (1× PCR buffer contains 50 mM KCl, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 10 mM Tris-Cl, ph 8.5 and 0.05% each TWEEN 20 and NONIDET P40), 50 μM each of dGTP, dATP and dTTP, 5 μM dCTP and 0. 125 μM α-³²P-dCTP at 600 Ci/mmol. Before adjusting this mixture to its final volume, it was divided into two equal aliquots. One received distilled water up to a volume of 50 μl to give the concentrations above. The other received 5 μg of single-stranded M13mp18 DNA (approximately 2.5 pmol or 0.05 μM final concentration) and 250 pmol of M13 sequencing primer (5 μM final concentration) and distilled water to a final volume of 50 μl. Each cocktail was warmed to 75° C. for 5 minutes and then cooled to room temperature. This allowed the primers to anneal to the DNA in the DNA-containing mixtures.

For each assay, 4 μl of the cocktail with the DNA was combined with 1 μl of the mutant polymerase, prepared as described, or 1 unit of DNAPTaq (Perkin Elmer) in 1 μl of dH₂O. A “no DNA” control was done in the presence of the DNAPTaq (FIG. 18, lane 1), and a “no enzyme” control was done using water in place of the enzyme (lane 2). Each reaction was mixed, then incubated at room temperature (approx. 22° C.) for 5 minutes, then at 55° C. for 2 minutes, then at 72° C. for 2 minutes. This step incubation was done to detect polymerization in any mutants that might have optimal temperatures lower than 72° C. After the final incubation, the tubes were spun briefly to collect any condensation and were placed on ice. One μl of each reaction was spotted at an origin 1.5 cm from the bottom edge of a polyethyleneimine (PEI) cellulose thin layer chromatography plate and allowed to dry. The chromatography plate was run in 0.75 M NaH₂PO₄, pH 3.5, until the buffer front had run approximately 9 cm from the origin. The plate was dried, wrapped in plastic wrap, marked with luminescent ink, and exposed to X-ray film. Incorporation was detected as counts that stuck where originally spotted, while the unincorporated nucleotides were carried by the salt solution from the origin.

Comparison of the locations of the counts with the two control lanes confirmed the lack of polymerization activity in the mutant preparations. Among the modified DNAPTaq clones, only clone 4B retains any residual synthetic activity as shown in FIG. 18.

EXAMPLE 3 5′ Nucleases Derived from Thermostable DNA Polymerases can Cleave Short Hairpin Structures with Specificity

The ability of the 5′ nucleases to cleave hairpin structures to generate a cleaved hairpin structure suitable as a detection molecule was examined. The structure and sequence of the hairpin test molecule is shown in FIG. 19A (SEQ ID NO:15). The oligonucleotide (labeled “primer” in FIG. 19A, SEQ ID NO:22) is shown annealed to its complementary sequence on the 3′ arm of the hairpin test molecule. The hairpin test molecule was single-end labeled with ³²P using a labeled T7 promoter primer in a polymerase chain reaction. The label is present on the 5′ arm of the hairpin test molecule and is represented by the star in FIG. 19A.

The cleavage reaction was performed by adding 10 fmoles of heat-denatured, end-labeled hairpin test molecule, 0.2 uM of the primer oligonucleotide (complementary to the 3′ arm of the hairpin), 50 μM of each dNTP and 0.5 units of DNAPTaq (Perkin Elmer) or 0.5 μl of extract containing a 5′ nuclease (prepared as described above) in a total volume of 10 μl in a buffer containing 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.5, 50 mM KCl and 1.5 mM MgCl₂. Reactions shown in lanes 3, 5 and 7 were run in the absence of dNTPs.

Reactions were incubated at 55° C. for 4 minutes. Reactions were stopped at 55° C. by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes per 10 μl reaction volume. Samples were not heated before loading onto denaturing polyacrylamide gels (10% polyacrylamide, 19:1 crosslinking, 7 M urea, 89 mM Tris-borate, pH 8.3, 2.8 mM EDTA). The samples were not heated to allow for the resolution of single-stranded and re-duplexed uncleaved hairpin molecules.

FIG. 19B shows that altered polymerases lacking any detectable synthetic activity cleave a hairpin structure when an oligonucleotide is annealed to the single-stranded 3′ arm of the hairpin to yield a single species of cleaved product (FIG. 19B, lanes 3 and 4). 5′ nucleases, such as clone 4D, shown in lanes 3 and 4, produce a single cleaved product even in the presence of dNTPs. 5′ nucleases which retain a residual amount of synthetic activity (less than 1% of wild type activity) produce multiple cleavage products as the polymerase can extend the oligonucleotide annealed to the 3′ arm of the hairpin thereby moving the site of cleavage (clone 4B, lanes 5 and 6). Native DNATaq produces even more species of cleavage products than do mutant polymerases retaining residual synthetic activity and additionally converts the hairpin structure to a double-stranded form in the presence of dNTPs due to the high level of synthetic activity in the native polymerase (FIG. 19B, lane 8).

EXAMPLE 4 Test of the Trigger/Detection Assay

To test the ability of an oligonucleotide of the type released in the trigger reaction of the trigger/detection assay to be detected in the detection reaction of the assay, the two hairpin structures shown in FIG. 20A were synthesized using standard techniques. The two hairpins are termed the A-hairpin (SEQ ID NO:23) and the T-hairpin (SEQ ID NO:24). The predicted sites of cleavage in the presence of the appropriate annealed primers are indicated by the arrows. The A- and T-hairpins were designed to prevent intra-strand mis-folding by omitting most of the T residues in the A-hairpin and omitting most of the A residues in the T-hairpin. To avoid mis-priming and slippage, the hairpins were designed with local variations in the sequence motifs (e.g., spacing T residues one or two nucleotides apart or in pairs). The A- and T-hairpins can be annealed together to form a duplex which has appropriate ends for directional cloning in pUC-type vectors; restriction sites are located in the loop regions of the duplex and can be used to elongate the stem regions if desired.

The sequence of the test trigger oligonucleotide is shown in FIG. 20B; this oligonucleotide is termed the alpha primer (SEQ ID NO:25). The alpha primer is complementary to the 3′ arm of the T-hairpin as shown in FIG. 20A. When the alpha primer is annealed to the T-hairpin, a cleavage structure is formed that is recognized by thermostable DNA polymerases. Cleavage of the T-hairpin liberates the 5′ single-stranded arm of the T-hairpin, generating the tau primer (SEQ ID NO:26) and a cleaved T-hairpin (FIG. 20B; SEQ ID NO:27). The tau primer is complementary to the 3′ arm of the A-hairpin as shown in FIG. 20A. Annealing of the tau primer to the A-hairpin generates another cleavage structure; cleavage of this second cleavage structure liberates the 5′ single-stranded arm of the A-hairpin, generating another molecule of the alpha primer which then is annealed to another molecule of the T-hairpin. Thermocycling releases the primers so they can function in additional cleavage reactions. Multiple cycles of annealing and cleavage are carried out. The products of the cleavage reactions are primers and the shortened hairpin structures shown in FIG. 20C. The shortened or cleaved hairpin structures may be resolved from the uncleaved hairpins by electrophoresis on denaturing acrylamide gels.

The annealing and cleavage reactions are carried as follows: In a 50 μl reaction volume containing 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.5, 1.0 MgCl₂, 75 mM KCl, 1 pmole of A-hairpin, 1 pmole T-hairpin, the alpha primer is added at equimolar amount relative to the hairpin structures (1 pmole) or at dilutions ranging from 10- to 10⁶-fold and 0.5 μl of extract containing a 5′ nuclease (prepared as described above) are added. The predicted melting temperature for the alpha or trigger primer is 60° C. in the above buffer. Annealing is performed just below this predicted melting temperature at 55° C. Using a Perkin Elmer DNA Thermal Cycler, the reactions are annealed at 55° C. for 30 seconds. The temperature is then increased slowly over a five minute period to 72° C. to allow for cleavage. After cleavage, the reactions are rapidly brought to 55° C. (1° C. per second) to allow another cycle of annealing to occur. A range of cycles are performed (20, 40 and 60 cycles) and the reaction products are analyzed at each of these number of cycles. The number of cycles which indicates that the accumulation of cleaved hairpin products has not reached a plateau is then used for subsequent determinations when it is desirable to obtain a quantitative result.

Following the desired number of cycles, the reactions are stopped at 55° C. by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes per 10 μl reaction volume. Samples are not heated before loading onto denaturing polyacrylamide gels (10% polyacrylamide, 19:1 crosslinking, 7 M urea, 89 mM tris-borate, pH 8.3, 2.8 mM EDTA). The samples were not heated to allow for the resolution of single-stranded and re-duplexed uncleaved hairpin molecules.

The hairpin molecules may be attached to separate solid support molecules, such as agarose, styrene or magnetic beads, via the 3′ end of each hairpin. A spacer molecule may be placed between the 3′ end of the hairpin and the bead if so desired. The advantage of attaching the hairpins to a solid support is that this prevents the hybridization of the A- and T-hairpins to one another during the cycles of melting and annealing. The A- and T-hairpins are complementary to one another (as shown in FIG. 20D) and if allowed to anneal to one another over their entire lengths this would reduce the amount of hairpins available for hybridization to the alpha and tau primers during the detection reaction.

The 5′ nucleases of the present invention are used in this assay because they lack significant synthetic activity. The lack of synthetic activity results in the production of a single cleaved hairpin product (as shown in FIG. 19B, lane 4). Multiple cleavage products may be generated by 1) the presence of interfering synthetic activity (see FIG. 19B, lanes 6 and 8) or 2) the presence of primer-independent cleavage in the reaction. The presence of primer-independent cleavage is detected in the trigger/detection assay by the presence of different sized products at the fork of the cleavage structure. Primer-independent cleavage can be dampened or repressed, when present, by the use of uncleavable nucleotides in the fork region of the hairpin molecule. For example, thiolated nucleotides can be used to replace several nucleotides at the fork region to prevent primer-independent cleavage.

EXAMPLE 5 Cleavage of Linear Nucleic Acid Substrates

From the above, it should be clear that native (i.e., “wild type”) thermostable DNA polymerases are capable of cleaving hairpin structures in a specific manner and that this discovery can be applied with success to a detection assay. In this example, the mutant DNAPs of the present invention are tested against three different cleavage structures shown in FIG. 22A. Structure 1 in FIG. 22A is simply single stranded 206-mer (the preparation and sequence information for which was discussed above). Structures 2 and 3 are duplexes; structure 2 is the same hairpin structure as shown in FIG. 12A (bottom), while structure 3 has the hairpin portion of structure 2 removed.

The cleavage reactions comprised 0.01 pmoles of the resulting substrate DNA, and 1 pmole of pilot oligonucleotide in a total volume of 10 μl of 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 100 mM KCl, 1 mM MgCl₂. Reactions were incubated for 30 minutes at 55° C., and stopped by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes. Samples were heated to 75° C. for 2 minutes immediately before electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross link), with 7M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

The results were visualized by autoradiography and are shown in FIG. 22B with the enzymes indicated as follows: I is native Taq DNAP; II is native Tfl DNAP; III is the enzyme CLEAVASE BX shown in FIG. 4E; IV is the enzyme CLEAVASE BB shown in FIG. 4F; V is the mutant shown in FIG. 5B; and VI is the enzyme CLEAVASE BN shown in FIG. 4G. Structure 2 was used to “normalize” the comparison. For example, it was found that it took 50 ng of Taq DNAP and 300 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN to give similar amounts of cleavage of Structure 2 in thirty (30) minutes. Under these conditions native Taq DNAP is unable to cleave Structure 3 to any significant degree. Native Tfl DNAP cleaves Structure 3 in a manner that creates multiple products.

By contrast, all of the mutants tested cleave the linear duplex of Structure 3. This finding indicates that this characteristic of the mutant DNA polymerases is consistent of thermostable polymerases across thermophilic species.

The finding described herein that the mutant DNA polymerases of the present invention are capable of cleaving linear duplex structures allows for application to a more straightforward assay design (FIG. 1A). FIG. 23 provides a more detailed schematic corresponding to the assay design of FIG. 1A.

The two 43-mers depicted in FIG. 23 were synthesized by standard methods. Each included a fluorescein on the 5′end for detection purposes and a biotin on the 3′end to allow attachment to streptavidin coated paramagnetic particles (the biotin-avidin attachment is indicated by “ ”).

Before the trityl groups were removed, the oligos were purified by HPLC to remove truncated by-products of the synthesis reaction. Aliquots of each 43-mer were bound to M-280 DYNABEADS (Dynal) at a density of 100 pmoles per mg of beads. Two (2) mgs of beads (200 μl) were washed twice in 1× wash/bind buffer (1 M NaCl, 5 mM Tris-Cl, pH 7.5, 0.5 mM EDTA) with 0.1% BSA, 200 μl per wash. The beads were magnetically sedimented between washes to allow supernatant removal. After the second wash, the beads were resuspended in 200 μl of 2× wash/bind buffer (2 M Na Cl, 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 7.5 with 1 mM EDTA), and divided into two 100 μl aliquots. Each aliquot received 1 μl of a 100 μM solution of one of the two oligonucleotides. After mixing, the beads were incubated at room temperature for 60 minutes with occasional gentle mixing. The beads were then sedimented and analysis of the supernatants showed only trace amounts of unbound oligonucleotide, indicating successful binding. Each aliquot of beads was washed three times, 100 μl per wash, with 1× wash/bind buffer, then twice in a buffer of 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3 and 75 mM KCl. The beads were resuspended in a final volume of 100 μl of the Tris/KCl, for a concentration of 1 pmole of oligo bound to 10 μg of beads per μl of suspension. The beads were stored at 4° C. between uses.

The types of beads correspond to FIG. 1A. That is to say, type 2 beads contain the oligo (SEQ ID NO:33) comprising the complementary sequence (SEQ ID NO:34) for the alpha signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:35) as well as the beta signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:36) which when liberated is a 24-mer. This oligo has no “As” and is “T” rich. Type 3 beads contain the oligo (SEQ ID NO:37) comprising the complementary sequence (SEQ ID NO:38) for the beta signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:39) as well as the alpha signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:35) which when liberated is a 20-mer. This oligo has no “Ts” and is “A” rich.

Cleavage reactions comprised 1 μl of the indicated beads, 10 pmoles of unlabelled alpha signal oligo as “pilot” (if indicated) and 500 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 20 μl of 75 mM KCl, 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂ and 10 μM CTAB. All components except the enzyme were assembled, overlaid with light mineral oil and warmed to 53° C. The reactions were initiated by the addition of prewarmed enzyme and incubated at that temperature for 30 minutes. Reactions were stopped at temperature by the addition of 16 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% each of bromophenol blue and xylene cyanol. This addition stops the enzyme activity and, upon heating, disrupts the biotin-avidin link, releasing the majority (greater than 95%) of the oligos from the beads. Samples were heated to 75° C. for 2 minutes immediately before electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. Results were visualized by contact transfer of the resolved DNA to positively charged nylon membrane and probing of the blocked membrane with an anti-fluorescein antibody conjugated to alkaline phosphatase. After washing, the signal was developed by incubating the membrane in WESTERN BLUE (Promega) which deposits a purple precipitate where the antibody is bound.

FIG. 24 shows the propagation of cleavage of the linear duplex nucleic acid structures of FIG. 23 by the DNAP mutants of the present invention. The two center lanes contain both types of beads. As noted above, the beta signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:36) when liberated is a 24-mer and the alpha signal oligo (SEQ ID NO:35) when liberated is a 20-mer. The formation of the two lower bands corresponding to the 24-mer and 20-mer is clearly dependent on “pilot”.

EXAMPLE 6 5′ Exonucleolytic Cleavage (“Nibbling”) by Thermostable DNAPs

It has been found that thermostable DNAPs, including those of the present invention, have a true 5′ exonuclease capable of nibbling the 5′ end of a linear duplex nucleic acid structures. In this example, the 206 base pair DNA duplex substrate is again employed (see above). In this case, it was produced by the use of one ³²P-labeled primer and one unlabeled primer in a polymerase chain reaction. The cleavage reactions comprised 0.01 pmoles of heat-denatured, end-labeled substrate DNA (with the unlabeled strand also present), 5 pmoles of pilot oligonucleotide (see pilot oligos in FIG. 12A) and 0.5 units of DNAPTaq or 0.5 μ of the enzyme CLEAVASE BB in the E. coli extract (see above), in a total volume of 10 μl of 10 mM Tris.Cl, pH 8.5, 50 mM KCl, 1.5 mM MgCl₂.

Reactions were initiated at 65° C. by the addition of pre-warmed enzyme, then shifted to the final incubation temperature for 30 minutes. The results are shown in FIG. 25A. Samples in lanes 1-4 are the results with native Taq DNAP, while lanes 5-8 shown the results with the enzyme CLEAVASE BB. The reactions for lanes 1, 2, 5, and 6 were performed at 65° C. and reactions for lanes 3, 4, 7, and 8 were performed at 50° C. and all were stopped at temperature by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes. Samples were heated to 75° C. for 2 minutes immediately before electrophoresis through a 10% acrylamide gel (19:1 cross-linked), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris.Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The expected product in reactions 1, 2, 5, and 6 is 85 nucleotides long; in reactions 3 and 7, the expected product is 27 nucleotides long. Reactions 4 and 8 were performed without pilot, and should remain at 206 nucleotides. The faint band seen at 24 nucleotides is residual end-labeled primer from the PCR.

The surprising result is that the enzyme CLEAVASE BB under these conditions causes all of the label to appear in a very small species, suggesting the possibility that the enzyme completely hydrolyzed the substrate. To determine the composition of the fastest-migrating band seen in lanes 5-8 (reactions performed with the deletion mutant), samples of the 206 base pair duplex were treated with either T7 gene 6 exonuclease (USB) or with calf intestine alkaline phosphatase (Promega), according to manufacturers' instructions, to produce either labeled mononucleotide (lane a of FIG. 25B) or free ³²P-labeled inorganic phosphate (lane b of FIG. 25B), respectively. These products, along with the products seen in lane 7 of panel A were resolved by brief electrophoresis through a 20% acrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The enzyme CLEAVASE BB is thus capable of converting the substrate to mononucleotides.

EXAMPLE 7 Nibbling is Duplex Dependent

The nibbling by the enzyme CLEAVASE BB is duplex dependent. In this example, internally labeled, single strands of the 206-mer were produced by 15 cycles of primer extension incorporating α-³²p labeled dCTP combined with all four unlabeled dNTPs, using an unlabeled 206-bp fragment as a template. Single and double stranded products were resolved by electrophoresis through a non-denaturing 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross-link) in a buffer of 45 mM Tris.Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, visualized by autoradiography, excised from the gel, eluted by passive diffusion, and concentrated by ethanol precipitation.

The cleavage reactions comprised 0.04 pmoles of substrate DNA, and 2 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BB (in an E. coli extract as described above) in a total volume of 40 μl of 10 mM Tris.Cl, pH 8.5, 50 mM KCl, 1.5 mM MgCl₂. Reactions were initiated by the addition of pre-warmed enzyme; 10 μl aliquots were removed at 5, 10, 20, and 30 minutes, and transferred to prepared tubes containing 8 μl of 95% formamide with 30 mM EDTA and 0.05% marker dyes. Samples were heated to 75° C. for 2 minutes immediately before electrophoresis through a 10% acrylamide gel (19:1 cross-linked), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris.Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. Results were visualized by autoradiography as shown in FIG. 26. Clearly, the cleavage by the enzyme CLEAVASE BB depends on a duplex structure; no cleavage of the single strand structure is detected whereas cleavage of the 206-mer duplex is complete.

EXAMPLE 8 Nibbling can be Target Directed

The nibbling activity of the DNAPs of the present invention can be employed with success in a detection assay. One embodiment of such an assay is shown in FIG. 27. In this assay, a labelled oligo is employed that is specific for a target sequence. The oligo is in excess of the target so that hybridization is rapid. In this embodiment, the oligo contains two fluorescein labels whose proximity on the oligo causes their emission to be quenched. When the DNAP is permitted to nibble the oligo the labels separate and are detectable. The shortened duplex is destabilized and disassociates. Importantly, the target is now free to react with an intact labelled oligo. The reaction can continue until the desired level of detection is achieved. An analogous, although different, type of cycling assay has been described employing lambda exonuclease. See C. G. Copley and C. Boot, BioTechniques 13:888 (1992).

The success of such an assay depends on specificity. In other words, the oligo must hybridize to the specific target. It is also preferred that the assay be sensitive; the oligo ideally should be able to detect small amounts of target. FIG. 28A shows a 5′-end ³²P-labelled primer bound to a plasmid target sequence. In this case, the plasmid was pUC 19 (commercially available) which was heat denatured by boiling two (2) minutes and then quick chilling. The primer is a 21-mer (SEQ ID NO:39). The enzyme CLEAVASE BX (a dilution equivalent to 5×10⁻³ μl extract) was employed in 100 mM KCl, 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 2 mM MnCl₂. The reaction was performed at 55° C. for sixteen (16) hours with or without genomic background DNA (from chicken blood). The reaction was stopped by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and marker dyes.

The products of the reaction were resolved by PAGE (10% polyacrylamide, 19:1 cross link, 1× TBE) as seen in FIG. 28B. Lane “M” contains the labelled 21-mer. Lanes 1-3 contain no specific target, although Lanes 2 and 3 contain 100 ng and 200 ng of genomic DNA, respectively. Lanes 4, 5 and 6 all contain specific target with either 0 ng, 100 ng or 200 ng of genomic DNA, respectively. It is clear that conversion to mononucleotides occurs in Lanes 4, 5 and 6 regardless of the presence or amount of background DNA. Thus, the nibbling can be target directed and specific.

EXAMPLE 9 Purification of the Enzyme CLEAVASE

As noted above, expressed thermostable proteins, i.e., the 5′ nucleases, were isolated by crude bacterial cell extracts. The precipitated E. coli proteins were then, along with other cell debris, removed by centrifugation. In this example, cells expressing the BN clone were cultured and collected (500 grams). For each gram (wet weight) of E. coli, 3 ml of lysis buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA, 100 μM NaCl) was added. The cells were lysed with 200 μg/ml lysozyme at room temperature for 20 minutes. Thereafter deoxycholic acid was added to make a 0.2% final concentration and the mixture was incubated 15 minutes at room temperature.

The lysate was sonicated for approximately 6-8 minutes at 0° C. The precipitate was removed by centrifugation (39,000 g for 20 minutes). Polyethyleneimine was added (0.5%) to the supernatant and the mixture was incubated on ice for 15 minutes. The mixture was centrifuged (5,000 g for 15 minutes) and the supernatant was retained. This was heated for 30 minutes at 60° C. and then centrifuged again (5,000 g for 15 minutes) and the supernatant was again retained.

The supernatant was precipitated with 35% ammonium sulfate at 4° C. for 15 minutes. The mixture was then centrifuged (5,000 g for 15 minutes) and the supernatant was removed. The precipitate was then dissolved in 0.25 M KCl, 20 mM Tris, pH 7.6, 0.2% TWEEN and 0.1 EDTA) and then dialyzed against Binding Buffer (8× Binding Buffer comprises: 40 mM imidazole, 4M NaCl, 160 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.9).

The solubilized protein is then purified on the Ni⁺⁺ column (Novagen). The Binding Buffer is allows to drain to the top of the column bed and load the column with the prepared extract. A flow rate of about 10 column volumes per hour is optimal for efficient purification. If the flow rate is too fast, more impurities will contaminate the eluted fraction.

The column is washed with 25 ml (10 volumes) of 1× Binding Buffer and then washed with 15 ml (6 volumes) of 1× Wash Buffer (8× Wash Buffer comprises: 480 mM imidazole, 4M NaCl, 160 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.9). The bound protein was eluted with 15 ml (6 volumes) of 1× Elute Buffer (4× Elute Buffer comprises: 4 mM imidazole, 2M NaCl, 80 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.9). Protein is then reprecipitated with 35% Ammonium Sulfate as above. The precipitate was then dissolved and dialyzed against: 20 mM Tris, 100 mM KCl, 1 mM EDTA). The solution was brought up to 0.1% each of TWEEN 20 and NP-40 and stored at 4° C.

EXAMPLE 10 5′ Nucleases Cut Nucleic Acid Substrates at Naturally Occurring Areas of Secondary Structure

The ability of a 5′ nuclease to recognize and cleave nucleic acid substrates at naturally occurring areas of secondary structure in the absence of a pilot oligonucleotide (i.e., primer independent cleavage) was shown in Example 1C (FIG. 12, lane 9). When DNAPTaq was incubated at 50° C. in the presence of a 206 bp DNA substrate (single end labeled, double stranded template) in a buffer containing 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.5 and 1.5 mM MgCl₂, adventitious (i.e., naturally occurring) structures in the DNA substrate were cleaved by the 5′ nuclease activity of the enzyme. This cleavage generated three prominent fragments (FIG. 12, lane 9); this cleavage pattern provides a “fingerprint” of the DNA template.

The ability of 5′ nucleases to cleave naturally occurring structures in nucleic acid templates (structure-specific cleavage) is useful to detect internal sequence differences in nucleic acids without prior knowledge of the specific sequence of the nucleic acid. To develop a general method to scan nucleic acids for mutations (e.g., single base changes (point mutations), small insertions or deletions, etc.) using 5′ nucleases, the following series of experiments were performed.

A. The Substitution of MnCl₂ for MgCl₂ in the Cleavage Reaction Produces Enhanced Cleavage Patterns

The effect of substituting of Mn²⁺ in place of Mg²⁺ upon the cleavage pattern created by 5′ nuclease activity on a double-stranded DNA substrate was examined. A 157 bp fragment derived from exon 4 of either the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:40) or the mutant G419R (SEQ ID NO:41) tyrosinase gene was prepared by PCR as follows.

The primer pair 5′ biotin-CACCGTCCTCTTCAAGAAG 3′ (SEQ ID NO:42) and 5′ fluorescein-CTGAATCTTGTAGATAGCTA 3′ (SEQ ID NO:43) was used to prime the PCRs. The synthetic primers were obtained from Promega; the primers were labeled on the 5′ end with biotin or fluorescein during synthesis.

The target DNA for the generation of the 157 bp fragment of mutant G419R (King, R. A., et al., (1991) Mol. Biol. Med. 8:19; here after referred to as the 419 mutant) was a 339 bp PCR product (SEQ ID NO:44) generated using genomic DNA homozygous for the 419 mutation. Genomic DNA was isolated using standard techniques from peripheral blood leukocytes isolated from patients. This 339 bp PCR product was prepared as follows.

The symmetric PCR reaction comprised 10 ng of genomic DNA from the 419 mutant, 100 pmoles of the primer 5′ biotin-GCCTTATTTTACTTTAAAAAT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:45), 100 pmoles of the primer 5′ fluorescein-TAAAGTTTTGTGTTATCTCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO:46), 50 μM of each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP40). The primers of SEQ ID NOS:45 and 46 were obtained from Integrated DNA Technologies, Coralville, Ind. A tube containing 45 μl of the above mixture was overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tube was heated to 95° C. for 1 min. Taq polymerase was then added as 1.25 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tube was heated to 94° C. for 40 sec, cooled to 55° C. for 50 sec, heated to 72° C. for 70 sec for 29 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. The products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross-link) in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the 339 bp fragment was excised from the gel. The DNA was eluted from the gel slice by passive diffusion overnight into a solution containing 0.5 M NH₄OAc, 0.1% SDS and 0.1 M EDTA. The DNA was then precipitated with ethanol in the presence of 4 μg of glycogen carrier. The DNA was pelleted and resuspended in 40 μl of TE (10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA).

To generate the 157 bp fragment from the 419 mutant, the purified 339 bp 419 PCR fragment was used as the target in an asymmetric PCR. The asymmetric PCR comprised 100 pmoles of the biotinylated primer of SEQ ID NO:45, 1 pmole of the fluoresceinated primer of SEQ ID NO:46, 50 μM of each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. A tube containing 45 μl of the above mixture was overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tube was heated to 95° C. for 5 sec and then cooled to 70° C. Taq polymerase was then added as 1.25 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tube was heated to 95° C. for 45 sec, cooled to 50° C. for 45 sec, heated to 72° C. for 1 min 15 sec for 30 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition.

The asymmetric PCR products were gel purified as follows. The products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross-link) in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining; the double-stranded DNA was differentiated from the single-stranded DNA due to the mobility shift commonly seen with single-stranded DNA produced from asymmetric PCR (In an asymmetric PCR both single-stranded and double-stranded products are produced; typically the single-stranded product will have a slower speed of migration through the gel and will appear closer to the origin than will the double-stranded product). The double-stranded 157 bp substrate corresponding to the 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:41) was excised from the gel.

The 157 bp wild-type fragment was generated by asymmetric PCR as described above for the 419 mutant with the exception that the target DNA was 10 ng of supercoiled pcTYR-N1Tyr plasmid DNA. The pcTYR-N1Tyr plasmid contains the entire wild-type tyrosinase cDNA (Geibel, L. B., et al. (1991) Genomics 9:435).

Following the asymmetric PCRs, the reaction products were resolved on an acrylamide gel and the double-stranded fragments of interest were excised, eluted and precipitated as described above. The precipitated 157 bp wild-type (SEQ ID NO:40) and 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:41) fragments were resuspended in 40 μl of TE.

Cleavage reactions comprised 100 fmoles of the resulting double-stranded substrate DNAs (the substrates contain a biotin moiety at the 5′ end of the sense strand) in a total volume of 10 μl of 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2, 1 mM divalent cation (either MgCl₂ or MnCl₂) and 1 unit of DNAPTaq. The reactions were overlaid with a drop of light mineral oil. Reactions were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the substrate and then the tubes were quickly cooled to 65° C. (this step allows the DNA assume its unique secondary structure by allowing the formation of intra-strand hydrogen bonds between complimentary bases). The reaction can be performed in either a thermocycler (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) programmed to heat to 95° C. for 5 seconds then drop the temperature immediately to 65° C. or alternatively the tubes can be placed manually in a heat block set at 95° C. and then transferred to a second heat block set at 65° C.

The reaction was incubated at 65° C. for 10 minutes and was stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide containing 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% each xylene cyanol and bromophenol blue). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively-charged nylon membrane (Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted in 0.5× TBE (45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), was laid on top of the exposed acrylamide gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and allowed to air dry. After complete drying, the membrane was washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) for 30 minutes. Three tenths of a ml of the buffer was used per cm² of membrane. A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical) was added to a 1:4000 dilution directly to the blocking solution, and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was rinsed briefly with H₂O and then washed 3 times (5 minutes/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCL, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) using 0.5 ml buffer/cm² of the buffer, with brief H₂O rinses between each wash. Similarly, for fluorescein-labeled DNA, anti-fluorescein fragment (Boehringer Mannheim Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.) at a 1:20,000 final dilution may be added followed by three washes (5 min/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer containing 0.1% SDS and 0.025% TWEEN 20. The membrane was then washed once in 1× SAAP buffer without SDS, drained thoroughly and placed in a plastic heat-sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) was added to the bag and distributed over the entire membrane for 5 minutes. The bag was drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles. The membrane was then exposed to X-ray film (Kodax XRP) for an initial 30 minutes. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The results are shown in FIG. 30.

In FIG. 30, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. The marker fragments were generated by digestion of pUC19 with HaeIII followed by the addition of biotinylated dideoxynucleotides (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.) to the cut ends using terminal transferase (Promega). Lanes 1, 3 and 5 contain the reaction products from the incubation of the wild type 157 nucleotide substrate in the absence of the DNAPTaq enzyme (lane 1), in the presence of MgCl₂ and enzyme (lane 3) or in the presence of MnCl₂ and enzyme (lane 5). Lanes 2, 4 and 6 contains the reaction products from the incubation of the 157 nucleotide substrate derived from the 419 mutant in the absence of enzyme (lane 2), in the presence of MgCl₂ and enzyme (lane 4) or in the presence of MnCl₂ and enzyme (lane 6).

FIG. 30 demonstrates that the use of MnCl₂ rather than MgCl₂ in the cleavage reaction results in the production of an enhanced cleavage pattern. It is desirable that the cleavage products are of different sizes so that the products do not all cluster at one end of the gel. The ability to spread the cleavage products out over the entire length of the gel makes it more likely that alterations in cleavage products between the wild type and mutant substrates will be identified. FIG. 30 shows that when Mg²⁺ is used as the divalent cation, the majority of the cleavage products cluster together in the upper portion of the gel. In contrast when Mn²⁺ is used as the divalent cation, the substrate assumes structures which, when cleaved, generate products of widely differing mobilities. These results show that Mn²⁺ is the preferred divalent cation for the cleavage reaction.

B. 5′ Nuclease Cleavage of Different but Similarly Sized DNAs Generates Unique Cleavage Fragments

The ability of 5′ nuclease to generate a cleavage pattern or “fingerprint” which is unique to a given piece of DNA was shown by incubating four similarly sized DNA substrates with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. The four DNA substrates used were a 157 nucleotide fragment from the sense (or coding) strand of exon 4 of the wild-type tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47); a 157 nucleotide fragment from the anti-sense (or non-coding) strand of exon 4 of the wild-type tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:48); a 165 nucleotide DNA fragment derived from pGEM3Zf(+) (SEQ ID NO:49) and a 206 nucleotide DNA fragment derived from the bottom strand of pGEM3Zf(+) (SEQ ID NO:50). The DNA substrates contained either a biotin or fluorescein label at their 5′ or 3′ ends. The substrates were made as follows.

To produce the sense and anti-sense single-stranded substrates corresponding to exon 4 of the wild-type tyrosinase gene, a double-stranded DNA fragment, 157 nucleotides in length (SEQ ID NO:40), was generated using symmetric PCR. The target for the symmetric PCR was genomic DNA containing the wild-type tyrosinase gene. The symmetric PCR comprised 50-100 ng of genomic wild-type DNA, 25 pmoles each of primers SEQ ID NOS:42 and 43, 50 μM each dNTP and 1.25 units of Taq polymerase in 50 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The reaction mixture was overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tube was heated to 94° C. for 30 sec, cooled to 50° C. for 1 min, heated to 72° C. for 2 min for 30 repetitions. The double-stranded PCR product was gel purified, precipitated and resuspended in 40 μl of TE buffer as described above in a).

The single-stranded sense and anti-sense 157 nucleotide DNA fragments were generated using the above 157 bp wild-type DNA fragment (SEQ ID NO:40) in two asymmetric PCR reactions. The sense strand fragment was generated using 5 μl of the above purified 157 bp fragment (SEQ ID NO:40) as the target in an asymmetric PCR. The reaction mixtures for the asymmetric PCR were as above for the symmetric PCR with the exception that 100 pmoles of the biotin-labeled sense primer (SEQ ID NO:42) and 1 pmole of the fluorescein-labeled anti-sense primer (SEQ ID NO:43) was used to prime the reaction. The anti-sense fragment was generated using 5 μl of the above purified 157 bp fragment as the target in an asymmetric PCR. The reaction conditions for the asymmetric PCR were as above for the symmetric PCR with the exception that 1 pmole of the sense primer (SEQ ID NO:42) and 100 pmoles of the anti-sense primer (SEQ ID NO:43) was used to prime the reaction.

The reaction conditions for the asymmetric PCR were 95° C. for 45 sec, 50° C. for 45 sec, 72° C. for 1 min and 15 sec for 30 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition. The reaction products were visualized, extracted and collected as described above with the single stranded DNA being identified by a shift in mobility when compared to a double stranded DNA control.

The single-stranded 165 nucleotide fragment from pGEM3Zf(+) (SEQ ID NO:49) was generated by asymmetric PCR. The PCR comprised 50 pmoles of 5′ biotin-AGCGGATAACAATTTCACACAGGA-3′ (SEQ ID NO:51; Promega) and 1 pmole of 5′-CACGGATCCTAATACGACTCACTATAGGG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:52; Integrated DNA Technologies, Coralville, Ind.), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. Forty-five microliters of this reaction mixture was overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tube was heated to 95° C. for 5 sec and then cooled to 70° C. Taq polymerase was then added at 1.25 units in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 45 sec, cooled to 50° C. for 45 sec, heated to 72° C. for 1 min 15 sec for 30 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition. The reaction products were visualized, extracted and collected as described above with the 164 nucleotide DNA fragment being identified by a shift in mobility when compared to a double stranded DNA control.

The 206 nucleotide DNA fragment (SEQ ID NO:50) was prepared by asymmetric as follows. The asymmetric PCR comprised 1 pmole of a double-stranded 206 bp PCR product (generated as described in Example IC), 50 pmoles of the primer 5′-CGCCAGGGTTTTCCCAGTCACGAC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:53), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. Ninety-five microliters of this reaction mixture was overlaid with three drops of light mineral oil and the tube was heated to 95° C. for 5 sec and then cooled to 70° C. Taq polymerase was then added at 2.5 units in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 45 sec, cooled to 63° C. for 45 sec, heated to 72° C. for 1 min 15 sec for 15 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition. The reaction products were visualized, extracted and collected as described above with the 206 nucleotide DNA fragment being identified by a shift in mobility when compared to a double stranded DNA control. The precipitated DNA was resuspended in 70 μl of TE buffer.

Twenty-five microliters of the above product was biotinylated on the 3′ end using 10-20 units of terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase (Promega) in a 50 μl reaction. The reaction comprised 0.5 nmoles of biotin-16-ddUTP (Boehringer Mannheim) and 1× buffer (500 mM cacoodylate buffer, pH 6.8, 5 mM CoCl₂, 0.5 mM DTT and 500 μg/ml BSA). The tubes were incubated at 37° C. for 15 min followed by ethanol precipitation in the presence of 4 μg of glyc7ogen. The DNA was ethanol precipitated a second time and then resuspended in 25 μl of 10 Mm Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

The cleavage reactions were carried out in a final volume of 10 μl containing 1× CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2) with 1 mM MnCl₂ using approximately 100 fmoles of substrate DNA and 250 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Parallel reactions lacking the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (no enzyme control) were set up as above with the exception that one third as much DNA template was used (approximately 33 fmoles of each template) to balance the signal on the autoradiograph.

Each substrate DNA was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad, Hercules, Calif.) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 2 mM MnCl₂. The solution was overlaid with one drop of light mineral oil. Tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the substrates and then the tubes were quickly cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The enzyme solution was at room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a 0.45 μm-pore positively charged nylon membrane (United States Biochemical). The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer as described above. The signal was developed using LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega) in place of the CDPSTAR; the membrane was then exposed to X-ray film as described above. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 shows the results of incubation of the four substrates described above in the presence or absence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Four sets of reactions are shown. Set one contains the reaction products from the incubation of the 157 nucleotide sense strand fragment of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) in the absence or presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Set two contains the reaction products from the incubation of the 157 nucleotide anti-sense strand fragment of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:48) in the absence or presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Set three contains the reaction products from the incubation of the 165 base bottom strand fragment of the plasmid pGEM3Zf(+) (SEQ ID NO:49) in the absence or presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Set four contains the reaction products from the incubation of the 206 base top strand fragment of the plasmid pGEM3Zf(+) (SEQ ID NO:50) in the absence or presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Lanes marked “M” contain biotin-labeled molecular weight markers prepared as described above; the sizes of the marker fragments are indicated in FIG. 31. In the absence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, no cleavage of the substrates is observed. In the presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, each substrate is cleaved generating a unique set of cleavage products. When these cleavage products are resolved on a polyacrylamide gel, a unique pattern or fingerprint is seen for each substrate DNA. Thus, although the four substrates are similar in size (157 to 206 bases), the enzyme CLEAVASE BN generates a unique collection of cleavage products from each substrate. These unique cleavage patterns result from the characteristic conformation each substrate DNA assumes.

The present invention contemplates the ability to generate a unique cleavage pattern for two or more DNA substrates of the same size as part of a method for the detection of genetic mutations. This method compares a normal (or wild type or non-mutated) substrate with a substrate from a patient suspected of having a mutation in that substrate. The two substrates would be of the same length and the cleavage reaction would be used to probe the patient DNA substrate for conformational changes relative to the pattern seen in the wild type control substrate.

EXAMPLE 11 Cleavage Directed by the Enzyme CLEAVASE BN can Detect Single Base Changes in DNA Substrates

The ability of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN to cleave DNA substrates of the same size but which contain single base changes between the substrates is herein demonstrated. The human tyrosinase gene was chosen as a model system because numerous single point mutations have been identified in exon 4 of this gene (Spritz, R. A. (1994) Human Molecular Genetics 3:1469). Mutation of the tyrosinase gene leads to oculocutaneous albinism in humans.

Three single-stranded substrate DNAs were prepared; the substrates contain a biotin label at their 5′ end. The wild type substrate comprises the 157 nucleotide fragment from the sense strand of the human tyrosinase gene ((SEQ ID NO:47); Geibel, L. B., et al. (1991) Genomics 9:435). Two mutation-containing substrates were used. The 419 substrate (SEQ ID NO:54) is derived from the tyrosinase mutant G419R which contains a glycine (GGA) to arginine (AGA) substitution; this mutant differs from the wild-type exon 4 fragment by a single base change at nucleotide 2675 (King, R. A., et al. (1991) Mol. Biol. Med. 8:19). The 422 substrate (SEQ ID NO:55) is derived from the tyrosinase mutant R422Q which contains an arginine (CGG) to glutamine (CAG) substitution; this mutant differs from the wild type exon 4 fragment by a single base change at nucleotide 2685 (Giebel, L. B., et al. (1991) J. Clin. Invest. 87:1119).

Single-stranded DNA containing a biotin label at the 5′ end was generated for each substrate using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 10a with the exception that the single-stranded PCR products were recovered from the gel rather than the double-stranded products.

The following primer pair was used to amplify each DNA (the 419 and 422 mutations are located internally to the exon 4 fragment amplified by the primer pair thus the same primer pair can be used to amplify the wild type and two mutant templates). The primer listed as SEQ ID NO:42 (sense primer) contains a biotin label at the 5′ end and was used in a 100-fold excess over the anti-sense primer of SEQ ID NO:43.

To generate the single stranded substrates the following templates were used. Ten ng of supercoiled plasmid DNA was used as the target to generate the wild-type (plasmid pcTYR-N1Tyr) or 422 mutant (plasmid pcTYR-A422) 157 nucleotide fragments. Five microliters of the gel purified 339 bp PCR fragment (SEQ ID NO:44) derived from genomic DNA homozygous for the 419 mutation (described in Example 10a) was used as the target to generate the 157 nucleotide 419 mutant fragment (SEQ ID NO:54).

For each target DNA, the asymmetric PCR comprised 100 pmoles of SEQ ID NO:42 and 1 pmole of SEQ ID NO:43, 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The reaction mixture (45 μl) was overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 sec then cooled to 70° C. Taq polymerase was then added as 1.25 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 45 sec, cooled to 50° C. for 45 sec, heated to 72° C. for 1 min 15 sec for 30 repetitions with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition. The single stranded PCR products were gel purified, precipitated and resuspended in 40 μl of TE buffer as described above.

Cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Each substrate DNA (100 fmoles) was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 2 mM MnCl₂. A tube containing 33 fmoles of template DNA in 10 μl of 1× CFLP buffer and 1 MnCl₂ was prepared for each template and served as the no enzyme (or uncut) control. The solution was overlaid with one drop of light mineral oil. Tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the substrates and then the tubes were quickly cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The enzyme solution was at room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10a. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 32.

In FIG. 32, lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1-3 contain the no enzyme control for the wild type (SEQ ID NO:47), the 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:54) and the 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55) substrates, respectively. Lane 4 contains the cleavage products from the wild type template. Lane 5 contains the cleavage products from the 419 mutant. Lane 6 contains the cleavage products from the 422 mutant.

FIG. 32 shows that a similar, but distinctly different, pattern of cleavage products is generated by digestion of the three template DNAs with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN. Note that in the digest of mutant 419, the bands below about 40 nucleotides are absent, when compared to wild-type, while in the digest of mutant 422 several new bands appear in the 53 nucleotide range.

Although the three template DNAs differed in only one of the 157 nucleotides, a unique pattern of cleavage fragments was generated for each. Thus a single base change in a 157 nucleotide fragment gives rise to different secondary structures which are recognized by the enzyme CLEAVASE.

EXAMPLE 12 Single Base Changes in Large DNA Fragments are Detected by the Enzyme CLEAVASE BN

The previous example demonstrated that the 5′ nuclease activity of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN could be used to detect single point mutations within a 157 nucleotide DNA fragment. The ability of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN to detect single point mutations within larger DNA fragments is herein demonstrated.

Increasingly larger fragments derived from the 422 tyrosinase mutant was compared to the same size fragments derived from the wild-type tyrosinase gene. Four sets of single-stranded substrates were utilized: 1) a 157 nucleotide template derived from the sense strand of exon 4 from the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:47) and 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55), 2) a 378 nucleotide fragment containing exons 4 and 5 from the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:56) and 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:57), 3) a 1.059 kb fragment containing exons 1-4 from the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:58) and 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:59) and 4) a 1.587 kb fragment containing exons 1-5 from the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:60) and 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:61). The only difference between the wild type and 422 mutant templates is the G to A change in exon 4 regardless of the length of the template used. The G to A point mutation is located 27, 27, 929 and 1237 nucleotides from the labeled ends of the 157 base, 378 base, 1.059 kb and 1.6 kb substrate DNAs, respectively.

a) Preparation of the Substrate DNA

A cDNA clone containing either the wild-type (pcTYR-N1Tyr, Bouchard, B., et al. (1989) J. Exp. Med. 169:2029) or 422 mutant (pcTYR-A422, Giebel, L. B., et al. (1991) 87:1119) tyrosinase gene was utilized as the target DNA in PCRs to generate the above substrate DNAs. The primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NOS:42 and 43 were used to generate a double stranded 157 bp DNA fragment from either the mutant of wild-type cDNA clone. The primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NO:42 and SEQ ID NO:62 was used to generate a double stranded 378 bp DNA fragment from either the wild-type or mutant cDNA clone. The primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NO:63 and SEQ ID NO:43 was used to generate a double stranded 1.059 kbp DNA fragment from either the wild-type or mutant cDNA clone. The primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NO:64 and SEQ ID NO:62 was used to generate a double stranded 1.587 kbp DNA fragment from either the wild-type or mutant cDNA clone. In each case the sense strand primer contained a biotin label at the 5′ end.

The PCR reactions were carried out as follows. One to two ng of plasmid DNA from the wild-type or 422 mutant was used as the target DNA in a 100 μl reaction containing 50 μM of each dNTP, 1 μM of each primer in a given primer pair, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. Tubes containing the above mixture were overlaid with three drops of light mineral oil and the tubes were heated to 94° C. for 1 min, then cooled to 70° C. Taq polymerase was then added as 2.5 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tube was heated to 93° C. for 45 sec, cooled to 52° C. for 2 min, heated to 72° C. for 1 min 45 sec for 35 repetitions, with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition.

Following the PCR, excess primers were removed using a QIA QUICK-SPIN PCR Purification kit (Qiagen, Inc. Chatsworth, Calif.) following the manufacturer's instructions; the DNA was eluted in 50 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA. The sense strand of each of the double-stranded fragments from the wild-type and 422 mutant gene were isolated as follows. Streptavidin-coated paramagnetic beads (Dynal M280 beads) (0.5 mg in 50 μl; pre-washed in 2× bind and wash (B&W) buffer (2 M NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1% TWEEN 20)) were added to each purified PCR product. The samples were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes with occasional shaking. The beads were removed from the supernatant by exposing the tube to a magnetic plate and the supernatant was discarded. The bead-DNA complexes were washed twice in 2× B&W buffer. One hundred microliters of 0.1 M NaOH were added to the beads and the samples were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes (for the 157, 378 bp DNAs); for DNA fragments larger than 1 kb, the beads were incubated at 47° C. for 30 minutes. After incubation, the beads were washed twice with 2× B&W buffer. Finally, the bead-ssDNA complexes were resuspended in 50 μl 2× B&W buffer and stored at 4° C.

b) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

The cleavage reactions were performed directly on the single-stranded DNA-bead complexes. Five to 10 μl of DNA-bead complex (about 100 fmoles of DNA) were placed in a 200 μl microcentrifuge tube and washed once with 10 μl of sterile H₂O. Seven and one half microliters of 1× CFLP buffer with 1.3 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM) was then added to each tube. The reaction tubes were prewarmed to 65° C. for 2 minutes and cleavage was initiated by the addition of 2.5 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (10-50 ng in 1× dilution buffer). The reaction was carried out at 65° C. for 5 min.

Immediately after this 5 min incubation, the beads were allowed to settle to the bottom of the tube and the supernatant was removed and discarded. Ten to forty microliters of stop buffer (95% formamide with 20 mM EDTA and 0,05% xylene cyanol and 0.05% bromophenol blue) was then added to the beads and the sample was incubated at 90° C. for 5-10 minutes. The formamide/EDTA solution releases the biotinylated DNA from the beads. The beads were allowed to settle to the bottom of the tube. The supernatant containing the cleavage products was collected. Two to eight microliters of the supernatant solution loaded onto 6% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10a and allowed to transfer overnight. After transfer the membrane was dried, blocked, probed and washed as described in Example 10a. The blot was reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10a. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 33.

In FIG. 33, lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1, 3, 5 and 7 contain cleavage products using the 157, 378, 1056 or 1587 nucleotide sense strand fragment from the wild-type tyrosinase gene, respectively. Lanes 2, 4, 6 and 8 contain cleavage products using the 157, 378, 1056 or 1587 nucleotide sense strand fragment from the 422 mutant tyrosinase gene, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 33, the clear pattern of cleavages seen between the wild type and 422 mutant was not obscured when the single base change was located in longer DNA fragments. Thus, the cleavage reaction of the invention can be used to scan large fragments of DNA for mutations. Fragments greater than about 500 bp in length cannot be scanned using existing methodologies such as SSCP or DGGE analysis.

EXAMPLE 13 The CLEAVASE Reaction is Insensitive to Large Changes in Reaction Conditions

The results shown above demonstrated that the enzyme CLEAVASE BN can be used to probe DNA templates in a structure-specific but sequence independent manner. These results demonstrated that the enzyme CLEAVASE BN could be used as an efficient way to recognize conformational changes in nucleic acids caused by sequence variations. This suggested that the 5′ nuclease activity of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN could be used to develop a method to scan nucleic acid templates for sequence alterations relative to a wild-type template. The experiments below showed that this was the case. Furthermore it is demonstrated below that the method of the invention is relatively insensitive to large changes in conditions thereby making the method suitable for practice in clinical laboratories.

First, the effect of varying the concentration of MnCl₂ on the cleavage reaction was determined. Second, the effect of different amounts of salt (KCl) on the cleavage pattern was examined. Third, a time course was performed to investigate when complete cleavage was obtained. Fourth, a temperature titration was performed to determine the effect of temperature variations on the cleavage pattern. Next, the enzyme was titrated to determine the effect of a 50-fold variation in enzyme concentration on the cleavage reaction. The results of these experiments showed that the CLEAVASE reaction is remarkably robust to large changes in conditions.

a) MnCl₂ Titration

To determine the sensitivity of the cleavage reaction to fluctuations in the concentration of MnCl₂, a single template was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng) in a buffer containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2 and various amount of MnCl₂. The cleavage reaction was performed as follows. One hundred fmoles of the 157 nucleotide sense strand fragment of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:55; prepared by asymmetric PCR as described in Example 11) was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 0, 2, 4, 8, 12 or 20 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of either 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 mM MnCl₂). A tube containing 100 fmoles template DNA in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 10 MnCl₂ was prepared and served as the no enzyme (or uncut) control. Each reaction mixture was overlaid with a drop of light mineral oil. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 sec and then cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The enzyme solution was at room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 8 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega Corp., Madison Wis.) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 34.

In FIG. 34, lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the migration of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 8 contain reaction products incubated in the presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in a buffer containing 10, 8, 6, 4, 2, 1, or 0 mM MnCl₂, respectively.

FIG. 34 shows that no cleavage occurs in the absence of divalent cations (lane 8, 0 mM MnCl₂). Efficient production of cleavage fragments was promoted by the inclusion of MnCl₂. The most distinct pattern of cleavage seen at 1 mM MnCl₂ (lane 7), but little change in the pattern was seen when the Mn²⁺ concentration varied from 1 to 4 mM; High concentrations of MnCl₂ tend to suppress the cleavage reaction (concentrations above 6 mM). These results show that the cleavage reaction requires a divalent cation but that changes in the amount of divalent cation present have little effect upon the cleavage pattern.

b) Effect of Salt Concentration on the Cleavage Reaction

To determine the effect of salt concentration upon the cleavage reaction, a single template was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng) in a buffer containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂ and various amount of KCl.

One hundred fmoles of the 157 base fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47; prepared as described in Example 10a) was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad) in a buffer containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2 and 1 mM MnCl₂. KCl was added to give a final concentration of either 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 mM KCl; the final reaction volume was 10 μl.

A tube containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂, 33 fmoles template DNA and 50 mM KCl was prepared and served as the no enzyme (or uncut) control. Each reaction mixture was overlaid with a drop of light mineral oil. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The enzyme solution was at room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 8 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega Corp., Madison Wis.) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 35.

In FIG. 35 , lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the migration of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 7 contain reaction products incubated in the presence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in a buffer containing 50, 40, 30, 20, 10 or 0 mM KCl, respectively.

The results shown in FIG. 35 show that the CLEAVASE reaction is relatively insensitive to variations in salt concentration. The same cleavage pattern was obtained when the 157 nucleotide tyrosinase DNA template (SEQ ID NO:47) was incubated with the enzyme CLEAVASE regardless of whether the KCl concentration varied from 0 to 50 mM.

c) Time Course of the Cleavage Reaction

To determine how quickly the cleavage reaction is completed, a single template was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN for various lengths of time. A master mix comprising 20 μl of a solution containing 1× CFLP buffer, 2 mM MnCl₂, and 400 fmoles of the 157 base fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene ((SEQ ID NO:47); prepared as described in Example 10b) was made. Five microliter aliquots were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad) for each time point examined. A no enzyme control tube was run; this reaction contained 33 fmoles of the template DNA in 1× CFLP buffer with 1 mM MnCl₂ (in a final reaction volume of 10 μl). The solutions were overlaid with one drop of light mineral oil. The tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the templates and then the tubes were cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng per μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCI, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. Immediately at the indicated time points, the reaction was stopped by the addition of 8 μl of 95% formamide containing 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% each xylene cyanol and bromophenol blue. The no enzyme control was incubated at 65° C., for 10 minutes and treated in the same manner as the other reactions by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega Corp., Madison Wis.) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10b. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 36.

In FIG. 36, lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control incubated for 10 minutes. Lanes 2-5 contain the cleavage products from reactions incubated for 0.1, 1, 5 or 10 minutes at 65° C. FIG. 36 shows that the cleavage reaction mediated by the enzyme CLEAVASE BN is very rapid. Cleavage is already apparent at less than 6 seconds (<0.1 min) and is complete within one minute. These results also show that the same pattern of cleavage is produced whether the reaction is run for 1 or 10 minutes.

d) Temperature Titration of the CLEAVASE Reaction

To determine the effect of temperature variation on the cleavage pattern, the 157 base fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN for 5 minutes at various temperatures. One hundred fmoles of substrate DNA (prepared as described in Example 10b) was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (BioRad) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 2 mM MnC1₂. Two “no enzyme” test control tubes were set-up as above with the exception that these reactions contained 33 fmoles of substrate DNA in 10 μl of the above buffer with 1 mM MnCl₂. The solution was overlaid with one drop of light mineral oil. Tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the templates and then the tubes were cooled to the desired temperature.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (250 ng per μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The tubes placed at either 55°, 60°, 65°, 70°, 75° or 80° C. After 5 minutes at a given temperature, the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer.

Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with Lumiphos-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega Corp., Madison Wis.) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 37, the lanes marker “M” contain molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1 and 2 contain no enzyme controls incubated at 55° C. and 80° C., respectively. Lanes 3-8 contain the cleavage products from the enzyme CLEAVASE-containing reactions incubated at 55° C., 60° C., 65° C., 70° C., 75° C. or 80° C., respectively.

FIG. 37 shows that the CLEAVASE reaction can be performed over a wide range of temperatures. The pattern of cleavages changed progressively in response to the temperature of incubation, in the range of 55° C. to 75° C. Some bands were evident only upon incubation at higher temperatures. Presumably some structures responsible for cleavage at the intermediate temperatures were not favored at the lower temperatures. As expected, cleavages became progressively less abundant in the high end of the temperature range tested as structures were melted out. At 80° C. cleavage was inhibited completely presumably due to complete denaturation of the template.

These results show that the cleavage reaction can be performed over a wide range of temperatures. The ability to run the cleavage reaction at elevated temperatures is important. If a strong (i.e., stable) secondary structure is assumed by the templates, a single nucleotide change is unlikely to significantly alter that structure, or the cleavage pattern it produces. Elevated temperatures can be used to bring structures to the brink of instability, so that the effects of small changes in sequence are maximized, and revealed as alterations in the cleavage pattern.within the target template, thus allowing the cleavage reaction to occur at that point.

e) Titration of the Enzyme CLEAVASE BN

The effect of varying the concentration of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in the cleavage reaction was examined. One hundred fmoles of the 157 base fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) was placed in 4 microcentrifuge tubes in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer with 2 mM MnCl₂. A no enzyme control tube was run; this reaction contained 33 fmoles of substrate DNA in 10 μl of 1× CFLP buffer containing 1 mM MnCl₂. The solutions were overlaid with one drop of light mineral oil. The tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the templates and then the tubes were cooled to 65° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 1× dilution buffer such that 10, 50, 100 or 250 ng of enzyme was in the tubes in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega Corp., Madison Wis.) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 38.

The lanes marked “M” in FIG. 38 contain molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the migration of the uncut substrate. Lanes 2-5 contain reaction products from reactions containing 10, 50, 100 or 250 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively.

These results show that the same cleavage pattern was obtained using the 157 nucleotide tyrosinase DNA substrate regardless of whether the amount of enzyme used in the reaction varied over a 25-fold range. Thus, the method is ideally suited for practice in clinical laboratories where reactions conditions are not as controlled as in research laboratories.

f) Consistent Cleavage Patterns are Obtained Using Different DNA Preparations

To demonstrate that the same cleavage pattern is consistently obtain from a given substrate, several different preparations of the 157 base fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) were generated. The substrate was generated as described in Example 10b. Three independent PCR reactions performed on separate days were conducted. One of these PCR samples was split into two and one aliquot was gel-purified on the day of generation while the other aliquot was stored at 4° C. overnight and then gel-purified the next day.

Cleavage reactions were performed as described in Example 10b. Samples were run on an acrylamide gel and processed as described in Example 10b. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 39.

In FIG. 39, the lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers. Set 1 contains the products from a cleavage reaction performed in the absence (−) or presence (+) of enzyme on preparation no. 1. Set 2 contains the products from a cleavage reaction performed in the absence (−) or presence (+) of enzyme on preparation no. 2. Set 3 contains the products from a cleavage reaction performed in the absence (−) or presence (+) of enzyme on preparation no. 3. Preparation no. 3 was derived from preparation 2 and is identical except that preparation no. 3 was gel-purified one day after preparation no. 2. Set 4 contains the products from a cleavage reaction performed in the absence (−) or presence (+) of enzyme on preparation no. 4. The same pattern of cleavage products is generated from these independently prepared substrate samples.

These results show that independently produced preparations of the 157 nucleotide DNA fragment gave identical cleavage patterns. Thus, the CLEAVASE reaction is not effected by minor differences present between substrate preparations.

EXAMPLE 14 Point Mutations are Detected Using Either the Sense or Anti-Sense Strand of the Tyrosinase Gene

The ability of the enzyme CLEAVASE to create a unique pattern of cleavage products (i.e., a fingerprint) using either the sense (coding) or anti-sense (non-coding) strand of a gene fragment was examined.

Single stranded DNA substrates corresponding to either the sense (SEQ ID NO:47) or anti-sense strand (SEQ ID NO:48) of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the wild-type tyrosinase gene were prepared using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 10a. The sense strand wild-type substrate contains a biotin label at the 5′ end; the anti-sense strand contains a fluorescein label at the 5′ end.

A single stranded DNA substrate corresponding to the sense strand of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the 419 mutant tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:54) was prepared using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 11. The sense strand 419 mutant substrate contains a biotin label at the 5′ end.

A single stranded DNA substrate corresponding to the anti-sense strand of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the 419 mutant tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:65) was prepared using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 11 with the exception that 100 pmoles of the fluorescein-labeled anti-sense primer (SEQ ID NO:43) and 1 pmole of the biotin-labelled sense primer (SEQ ID NO:42) were used. The resulting anti-sense strand 419 mutant substrate contains a fluorescein label at the 5′ end.

A single stranded DNA substrate corresponding to the sense strand of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the 422 mutant tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:55) was prepared using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 11. The sense strand 422 mutant substrate contains a biotin label at the 5′ end.

A single stranded DNA substrate corresponding to the anti-sense strand of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the 422 mutant tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:66) was prepared using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 11 with the exception that 100 pmoles of the fluorescein-labeled anti-sense primer (SEQ ID NO:43) and 1 pmole of the biotin-labelled sense primer (SEQ ID NO:42) were used. The resulting anti-sense strand 422 mutant substrate contains a fluorescein label at the 5′ end.

Following asymmetric PCR, the single stranded PCR products were gel purified, precipitated and resuspended in 40 μl of TE buffer as described in Example 10.

Cleavage reactions were performed as described in Example 11. Following the cleavage reaction, the samples were resolved by electrophoresis as described in Example 10a. After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively-charged nylon membrane (Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted in 0.5× TBE (45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), was laid on top of the exposed acrylamide gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and allowed to air dry. After complete drying, the membrane was washed twice in 1.5× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) for 30 minutes/wash. Three tenths of a ml of the buffer was used per cm² of membrane. The following reagents were added directly to the blocking solution: a streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical) added at a 1:4000 final dilution and an anti-fluorescein antibody (Fab)-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Boehringer Mannheim Biochemicals, Indianapolis, Ind.) added at a 1:20,000 final dilution. The membrane was agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was rinsed briefly with H₂O and then washed 3 times (5 minutes/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCL, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.05% SDS and 0.025% TWEEN 20 using 0.5 ml buffer/cm² of the buffer, with brief H₂O rinses between each wash. The membrane was then washed once in 1× SAAP buffer without SDS or TWEEN 20, drained thoroughly and placed in a plastic heat-sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) was added to the bag and distributed over the entire membrane for 5 minutes. The bag was drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles. The membrane was then exposed to X-ray film (Kodak XRP) for an initial 30 minutes. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 40.

In FIG. 40, lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1-6 contain biotinylated sense strand substrates from the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant 157 nucleotide fragments. Lanes 1-3 contain no enzyme controls for the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant fragments, respectively. Lanes 4-6 contain the reaction products from the incubation of the sense strand of the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant fragments with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively. Lanes 7-12 contain fluoresceinated anti-sense strand substrates from the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant 157 nucleotide fragments. Lanes 1-3 contain “no enzyme” controls for the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant fragments, respectively. Lanes 4-6 contain the reaction products from the incubation of the anti-sense strand of the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant fragments with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively.

As expected, distinct but unique patterns of cleavage products are generated for the wild-type, 419 and 422 mutant fragments when either the sense or anti-sense fragment is utilized. The ability to use either the sense or anti-sense strand of a gene as the substrate is advantageous because under a given set of reaction conditions one of the two strands may produce a more desirable banding pattern (i.e., the cleavage products are spread out over the length of the gel rather than clustering at either end), or may have a mutation more favorably placed to create a significant structural shift. This could be more important in the analysis of long DNA substrates which contain mutations closer to one end or the other. Additionally, detection on both strands serves as a confirmation of a sequence change.

EXAMPLE 15 Detection of Mutations in the Human Beta-Globin Gene Using the Enzyme CLEAVASE

The results shown in Examples 10-14 showed that the CLEAVASE reaction could be used to detect single base changes in fragments of the tyrosinase gene ranging from 157 nucleotides to 1.6 kb. To demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction is generally applicable for the detection of mutations, a second model system was examined.

The human β-globin gene is known to be mutated in a number of hemoglobinopathies such as sickle cell anemia and β-thalassemia. These disorders generally involve small (1 to 4) nucleotide changes in the DNA sequence of the wild type β-globin gene (Orkin, S. H. and Kazazian, H. H., Jr. (1984) Annu. Rev. Genet. 18:131 and Collins, F. S. and Weissman, S. M. (1984) Prog. Nucleic Acid Res. Mol. Biol. 31:315). At least 47 different mutations in the β-globin gene have been identified which give rise to a β-thalassemia.

Three β-globin mutants were compared to the wild type β-globin gene (Lawn, R. M., et al. (1980) Cell 21:647) using the CLEAVASE reaction. Mutant 1 contains a nonsense mutation in codon 39; the wild-type sequence at codon 39 is CAG; the mutant 1 sequence at this codon is TAG (Orkin, S. H. and Goff, S. C. (1981) J. Biol. Chem. 256:9782). Mutant 2 contains a T to A substitution in codon 24 which results in improper splicing of the primary transcript (Goldsmith, M. E., et al. (1983) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80:2318). Mutant 3 contains a deletion of two A residues in codon 8 which results in a shift in the reading frame; mutant 3 also contains a silent C to T substitution in codon 9 (Orkin, S. H. and Goff, S. C. (1981) J. Biol. Chem. 256:9782).

a) Preparation of Wild Type and Mutant β-Globin Gene Substrates

Single stranded substrate DNA was prepared from the above wild type and mutant β-globin genes as follows. Bacteria harboring the appropriate plasmids were streaked onto antibiotic plates and grown overnight at 37° C. (bacteria with the wild-type plasmid and the plasmid containing the mutant 3, were grown on tetracycline plates; bacteria with the plasmids containing the mutant 1 and mutant 2 sequences were grown on ampicillin plates). Colonies from the plates were then used to isolate plasmid DNAs using the WIZARD Minipreps DNA Purification System (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.). The colonies were resuspended in 200 μl of “Cell Resuspension Buffer” from the kit. The DNA was extracted according to the manufacturers protocol. Final yields of approximately 2.5 μg of each plasmid were obtained.

A 536 (wild-type, mutants 1 and 2) or 534 (mutant 3) nucleotide fragment was amplified from each of the above plasmids in polymerase chain reactions comprising 5 ng of plasmid DNA, 25 pmoles each of 5′-biotinylated KM29 primer (SEQ ID NO:67) and 5′-fluorescein labeled RS42 primer (SEQ ID NO:68), 50 μM each dNTP and 1.25 units of Taq DNA Polymerase in 50 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl with 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40. The reactions were overlaid with 2 drops of light mineral oil and were heated to 95° C. for 30 seconds, cooled to 55° C. for 30 seconds, heated to 72° C. for 60 seconds, for 35 repetitions in a thermocycler (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.). The products of these reactions were purified from the residual dNTPs and primers by use of a WIZARD PCR Cleanup kit (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.), leaving the duplex DNA in 50 μl of 10 mM Tris-CL, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

To generate single stranded copies of these DNAs, the PCRs described above were repeated using 1 μl of the duplex PCR DNA as template, and omitting the RS42 primer. The products of this asymmetric PCR were loaded directly on a 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross-link) in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, alongside an aliquot of the original PCR DNA to identify the location of the double-strand DNA product. After electrophoretic separation, the DNAs were visualized by staining with ethidium bromide and the single stranded DNAs, identified by altered mobility when compared to the duplex DNAs, were excised and eluted from the gel slices by passive diffusion overnight into a solution comprising 0.5 M NH₄0Ac, 0.1% SDS and 0.2 mM EDTA. The products were collected by ethanol precipitation and dissolved in 40 μl of 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

The sequence of the 536 nucleotide fragment from the wild-type β-globin gene is listed in SEQ ID NO:69. The sequence of the 534 nucleotide fragment from mutant 3 is listed in SEQ ID NO:70. The sequence of the 536 nucleotide fragment from mutant 1 is listed in SEQ ID NO:71. The sequence of the 536 nucleotide fragment from mutant 2 is listed in SEQ ID NO:72.

b) Optimization of the Cleavage Reaction Using the Wild-Type Beta-Globin Substrate

The optimal conditions (salt concentration, temperature) which produce an array of cleavage products having widely differing mobilities from the β-globin substrate were determined. Conditions which produce a cleavage pattern having the broadest spread array with the most uniform intensity between the bands were determined (the production of such an array of bands aids in the detection of differences seen between a wild-type and mutant substrate). This experiment involved running the cleavage reaction on the wild type β-globin substrate (SEQ ID NO:69) at several different temperatures in the presence of either no KCl or 50 mM KCl.

For each KCL concentration to be tested, 30 μl of a master mix containing DNA, CFLP buffer and salts was prepared. For the “0 mM KCl” reactions, the mix included approximately 500 fmoles of single-stranded, 5′ biotinylated 536-mer PCR DNA from plasmid pHBG1 in 30 μl of 1× CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2) with 1.7 mM MnCl₂ (for 1 mM in the final reaction); the “50 mM KCl” mix included 83.3 mM KCl in addition to the above components. The mixes were distributed into labeled reaction tubes in 6 μl aliquots, and stored on ice until use. An enzyme dilution cocktail included 450 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂.

Cleavage reactions were performed at 60° C., 65° C., 70° C. and 75° C. For each temperature to be tested, a pair of tubes with and without KCl were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds, then cooled to the selected temperature. The reactions were then started immediately by the addition of 4 μl of the enzyme cocktail. In the 75° C. test, a duplicate pair of tubes was included, and these tubes received 4 μl of 1× CFLP buffer without MnCl₂ in place of the enzyme addition. No oil overlay was used. All reactions proceeded for 5 minutes, and were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Completed and yet-to-be-started reactions were stored on ice until all reactions had been performed. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction was resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively-charged nylon membrane (NYTRAN, Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted in H₂O, was laid on top of the exposed gel. All air bubbles were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and allowed to air dry. After complete drying the membrane was washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) using 0.3 ml of buffer/cm² of membrane. The wash was performed for 30 minutes. A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical) was added to a 1:4000 dilution directly to the blocking solution, and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was rinsed briefly with H₂O and then washed three times for 5 minutes per wash using 0.5 ml/cm² of 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 10, 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS). The membrane was rinsed briefly with H₂O between each wash. The membrane was then washed once in 1× SAAP/1 mM MgCl₂ without SDS, drained thoroughly and placed in a plastic heat-sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet, 5 mls of either CSPD or CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) chemiluminescent substrates for alkaline phosphatase were added to the bag and distributed over the entire membrane for 2-3 minutes. The CSPD-treated membranes were incubated at 37° C. for 30 minutes before an initial exposure to XRP X-ray film (Kodak) for 60 minutes. CDPSTAR-treated membranes did not require preincubation, and initial exposures were for 10 minutes. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The results are shown in FIG. 41.

In FIG. 41, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. Lanes 1-5 contain reaction products from reactions run in the absence of KCl. Lane 1 contains the a reaction run without enzyme at 75° C. Lanes 2-5 contain reaction products from reactions run at 60° C., 65° C., 70° C. and 75° C., respectively. Lanes 6-10 contain reaction products from reactions run in the presence of 50 mM KCl. Lane 6 contains the a reaction run without enzyme at 75° C. Lanes 7-10 contain reaction products from reactions run at 60° C., 65° C., 70° C. and 75° C., respectively.

In general, a preferred pattern of cleavage products was produced when the reaction included 50 mM KCl. As seen in Lanes 7-10, the reaction products are more widely spaced in the 50 mM KCL-containing reactions at every temperature tested as compared to the reactions run in the absence of KCL (lanes 2-5; more of the cleavage products are found clustered at the top of the gel near the uncut substrate). As seen in Lane 7 of FIG. 41, cleavage reactions performed in 50 mM KCl at 60° C. produced a pattern of cleavage products in which the products are maximally spread out, particularly in the upper portion of the gel, when compared to other reaction condition patterns.

From the results obtained in this experiment, the optimal cleavage conditions for the 536 nucleotide sense strand fragment derived from the wild-type β-globin gene (SEQ ID NO:69) were determined to be 1× CFLP buffer containing 1 mM MnCl₂ and 50 mM KCl at 60° C.

c) Optimization of the Cleavage Reaction Using Two Mutant Beta-Globin Substrates

From the results obtained above in a) and b), 60° C. was chosen as the optimum temperature for the cleavage reaction when a β-globin substrate was to be used. When the wild-type substrate was utilized, running the cleavage reaction in the presence of 50 mM KCl generate the optimal pattern of cleavage products. The effect of varying the concentration of KCl upon the cleavage pattern generated when both wild-type and mutant β-globin substrates were utilized was next examined to determine the optimal salt concentration to allow a comparison between the wild-type and mutant β-globin substrates.

Single stranded substrates, 536 nucleotides in length, corresponding to mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:71) and mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:72) mutations were prepared as described above in a). These two mutants each differ from the wild-type sequence by 1 nucleotide; they differ from each other by 2 nucleotides.

For each substrate tested, 39 μl of a master mix containing DNA, CFLP buffer and MnCl₂ was prepared. These mixes each included approximately 500 fmoles of single-stranded, 5′ biotinylated 536 nucleotide substrate DNA, 39 μl of 1× CFLP buffer containing 1.54 mM MnCl₂ (giving a final concentration of 1 mM MnCl₂). The mixes were distributed into labeled reaction tubes in 6.5 μl aliquots. Each aliquot then received 0.5 μl of 200 mM KCl for each 10 mM final KCl concentration (e.g., 2.0 μl added to the 40 mM reaction tube) and all volumes were brought to 9 μl with dH₂O. No oil overlay was used. The reactions were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds, then cooled to 65° C. The reactions were then started immediately by the addition of 50 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 1 μl of enzyme dilution buffer (20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 10 μg/ml BSA). All reactions proceeded for 5 minutes, and were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction was resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described above. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was treated as described above in b) and then exposed to X-ray film. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 42.

In FIG. 42, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. Lanes 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11 contain reaction products from cleavage reactions using the mutant 1 substrate in the presence of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 mM KCl, respectively. Lanes 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 contain reaction products from cleavage reactions using the mutant 2 substrate in the presence of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50 mM KCl, respectively.

FIG. 42 shows that while the pattern of cleavage products generated from each mutant changes as the KCl concentration is increased, distinct patterns are generated from each mutant and differences in banding patterns are seen between the two mutants at every concentration of KCl tested. In the mid-salt ranges (10 to 20 mM KCl), the larger cleavage bands disappear and smaller molecular weight bands appear (lanes 3-6). At higher salt concentrations (30 to 50 mM KCl), the larger molecular weight cleavage bands reappear with the cominant loss of the low molecular weight bands (lanes 7-12). Reaction conditions comprising the use of 50 mM KCl were chosen as optimal from the results show in FIG. 42. Clear differences in the intensities of a band appearing about 200 nucleotides (see arrow in FIG. 42) is seen between the two mutant substrates under these reaction conditions.

d) The Enzyme CLEAVASE Generates Unique Cleavage Products From Wild-Type and Mutant Beta-Globin Substrates

From the experiments performed above, the optimal reaction conditions when the wild-type or mutant β-globin substrates were determined to be the use of 50 mM KCl and a temperature of 60° C. These conditions were then used to allow the comparison of the cleavage patterns generated when the wild-type substrate (SEQ ID NO:69) was compared to the mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:71), mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:72) and mutant 3 (SEQ ID NO:70) substrates.

Single-stranded substrate DNA, 534 or 536 nucleotides in length, was prepared for the wild-type, mutant 1, mutant 2 and mutant 3 β-globin genes as described above in a). Cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Reaction tubes were assembled which contained approximately 100 fmoles of each DNA substrate in 9 μl of 1.1× CFLP buffer (1× final concentration) with 1.1 mM MnCl₂ (1 mM final concentration) and 55.6 mM KCl (50 mM final concentration). A “no enzyme” or uncut control was set up for each substrate DNA. The uncut controls contained one third as much DNA ( approximately 33 fmoles) as did the enzyme-containing reactions to balance the signal seen on the autoradiograph.

The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 sec, cooled to 60° C. and the reactions were started immediately by the addition of 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (50 ng per μl in 1× dilution buffer). The uncut controls received 1 μl of 1× dilution buffer.

Reactions proceeded for 5 min and then were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 min and 5 μl of each reaction was resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described above. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was treated as described above in b) and then exposed to X-ray film. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 43.

In FIG. 43, two panels are shown. The first panel shows the reaction products from the above cleavage reactions; the uncut controls are shown in lanes 1-4 and the cleavage products are shown in lanes 5-6. The second panel is a magnification of lanes 5-8 to better shown the different banding patterns seen between the substrate DNAs in the upper portion of the gel.

In FIG. 43, the lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1-4 contain the uncut controls for the wild-type, mutant 1, mutant 2 and mutant 3 β-globin substrates, respectively. Lanes 5-8 contain the cleavage products from the wild-type, mutant 1, mutant 2 and mutant 3 substrates, respectively.

From the results shown in FIG. 43, the enzyme CLEAVASE BN generates a unique pattern of cleavage products from each β-globin substrate tested. Differences in banding patterns are seen between the wild-type and each mutant; different banding patterns are seen for each mutant allowing not only a discrimination of the mutant from the wild-type but also a discrimination of each mutant from the others.

The results shown here for the β-globin gene and above for the tyrosinase gene demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction provides a powerful new tool for the detection of mutated genes.

EXAMPLE 16 Treatment of RNA Substrates Generates Unique Cleavage Patterns

The present invention contemplates 5′ nuclease cleavage of single- or double-stranded DNA substrates to generate a unique pattern of bands characteristic of a given substrate. The ability of the 5′ nuclease activity of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN to utilize RNA as the substrate nucleic acid was next demonstrated. This experiment showed that RNA can be utilized as a substrate for the generation of a cleavage pattern using appropriate conditions (Lowering of the pH to 6.5 from 8.2 to reduce manganese-mediated degradation of the RNA substrate). The experiment was performed as follows.

An RNA transcript internally labelled with biotin was produced to serve as the substrate. The plasmid pGEM3Zf (Promega) was digested with EcoRI. EcoRI cuts the plasmid once generating a linear template. An RNA transcript 64 nucleotides in length (SEQ ID NO:73) was generated by SP6 transcription of the linearized template using a RIBOPROBE GEMINI System kit from Promega, Corp.; the manufacturer's directions were followed with the exception that 25% of the UTP in the reaction was replaced with biotin-UTP (Boehringer Mannheim) to produce an internally labelled transcript. Following the transcription reaction (1 hour at 37° C.), the DNA template was removed by treatment with RQ1 RNase-free DNAse (from the RIBOPROBE GEMINI kit and used according to the manufacturer's instructions) and the RNA was collected and purified by precipitating the sample twice in the presence of 2 M NH₄OAc and ethanol. The resulting RNA pellet was rinsed with 70% ethanol, air dried and resuspended in 40 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0 and 1 mM EDTA.

Cleavage reactions contained 1 μl of the above RNA substrate and 50 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 10 μl of 1× RNA-CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, pH 6.3) and 1 mM of either MgCl₂ or MnCl₂. The reactions were assembled with all the components except the enzyme and were warmed to 45° C. for 30 sec. Reactions were started by the addition of 50 ng of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in 1 μl of dilution buffer (20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 10 μg/ml BSA). Reactions proceeded for 10 min and were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1.2× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with LUMIPHOS-530 (United States Biochemical) or Quantum Yield Chemiluminescent Substrate (Promega) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10b. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 44.

In FIG. 44, lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the migration of the uncut substrate. Lanes 2 and 3 contain reaction products from the incubation of the RNA substrate in a buffer containing MgCl₂ in the presence or absence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively. Lanes 4 and 5 contain reaction products from the incubation of the RNA substrate in a buffer containing MnCl₂ in the presence or absence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively. A pattern of cleavage products is seen when the enzyme is incubated with the RNA substrate in the presence of MnCl₂, (lane 5).

These results show that the enzyme CLEAVASE can be used to probe RNA substrates for changes in sequence (i.e., point mutations, deletions, substitutions). This capability enables the examination of genes which have very large introns (e.g., greater than 10 kb) interrupting the coding sequences. The spliced RNA transcript represents a simpler target for the scanning for mutations. In addition, the structural (i.e., folding) information gained by cleavage of the RNA would be useful in targeting of hybridization or ribozyme probes to unstructured regions of RNAs. Furthermore, because the cleavage reaction occurs so quickly, the enzyme CLEAVASE can be used to study various types of RNA folding and the kinetics with which this folding occurs.

EXAMPLE 17 The 5′ Nuclease Activity from Both CLEAVASE BN and Taq Polymerase Generates Unique Cleavage Patterns Using Double-Stranded DNA Substrates

The ability of both the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and Taq polymerase to generate cleavage patterns on single-stranded DNA templates was examined. The substrates utilized in this experiment were the 378 nucleotide fragment from either the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:56) or 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:57) tyrosinase gene. These single-stranded substrates were generated as described in Example 12a.

Cleavage reactions were performed as described in Example 12b with the exception that half of the reactions were cut with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN as described and a parallel set of reaction was cut with Taq polymerase. The Taq polymerase reactions contained 1.25 units of Taq polymerase in 1× CFLP buffer. The reaction products were resolved by electrophoresis and the autoradiograph was generated as described in Example 12b. The autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 45.

In FIG. 45, lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers. Lanes 1 and 2 contain the wild-type or 422 mutant substrate cleaved with the enzyme CLEAVASE BN, respectively. Lanes 3 and 4 contain the wild-type or 422 mutant substrate cleaved with Taq polymerase, respectively.

FIG. 45 shows that both the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and Taq polymerase generate a characteristic set of cleavage bands for each substrate allowing the differentiation of the wild-type and 422 mutant substrates. The two enzyme produce similar but distinct arrays of bands for each template.

These results show that the 5′ nuclease of both the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and Taq polymerase are useful for practicing the cleavage reaction of the invention. Cleavage with Taq polymerase would find application when substrates are generated using the PCR and no intervening purification step is employed other than the removal of excess nucleotides using alkaline phosphatase

EXAMPLE 18 Multiplex Cleavage Reactions

The above Examples show that the cleavage reaction can be used to generate a characteristic set of cleavage products from single-stranded DNA and RNA substrates. The ability of the cleavage reaction to utilize double-stranded DNA templates was examined. For many applications, it would be ideal to run the cleavage reaction directly upon a double-stranded PCR product without the need to isolate a single-stranded substrate from the initial PCR. Additionally it would be advantageous to be able to analyze multiple substrates in the same reaction tube (“multiplex” reactions).

Cleavage reactions were performed using a double-stranded template which was carried a 5′ biotin label on the sense-strand and a 5′ fluorescein label on the anti-sense strand. The double-stranded substrate was denatured prior to cleavage. The double-stranded substrate was cleaved using Taq polymerase. Taq polymerase was used in this experiment because it has a weaker duplex-dependent 5′ to 3′ exonuclease activity than does the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and thus Taq polymerase does not remove the 5′ end label from the re-natured DNA duplexes as efficiently as does the enzyme CLEAVASE BN; therefore less signal is lost in the reaction.

The substrate utilized was a 157 bp fragment derived from either the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:47), 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:54) or 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55) of the tyrosinase gene. The wild-type fragment was generated as described in Example 10a, the 419 mutant fragment was generated as described in Example 10a and the 422 mutant fragment was generated as described in Example 11 using PCR. The sense strand primer (SEQ ID NO:42) contains a 5′ biotin label and the anti-sense primer (SEQ ID NO:43) contains a 5′ fluorescein label resulting in the generation of a double-stranded PCR product label on each strand with a different label. The PCR products were gel purified as described in Example 10a.

The cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Reaction tubes were assembled with approximately 100 fmoles of the double-stranded DNA substrates in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer, 1 mM MnCl₂. The solutions were overlaid with a drop of mineral oil. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 30 sec and 1 unit of Taq polymerase (Promega) was added. Uncut controls contained 33 fmoles of double-stranded DNA substrates in 5 μl of 1× CFLP buffer, 1 mM MnCl₂. The reactions were cooled to 65° C. and incubated at this temperature for 15 minutes. The reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 min and 5 μl of reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The entire set of reactions was loaded in duplicate on the gel such that duplicate nylon membranes containing the full set of reactions were created. After transfer to a nylon membrane (performed as described in Example 10a), the membrane was cut in half; one half was probed using a streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate to visualize the biotinylated sense-strand products (as described in Example 10a). The other half of the membrane was probed with an anti-fluorescein antibody-alkaline phosphatase conjugate to visualize the fluorescein-labelled anti-sense strand products (as described in Example 5). The blots were visualized using the chemiluminescent procedures described in Examples 10a and 5 for biotin-labeled or fluorescein-labeled DNA, respectively. The autoradiographs are shown side-by side in FIG. 46.

In FIG. 46, the lane labeled “M1” contains biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10a. The lane labeled “M2” contains molecular weight markers generated by digestion of pUC19 with MspI, followed by Klenow treatment to fill-in the ends. The blunt ends were then labeled with fluoresceinated dideoxynucleotides (Boehringer Mannheim) using terminal transferase (Promega). Lanes M1 and 1-6 were developed using the protocol for biotinylated DNA. Lanes 7-12 and M2 were developed using the protocol for fluorescein-labeled DNA. Note that in all lanes both strands of the substrate are present; only one strand is visualized in a given development protocol.

In FIG. 46, lanes 1-3 and 7-9 contain the “no enzyme” or uncut controls using the wild-type, 419 or 422 mutant substrates, respectively. Lanes 4-6 and 10-12 contain cleavage products from the wild-type, 419 or 422 mutant substrates, respectively. Unique patterns of cleavage products are seen for each strand of each of the three substrates examined. Thus, a single reaction allowed the generation of a unique fingerprint from either the sense or anti-sense strand of each of the three tyrosinase fragments tested.

The results shown in FIG. 46 demonstrate that a cleavage pattern can be generated from a double-stranded DNA fragment by denaturing the fragment before performing the cleavage reaction. Note that in FIG. 46 the cleavage patterns were generated in the course of a single round of heating to denature and cooling to cleave and that much of the substrate remains in an uncut form. This reaction would be amenable to performing multiple cycles of denaturation and cleavage in a thermocycler. Such cycling conditions would increase the signal intensity seen for the cleavage products. Substrates generated by the PCR performed in the standard PCR buffer (50 mM KCl, 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 0.01% gelatin) can be treated to remove remaining dNTPs (e.g., addition of alkaline phosphatase) and to provide Mn²⁺. Under these conditions the CLEAVASE reaction can be performed on both strands of one or more products generated in that PCR. Such a protocol reduces sample preparation to a minimum resulting in a savings of both time and expense.

The above example also demonstrates that two distinct substrates can be analyzed in a single reaction thereby allowing the “multiplexing” of the cleavage reaction.

EXAMPLE 19 Optimization of Manganese Ion Concentration for Cleavage of Double Stranded DNA Substrates

As discussed above, it may be desirable to run the cleavage reaction on double-stranded DNA substrates such restriction fragments or segments generated by balanced or symmetric PCR. The effect of varying the concentration of Mn²⁺ in cleavage reactions using double-stranded DNA substrates was investigated. The results shown below demonstrate that the optimal concentration of Mn²⁺ is lower when a double-stranded DNA substrate is employed in the cleavage reaction as compared to single-stranded DNA substrates.

Two double-stranded (ds) DNA substrates, 157 bp in length, derived from the tyrosinase mutants 419 (SEQ ID NO:40) and 422 (SEQ ID NO:84) were prepared by PCR amplification of the exon 4 region of human tyrosinase gene as described above in Example 18. The sense strand of the 419 and 422 tyrosinase mutant substrates contained a biotin-labeled at the 5′ end following the PCR. The PCR products were gel purified as described in Example 10a.

The cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Reaction tubes were assembled with approximately 40 fmoles of the ds DNA substrates in 10 μl of water. The tubes were brought to 95° C. for 10 seconds in a PTC-100 Programmable Thermal Controller (MJ Research, Inc.) to denature the DNA. The cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 10 μl of 2× CFLP buffer (pH 8.2) containing 1 μl of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (25 ng in 1× dilution buffer) and different concentrations of MnCl₂ such that the final concentration of MnCl₂ in reaction mixture (20 μl final volume) was either 0.5 mM, 0.25 mM, 0.15 mM, 0.1 mM, 0.05 mM and 0 mM. After mixing, the samples were immediately cooled to 65° C. and incubated at this temperature for 5 minutes. The reactions were terminated by placing the samples on ice and adding 10 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 85° C. for 30 sec and 10 l of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (USB), treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10a. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 47.

In FIG. 47, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10. Lanes 1-6 contain the cleavage products generated by cleavage of the 419 mutant and lanes 7-12 contain the cleavage products generated by cleavage of the 422 mutant. The reaction products generated by cleavage of the ds DNA substrates in 1× CFLP buffer containing 0.5 mM (lanes 1,7); 0.25 mM (lanes 2,8); 0.15 mM (lanes 3,9); 0.1 mM (lanes 4,10); 0.05 mM (lanes 5,11) and 0 mM MnCl₂ (lanes 6,12) are shown.

The results shown in FIG. 47 show no cleavage is seen in the absence of divalent cations as is also the case for cleavage of ss DNA substrates (see Example 13(a) and FIG. 34). Optimal cleavage (i.e., production of the most distinct pattern of clevage fragments) of ds DNA substrates was seen in the presence of 0.25 mM MnCl₂. This optimum is considerably lower than that obtained using ss DNA substrates (Example 13 and FIG. 34 show that cleavage of ss DNA substrates was optimal in 1 mM MnCl₂.). FIG. 47 shows that the efficiency of cleavage of ds DNA substrates decreases as the concentration of MnCl₂ is lowered; this effect is likely due to the lower efficiency of the enzyme in decreasing concentrations of MnCl₂.

FIG. 47 shows that the cleavage pattern for dsDNA substrates apparently disappears when high concentrations of MnCl₂ (0.5 mM, lanes 1 and 7) are employed in the cleavage reaction. This result is in contrast to the results obtained when cleavage reactions are performed on single-stranded DNA (ssDNA) substrates. Example 13(a) showed that efficient cleavage of ss DNA substrates were obtained in 1 mM MnCl₂ and little change in the cleavage pattern was seen when the Mn²⁺ concentration varied from 1 to 4 mM.

The loss of the signal seen when ds DNA substrates are cleaved in buffers containing high concentrations of MnCl₂ may be explained as follows. The presence of high concentrations of divalent ions promotes the reannealling of the DNA strands of the ds substrate during the course of the cleavage reaction. The enzyme CLEAVASE BN can nibble ds DNA substrates from the 5′ end (i.e., the enzyme removes short DNA fragments from the 5′ end in an exonucleolytic manner; see Example 6). This nibbling results in the apparent removal of the label from the substrate DNA (as the DNA contains a 5′ end label). Very short DNA fragments which contain the 5′ end label are not visualized as they run out of the gel or are not efficiently transferred to the membrane.

EXAMPLE 20 Detection of Cleavage Patterns can be Automated

The ability to detect the characteristic genetic fingerprint of a nucleic acid substrate generated by the cleavage reaction using fluorescently labelled substrates in conjunction with automated DNA sequencing instrumentation would facilitate the use of the CFLP method in both clinical and research applications. This example demonstrates that differently labelled isolates (two different dyes) can be cleaved in a single reaction tube and can be detected and analyzed using automated DNA sequencing instrumentation.

Double-stranded DNA substrates, which contained either the N-hydroxy succinimidyl ester JOE-NHS (JOE) or FAM-NHS (FAM) on the sense-strand, were generated using the PCR and primers labelled with fluorescent dyes. The anti-sense strand contained a biotin label. The substrates utilized in this experiment were the 157 bp fragments from the wild-type (SEQ ID NO:40) and 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55) of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene.

The wild-type and 422 mutant tyrosinase gene substrates were amplified from cDNA plasmid clones containing either the wild-type (pcTYR-N1Tyr, Bouchard, B., et al. (1989) J. Exp. Med. 169:2029) or the 422 mutant (pcTYR-A422, Giebel, L. B., et al. (1991) 87:1119) forms of the tyrosinase gene. Each double-stranded substrate was amplified and the 5′ ends labelled with either a biotin moiety or a fluorescent dye by using the following primer pairs in the PCR. The anti-sense primer of SEQ ID NO:43 containing a 5′-biotin moiety was obtained from Integrated DNA Technologies, Inc. (IDT, Coralville, Iowa). The biotinylated anti-sense primer was used to prime the synthesis of both the wild-type and 422 mutant substrates. The sense primer of SEQ ID NO:42 labelled with JOE was used to prime synthesis of the wild-type tyrosinase gene. The sense primer of SEQ ID NO:42 labelled with FAM was used to prime synthesis of the 422 mutant tyrosinase gene. The JOE and FAM-labelled primers were obtained from Genset (Paris, France).

The PCR reactions were carried out as follows. One to two nanograms of plasmid DNA from the wild-type or 422 mutant were used as the target DNA in a 100 μl reaction containing 50 μM of each dNTP, 1 μM of each primer in a given primer pair, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. Tubes containing the above mixture were overlaid with 70 μl Chill Out 14™ liquid wax (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.). The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 1 min and then cooled to 70° C. Taq DNA polymerase (Perkin-Elmer) was then added as 2.5 units of enzyme in 5 μl of a solution containing 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were heated to 95° for 45 sec, cooled to 50° C. for 45 sec, heated to 72° C. for 1 min and 15 sec for 35 repetitions. Following the last repetition, the tubes were incubated at 72° C. for 5 min.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. The products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (29:1 cross-link) in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the 157 bp fragments were excised from the gel. The DNA was eluted from the gel slices by passive diffusion overnight into a solution containing 0.5 M NH₄OAc, 0.1% SDS and 0.1 M EDTA. The DNA was then precipitated with ethanol in the presence of 4 μg of glycogen carrier. The DNA was pelleted and resuspended in 30 μl of H₂O.

The cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Approximately 100 fmoles of each double-stranded DNA substrate (1-3 μl of each gel purified DNA) in a total volume of 6 μl in H₂O was placed in a 500 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tube (Perkin-Elmer). The tube was heated to 95° C. for 10 seconds to denature the substrates and then the tube was quickly cooled to 50° C. (this step allows the DNA to assume its unique secondary structure by allowing the formation of intra-strand hydrogen bonds between complimentary bases). The cleavage reaction was started by adding 2 μl of 50 mM MOPS (pH 7.2), 1 μl of 1 mM MnCl₂ and 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl). The cleavage reaction was performed in a thermocycler (Perkin-Elmer DNA Thermal Cycler 480, Norwalk, Conn.) programmed to heat to 95° C. for 10 seconds and then cooled immediately to 50° C. The reaction was then incubated at 50° C. for 5 minutes and stopped by the addition of 1 μl of 10 mM EDTA.

Following the cleavage reaction, the sample was resolved by gel electrophoresis using an ABI 373A DNA Sequencer (Foster City, Calif.). Prior to loading, the sample was denatured by adding 5 μl of a solution containing 95% formamide and 10 mM EDTA and heating to 90° C. for 2 minutes. Five microliters of the sample was resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 6 M urea, in 1× TBE buffer (89 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 2 mM EDTA). The gel was run at 30 watts for 14 hours. Signals from four wavelength channels were collected using the Applied Biosystem Data Collection program on a MACINTOSH computer. The raw data was analyzed with the BaseFinder program (Giddings, M., et al. (1993) Nucl. Acids Res. 21:4530) which corrects for the fluorescent spectrum overlap in the four channel signals and mobility shifts caused by the use of different dye labels.

The results are shown in FIG. 48. FIG. 48 shows two traces representing the two channel signals for the wild-type and mutant samples. The wild-type sample, which was labeled with JOE dye, is shown by the thin lines. The mutant sample (R422Q), which was labeled with FAM dye, is shown by the thick lines. For comparison, a photograph of a high resolution polyacrylamide gel (10% gel with 19:1 crosslink) containing the resolved cleavage products is shown above the traces (the top lane contains cleavage fragments produced by clevage of the wild-type substrate; the bottom lane contains cleavage fragments produced by clevage of the R422Q mutant substrate). The cleavage products shown in the gel, which contain biotin labels at the 5′ end of the sense strand, were generated, transferred to a nylon membrane and visualized as described in Example 10a. Arrows point from selected bands seen upon cleavage of the 422 mutant substrate to the corresponding peaks in the trace generated by the automated DNA sequencer (the arrows are labelled 1 through 7 beginning with the left-hand side of FIG. 48).

Comparison of the two traces shows that differences in the cleavage patterns generated from the cleavage of the wild-type and 422 mutant substrates in the same reaction are detected using automated DNA sequencing instrumentation. For example, cleavage of the 422 substrate generates a cleavage product of approximately 56 nucleotides which is not seen when the wild-type substrate is cleaved. This 56 nucleotide product is seen as the peak depicted by arrow 6 in FIG. 48. FIG. 48 shows that not only are new cleavage products generated by cleavage of the mutant substrate, but that the cleavage of certain structures is enhanced in the mutant substrate as compared to the wild-type substrate (compare the intensity of the peaks corresponding to arrows 2-5 in the wild-type and mutant traces). In addition, certain cleavage products are shared between the two substrates and serve as reference markers (see arrows 1 and 7).

The above results show that automated DNA sequencing instrumentation can be used to detect the characteristic genetic fingerprint of a nucleic acid substrate generated by the cleavage reaction. The results also demonstrate that the cleavage reaction can be run as a multiplex reaction. In this experiment both the wild-type and the mutant ds DNA substrates were cleaved in the same reaction (i.e., a multiplex reaction) and then were resolved on the same electrophoretic run using an automated DNA sequencer.

EXAMPLE 21 Identification of Viral Strains Using the CLEAVASE Reaction

The above examples demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction could be used to detect single base changes in fragments of varying size from the human β-globin and tyrosinase genes. These examples showed the utility of the CLEAVASE reaction for the detection and characterization of mutations in the human population. The ability of the CLEAVASE reaction to detect sequence variations characteristic of different strains of a virus was next examined.

The simian immunodeficiency virus (SIV) infection of monkeys is a widely used animal model for the transmission of human immunodeficiency virus type-1 (HIV) in humans. Biological isolates of SIV contain multiple virus strains. When a monkey is infected with a biological isolate of SIV, unique subsets of the virus stock are recovered from the infected animals (specific strains are also able to infect tissue culture cells). Different genotypes of the virus are isolated from infected animals depending on the route of infection (Trivedi, P. et al. Journal of Virology 68:7649 (1994)). The SIV long terminal repeat (LTR) contains sequences which vary between the different viral strains and can be used as a marker for the identification of the viral genotype.

In order to develop a rapid method for the identification of viral strain(s) in a sample (e.g., a clinical isolate), the CLEAVASE reaction was used to characterized SIV genotypes isolated after infection of cultured cells in vitro or after infection of rhesus monkeys by either intravenous or intrarectal inoculation with uncloned biological SIV stocks. Six clones generated from viral DNA isolated following in vitro infection of the CEMx174 cell line (L.CEM/251/12 clone), after intravenous inoculation of monkeys (L100.8-1 clone), after intrarectal low-dose inoculation of monkeys (L46.16-10 and L46.16-12 clones) and after intrarectal high-dose inoculation of monkeys (L19.16-3 and L36.8-3 clones) were obtained from C. David Pauza (Wisconsin Primate Research Center, Madison, Wis.). These clones were generated as described by Trivedi, P. et al. Journal of Virology 68:7649 (1994). These plasmid clones contained viral LTR sequences and were utilized to generate double-stranded DNA (ds DNA) substrates for the cleavage reaction.

a) Preparation of the Substrate DNA

The six SIV plasmids were utilized as templates in PCRs in order to generate dsDNA substrates for the cleavage reaction. The primer pair utilized spans the U3-R boundary in the SIV LTR and amplifies an approximately 350 bp fragment. This portion of the SIV LTR contains recognition sequences for transcription factors (including Sp1 and NF-κB) as well as the TATA box for transcription initiation and is polymorphic in different viral strains (Trivedi, P. et al., supra).

The primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NOS:74 and 75 was used to amplify the SIV LTR clones in the PCR. SEQ ID NO:74 primes synthesis of the (+) strand of the SIV LTR and comprises 5′-GGCTGACAAGAAGGAAACTC-3′. SEQ ID NO:75 primes synthesis of the (−) strand of the SIV LTR and comprises 5′-CCAGGCGGCGGCTAGGAGAGATGGG-3′. To visualize the cleavage pattern generated by cleavage of the (+) strand of the LTR, the PCR was performed using the primer consisting of SEQ ID NO: 74 containing a biotin label at 5′ end and unlabeled primer consisting of SEQ ID NO:75. To visualize the cleavage pattern generated by clevage of the (−) strand of the viral LTR, the PCR was performed using the primer pair consisting of SEQ ID NO:75 containing a biotin label at the 5′ end and unlabeled primer SEQ ID NO:74.

The PCR reactions were carried out as follows. Ten to twenty nanograms of plasmid DNA from each of the above 6 SIV LTR clones was used as the target DNA in separate 100 μl reactions containing 60 μM of each dNTP, 0.2 μM of each primer in a given primer pair, 10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 9.0 (at 25° C.), 2 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.1% TRITON X-100. Tubes containing the above mixture were overlaid with two drops of light mineral oil and the tubes were heated to 96° C. for 3 min and Taq DNA polymerase (Perkin-Elmer) was then added as 2.5 units of enzyme in 0.5 μl of 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 100 mM KCl, 0.1 mM EDTA, 1 mM DTT, 50% glycerol and 0.5% TWEEN 20 and 0.5% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were heated to 96° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 60° C. for 45 seconds, heated to 72° C. for 1 minute for 35 repetitions. Following the PCR, the reaction mixture was separated from the mineral oil and 5 μl of 5M NaCl, 4 μl of 10 mg/ml glycogen and 250 μl of 100% ethanol were added to the aqueous PCR samples. After incubation at −20° C. for 1 hour, the DNA was pelleted by centrifugation in a MARATHON MICRO A centrifuge (Fisher Scientific) at maximum speed for 5 minutes and resuspended in 40 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. The DNA was mixed with 0.5 volume of loading buffer (95% formamide, 5mM EDTA, 0.02% bromphenol blue, 0.02% xylene cyanol) and heated to 75° C. for 2 minutes. The products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylamide denaturing gel (19:1 cross-link) in a buffer containing 7M urea, 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the product bands were excised from the gel. The DNA was eluted from the gel slices by passive diffusion overnight into a solution containing 0.5 M NH4OAc, 0.1% SDS and 0.1 M EDTA. The DNA was then precipitated with ethanol in the presence of 4 μg of tRNA carrier. The DNA was pelleted and resuspended in 50 μl of 0.2 M NaCl, 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA. The DNA was precipitated with ethanol and resuspended in 50 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA. The final DNA concentration was estimated to be 40 fmole/μl for each double-stranded SIV LTR PCR product.

b) DNA Sequence Analysis of the SIV LTR PCR Products

The DNA sequence of the six PCR fragments generated in section a) above was determined using the FMOL DNA Sequencing System (Promega) according to the manufacturer's instructions. For each set of the sequencing reactions 0.2 pmoles of the PCR product and 2 pmoles of one of the two 5′-biotinylated PCR primers SEQ ID NOS:74 and 75 was used (i.e., both strands of the PCR fragments were sequenced). Following the sequencing reactions, the sequencing products were resolved by electrophoresis. After electrophoresis, the DNA bands were visualized following transfer to a nylon membrane as described in Example 19 with the following modification. A solution containing 0.2% Blocking reagent (Boehringer-Mannheim) and 0.2% SDS in TBS buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH7.4; 68 mM NaCl) was used in place of the 1× SEQUENASE IMAGES Blocking Buffer (USB).

The sequence of the 351 bp fragment derived from the L100.8-1 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:76. The sequence of the 340 bp fragment from the L46.16-10 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:77. The sequence of the 340 bp fragment derived from the L46.16-12 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:78. The sequence of the 351 bp fragment from the L19.16-3 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:79. The sequence of the 351 bp fragment derived from the LCEM/251/12 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:80. The sequence of the 351 bp fragment derived from the L36.8-3 LTR clone is listed in SEQ ID NO:81.

Analysis of sequenced LTR fragments shows that they have multiple substitutions and a deletion relative to the L100.8-1 LTR sequence (SEQ ID NO:76); the L100.8-1 LTR sequence was chosen as a reference to permit comparisons between the six LTR clones. For the ease of discussion, the first or 5′-terminal nucleotide of the (+) strand of L100.8-1 LTR sequence (SEQ ID NO:76) is defined as number 1 and the last or 3′-terminal nucleotide of this sequence is defined as number 351.

FIG. 49 displays the nucleotide sequence of the six LTR clones. The reference clone, L.100.8-1 (SEQ ID NO:76), is shown on the top line. Sequences appearing in bold type represent sequence changes relative to the sequence of clone L.100.8-1 (SEQ ID NO:76). The sequences outlined by the brackets in FIG. 49 represent palindromic sequences which can form a very stable hairpin structure having a stem of 14 base pairs (12/14 bases in the stem are complementary) and a loop of 7 nucleotides in the reference clone L.100.8-1 (SEQ ID NO:76). This hairpin structure is present in all six LTR clones although the sequence of the stem and loop structures varies between the clones.

In comparison with L100.8-1 sequence (SEQ ID NO:76), the L46.16-10 sequence (SEQ ID NO:77) has seven substitutions and one 11 nucleotide deletion corresponding to nucleotides 65-75 of SEQ ID NO:76. The substitutions are: C to T in position 28 (C28T), C57T, G90A, C97T, G238A, G242A and G313A. The L46.16-12 sequence (SEQ ID NO:78) has seven substitutions and one 11 nucleotide deletion corresponding to nucleotides 65-75 of SEQ ID NO:76. The substitutions are: C28T, C57T, G90A, C97T, A103G, G242A and G313A. L19.16-3 sequence (SEQ ID NO:79) has two substitutions: A94C and A317T. LCEM/251/12 sequence (SEQ ID NO:80) has seven substitutions: G26A, G72A, C97T, G258A, A281C, G313A and C316T. L36.8-3 sequence (SEQ ID NO:81) has six substitutions: G60A, G172A, G207A, G221A, T256C and C316T.

c) Cleavage Reaction Conditions and CFLP Analysis of the (−) Strand of the SIV LTR

Double-stranded substrates corresponding to the SIV LTR sequences listed in SEQ ID NOS:76-81 were labelled on the (−) strand using the PCR and the primer pair corresponding to SEQ ID NO: 74 and 75. The primer of SEQ ID NO:75 (the (−) strand primer) contained a biotin label at the 5′ end. The PCR was performed and the reaction products were isolated as described in section a).

The cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Reaction tubes were assembled with approximately 60 fmoles of the ds DNA substrates in 6 μl of water. The following reagents were added to the DNA: 2 μl of 5× CFLP buffer (pH 7.2) containing 150 mM KCl (to yield a final concentration of 30 mM KCl) and 1 μl of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme (25 ng in 1× dilution buffer). A reaction tube containing the above components with the exception that 1 μl of H₂O was added in place of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme was prepared and run as the uncut or no enzyme control. The tubes were brought to 95° C. for 10 seconds in a PTC-100 Programmable Thermal Controller (MJ Research, Inc.) to denature the DNA. Following the denaturation step, the tubes were immediately cooled to 40° C. The cleavage reaction was immediately started by the addition of 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂ (to achieve a final concentration of 0.2 mM). The tubes were incubated at 40° C. for 5 minutes. The reactions were terminated by adding 6 μl of stop buffer. The samples were heated to 85° C. for 30 sec and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 12% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 0.2% Blocking reagent (Boehringer Mannheim); 0.2% SDS in 100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4; 68 mM NaCl, treated with 1× SAAP buffer and reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix) and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10a. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 50.

FIG. 50 shows the cleavage patterns which correspond to the cleavage of the (−) strand of the double-stranded LTR substrates. In FIG. 50, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers (prepared as described in Example 10). Lanes 1-6 contain the cleavage products generated by cleavage of the L100.8-1, L46.16-10, L46.16-12, L19.16-3, LCEM/251/12 and L36.8-3 LTR PCR fragments, respectively. Lanes 7-12 contain the uncut controls of each of the 6 LTR substrates in the same order as that described for Lanes 1-6.

The results shown in FIG. 50 show that the cleavage or CFLP pattern for each LTR substrate contains multiple bands which range in size from approximately 350 nucleotides (the uncut substrate) to less than 24 nucleotides. The bands located below about 100 nucleotides in length show differences between the six clones which reflect nucleotide changes characteristic of the different SIV LTR isolates. Examination of the CFLP patterns revealed that the reaction detected five unique cleavage patterns among the six SIV LTR isolates. From the DNA sequence data, it was known that all six LTR clones were unique. However, the CFLP pattern appeared to be identical for the clones shown in lanes 2 and 3.

The CFLP patterns generated by cleavage of the (−) strand from all six substrates contain a strong band which corresponds to a fragment of approximately 100 nucleotides in length. This band corresponds to cleavage of all six LTR substrates at the long palindromic sequence located 97 nucleotides from the 5′ end of the (−) strand (see the bracketed region in FIG. 49). This palindromic sequence forms a very stable hairpin structure in single-stranded DNA and provides an optimal substrate for the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Cleavage of this hairpin structure is predicted to generate a fragment of approximately 100 nucleotides.

The LTR substrates, L46.16-10 (SEQ ID NO:77) and L46.16-12 (SEQ ID NO:78), shown in lanes 2 and 3 were generated from the same animal using the same route of infection (Trivedi, P. et al., supra). These substrates have identical sequences in the region corresponding to the detectable cleavage sites (i.e., below 100 nucleotides) with the exception of a single base; the L46.16-10 clone (SEQ ID NO:77) contains a G to A change at position 239 (G239A) relative to the reference sequence listed in SEQ ID NO:76. Examination of the DNA sequence of these two clones reveals that this substitution is located in the loop region of a strong hairpin structure (see the palindromic region bracketed in FIG. 49). Because the single base difference between these two sequences is located in the loop region of the hairpin structure, it may not change DNA secondary structure of the two substrates sufficiently to generate different CFLP patterns under the conditions utilized here. It may be possible to detect this single base difference between these two clones by varying the reaction conditions in a way that destablizes the strong hairpin structure.

The results shown in FIG. 50 demonstrate that the CFLP reaction can be used to detect the majority (⅚ or 83%) of the sequence variations present in the six SIV LTR clones studied. In addition, FIG. 50 demonstrates that the CFLP reaction is a sensitive means for probing the secondary structure of single strands of nucleic acids.

d) Cleavage Reaction Conditions and CFLP Analysis of the (+) Strand of the SIV LTR

Double-stranded substrates corresponding to the SIV LTR sequences listed in SEQ ID NOS:76-81 were labelled on the (+) strand using the PCR and the primer pair corresponding to SEQ ID NO: 74 and 75. The primer of SEQ ID NO:74 (the (+) strand primer) contained a biotin label at the 5′ end. The PCR was performed and the reaction products were isolated as described in section a). The cleavage reactions, electrophoresis and DNA visualization were performed as described above in section c). The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 51.

FIG. 51 shows the resulting pattern corresponding to the cleavage products of the (+) strand of six SIV LTR fragments. The lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers (prepared as described in Example 10). Lanes 1-6 contain the cleavage products generated by cleavage of the L100.8-1, L46.16-10, L46.16-12, L19.16-3, LCEM/251/12 and L36.8-3 LTR PCR fragments, respectively. Lanes 7-12 contain the uncut controls of each of the 6 LTR substrates in the same order as that described for Lanes 1-6.

As was shown for cleavage of the (−) strand of the LTR clones, the CFLP pattern for each (+) strand of the SIV LTR substrates contains unique features that characterize the majority of specific nucleotide substitutions. For example, deletion of 11 nucleotides can be easily detected for L46.16-10 (SEQ ID NO:77) and L46.16-12 (SEQ ID NO:78) (FIG. 51, lanes 2 and 3). This deletion removes one of the three Sp1 binding sites and is a change characteristic of the genotype of SIV which predominates in animals which are infected using low-doses of virus stock via intrarectal inoculation (Trivedi, P. et al., supra). The CFLP pattern generated by cleavage of the (+) strand of the substrates derived from clones L46.16-10 and L46.16-12 again were identical under these reaction conditions.

The results shown above demonstrate that the CFLP reaction can be used as a means to rapidly identify different strains (i.e., genotypes) of virus. The ability to rapidly identify the particular strain of virus or other pathogenic organism in a sample is of clinical importance. The above results show that the CFLP reaction can be used to provide a fast method of strain or species identification.

EXAMPLE 22 The Effects of Alterations in Salt Conditions in Cleavage Reactions Using a Single-Stranded DNA Substrate

In Example 13 it was shown that the CLEAVASE reaction is insensitive to large changes in reactions conditions when a single-stranded DNA is employed as the substrate. Example 13 showed that the cleavage reaction can be performed using a range of salt concentrations (0 to 50 mM KCl) in conjunction with single-stranded substrates. In this example, the effect of substituting other salts in place of KCl was examined in cleavage reactions using single-stranded DNA substrates.

a) Effect of Substituting NaCl For KCl in Cleavage Reactions Using a Single-Stranded Template

To determine the effect of substituting NaCl in place of KCl upon the cleavage pattern created by 5′ nuclease activity on a single-stranded DNA substrate, the following experiment was performed. A single template was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme (50 ng) in a buffer containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂ and various amounts of NaCl.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 47; prepared as described in example 10b) were placed in a 500 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (Perkin Elmer, Norwalk, Conn.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM MnCl₂) in a volume of 15 μl. NaCl was added to yield a final concentration of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75 or 100 mM. The final reaction volume was 20 μl.

A tube containing 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂ and 100 fmoles substrate DNA was prepared and served as the no salt, no enzyme control (sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.).

The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 20 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 65° C. The cleavage reaction was started immediately by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 without MnCl₂.

After 5 minutes at 65° C., reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1× I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) as described in Example 10a with the exception that 0.01 ml CDPSTAR was added per cm² of membrane. The membrane was exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 10a. The results are shown in FIG. 52.

In FIG. 52, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers as described in example 10a. Lane 1 contains the no salt, no enzyme control and shows the mobility of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 9 contain reaction products incubated in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme in a buffer containing 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 75 or 100 mM NaCl, respectively.

The results shown in FIG. 52 demonstrate that the substitution of NaCl in place of KCl has little or no effect upon the cleavage pattern generated using the 157 nucleotide tyrosinase DNA substrate (SEQ ID NO:47). Essentially the same dependence of the cleavage pattern on salt concentration was observed using this single-stranded DNA substrate when either KCl (See example 13b, FIG. 35) or NaCl (FIG. 52) was employed in the cleavage reaction.

b) Effect of Substituting (NH₄)₂SO₄ for KCl in Cleavage Reactions Using a Single-Stranded Template

In an approach similar to that described in above in section a), the effect of substituting (NH₄)₂SO₄ in place of KCl upon the cleavage pattern created by 5′ nuclease activity on a single-stranded DNA substrate was tested. Cleavage reactions were set up exactly as described in section a) with the exception that variable amounts of (NH₄)₂SO₄ were used in place of the NaCl.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 47; prepared as described in example 10a) were placed in 500 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (Perkin Elmer, Norwalk, Conn.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM) in a volume of 15 μl. (NH₄)₂SO₄ was added to yield a final concentration of 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75 or 100 mM. The final reaction volume was 20 μl.

A tube containing 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2, 1 mM MnCl₂ and 100 fmoles substrate DNA was prepared and served as the no salt, no enzyme control (sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.).

The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 20 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 65° C. The cleavage reaction was started immediately by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/ml in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 without MnCl₂.

After 5 minutes at 65° C., reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the DNA was transferred to a membrane and the detected as described in section a) above. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 53.

In FIG. 53, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers as described in example 10a. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the mobility of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 9 contain reaction products incubated in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme in a buffer containing 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 75 or 100 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄, respectively.

The results shown in FIG. 53 demonstrate that the cleavage reaction is severely inhibited by the presence of (NH₄)₂SO₄. The reaction is completely inhibited by as little as 20 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄; the extent of the cleavage reaction in 10 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄ is comparable to that obtained in 50 mM KCl or NaCl and is significantly reduced relative that obtained at 0 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄. The pattern of cleavage obtained at 10 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄, however, is identical to that observed when the 157 nucleotide template (SEQ ID NO:47) incubated in the absence of (NH₄)₂SO₄ or in KCl or NaCl. This indicates that the choice of salt included in the CLEAVASE reaction has no effect on the nature of the sites recognized as substrates by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme (i.e., the inhibitory effect seen is due the effect of (NH₄)₂SO₄ upon enzyme activity not upon the formation of the cleavage structures).

c) Effect of Increasing KCl Concentration on the Cleavage of Single-Stranded Substrates

The effect of increasing the concentration of KCl in cleavage reactions using a single-stranded DNA substrate was examined by performing the cleavage reaction in concentrations of KCl which varied from 0 to 100 mM. The cleavage reactions were performed as described in section a) with the exception that KCl was added to yield final concentrations of 0, 25, 50, 75 or 100 mM and 200 fmoles of the substrate were used in the reaction; additionally the substrate DNA was denatured by incubation at 95° C. for 5 seconds.

Following the cleavage reaction, the samples were electrophoresed, transferred to a membrane and detected as described in section a) above. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 54.

In FIG. 54, the lanes marked “M” contains molecular weight markers as described in Example 10a. Lane 1 is the no enzyme control; Lanes 2-7 contain reactions carried out in the presence of 0, 25, 50, 75, 100 or 100 mM KCl (the 100 mM sample was repeated twice), respectively.

The results shown in FIG. 54 demonstrate that the extent of cleavage in the cleavage reaction decreased as a function of increasing KCl concentration (although residual cleavage was detectable at 100 mM KCl). Furthermore, the pattern of fragments generated by cleavage of single-stranded substrates with CLEAVASE BN is unaffected by the concentration of KCl present in the reactions.

d) Effect of High KCl Concentrations on Cleavage Reactions Using a Single-Stranded Substrate

The ability of the CLEAVASE reaction to be carried out at relatively high concentrations of KCl was tested by performing the cleavage reaction in the presence of variable concentrations of KCl in excess of 100 mM. The reactions were performed using the 157 nucleotide fragment from exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) as described above in section c), with the exception that KCl was added to yield a final concentration of 0, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mM.

Following the cleavage reaction, the samples were electrophoresed, transferred to a membrane and detected as described in section a) above. The results (data not shown) indicated that the cleavage reaction was severely inhibited by KCl concentrations in excess of 100 mM. Some residual cleavage did, however, persist at these elevated salt concentrations, up to and including 300 mM KCl.

e) Effect of KCl Concentration on the Stability of the Cleavage Pattern During Extended Incubation Periods

The results presented above demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction is inhibited by elevated concentrations (i.e., above 50 mM) of either KCl or NaCl. To determine whether this inhibition would effectively result in the stabilization of the cleavage pattern after extended reaction times (i.e., due to inhibition of enzyme activity), reactions were examined at varying extended time points at both 0 and 50 mM KCl.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 47; prepared as described in example 10a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2, 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM) and KCl to yield a final concentration of 0 or 50 mM KCl. The final reaction volume was 20 μl.

Control reactions which lacked enzyme were set up in parallel for each time point examined; these no enzyme controls were prepared as described above with the exception that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.

The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 20 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 65° C. The cleavage reaction was started immediately by the addition of 5 Al of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/ml in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 without MnCl₂. Twenty microliters of Chill Out 14™ (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) were added to each tube after the addition of the enzyme. The reactions were allowed to proceed at 65° C. for 5 min, 30 min, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours and 17 hours.

At the desired time point, the reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the DNA was transferred to a membrane and the detected as described in section a) above. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 55.

In FIG. 55, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers as described in example 10a. Lanes 1-10 contain products from reactions carried out in the absence of KCl; lanes 11-20 contain products from reactions carried out in the presence of 50 mM KCl. Lanes 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 contain no enzyme controls incubated for 5 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours and 17 hours, respectively. Lanes 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 contain the reaction products from reactions incubated at 65° C. for 5 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours and 17 hours, respectively. Lanes 11, 13, 15, 17, and 19 contain no enzyme controls incubated in 50 mM KCl for 5 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours and 17 hours, respectively. Lanes 12, 14, 16, 18 and 20 contain reaction products from CFLP reactions incubated in 50 mM KCl at 65° C. for 5 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours and 17 hours, respectively.

The results indicated that cleavage was retarded in the presence of 50 mM KCl which resulted in a significant stabilization of the cleavage pattern (i.e., the cleavage pattern remained the same over time because the rate of cleavage was dramatically slowed and thus the larger cleavage fragments are not further cleaved to produce smaller fragments). Note that at the extended incubation times, the reactions carried out in the absence of KCl were significantly overdigested; after 1 hour at 65° C., essentially no large fragments remain, and there is substantial accumulation of small cleavage products. In contrast, the reactions carried out at 50 mM KCl were essentially static between 30 minutes and 4 hours; overdigestion was only apparent at the longest time point and was not as extensive as that observed in the absence of KCl.

EXAMPLE 23 Comparison of the Patterns of Cleavage Generated by Cleavage-of-Single-Stranded and Double-Stranded DNA Substrates

In CLEAVASE BN-mediated primer-independent cleavage of double-stranded DNA substrates, the two strands of DNA are separated in a denaturation step prior to the addition of enzyme. Therefore, the patterns generated by cleaving double-stranded templates should be identical to those generated by cleaving single-stranded template. This assumption was verified by the experiment described below.

The single-stranded substrate comprising the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) was prepared as described in example 10b with the following modification. After gel purification and precipitation in the presence of glycogen carrier, the PCR products were resuspended in TE (10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA) and then reprecipitated with 2 M NH₄OAc and 2.5 volumes of ethanol. The DNA was then resuspended in 400 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

Approximately 50 or 100 fmoles of the single-stranded 157 nucleotide fragment (SEQ ID NO:47) were placed in a 200 μl centrifuge tube (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (final concentration was 1 mM MnCl₂) in a volume of 15 μl. The final reaction volume was 20 μl. A 20 μl no salt, no enzyme control was set up in parallel; this reaction contained sterile distilled water in place of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.

The reaction tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 65° C. The cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 1×CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 without MnCl₂. After 5 minutes at 65°0 C., reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

A double stranded form of the 157 nucleotide substrate was cleaved with CLEAVASE BN in the same experiment. This double-stranded substrate (SEQ ID NO:40) was generated as described in Example 10b with the following modifications. After gel purification and precipitation in the presence of glycogen carrier, the PCR products were resuspended in TE (10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 1 mM EDTA) and then reprecipitated with 2 M NH₄OAc and 2.5 volumes of ethanol. The DNA was then resuspended in 400 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA.

Approximately 33 or 66 fmoles of the double-stranded 157 bp fragment (SEQ ID NO:40) were placed in a 200 μl thin walled microcentrifuge tube (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.). Sterile distilled water was added to a volume of 15 μl.

The reaction tubes were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 65° C. The cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mixture comprising 4×CFLP buffer, pH 8.2, 0.8 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1×CFLP buffer and 0.2 mM MnCl₂) and 0.5 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)). A 20 μl no salt, no enzyme double-stranded substrate control was set up in parallel; this reaction contained sterile distilled water in place of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme.

After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formarnide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). The samples were then heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and the reaction products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1× I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 56.

In FIG. 56, lanes 1-3 contain reaction products derived from reactions containing the single-stranded substrate; lanes 4-7 contain reaction products derived from reactions containing the double-stranded substrate. Lanes land 3 contain 7.0 μl of the reaction products derived from the cleavage reactions which contained either 50 or 100 fmoles of the single-stranded substrate, respectively. Lane 2 contains 7.0 μl of the uncut single-stranded substrate control reaction. Lanes 4 and 6 contain 7.0 μl of the uncut double-stranded control reactions which contained either 33 or 66 fmoles of the substrate, respectively. Lanes 5 and 7 contain 7.0 μl of the reaction products derived from cleavage reactions which contained either 33 or 66 fmoles of the double-stranded substrate, respectively. Note that the uncut double-stranded control shows a doublet underneath the prominent band containing the 157 bp substrate; it is believed that this doublet represents alternative structures which migrate with an altered mobility rather than degradation products. This doublet does not appear in experiments performed using double-stranded DNA purified from a denaturing gel (See Example 24).

Comparison of the cleavage patterns generated by cleavage of either the single-stranded or double-stranded substrate shows that identical patterns are generated.

EXAMPLE 24 The CLEAVASE Reaction Using a Double Stranded DNA Template is Sensitive to Large Changes in Reaction Conditions

The results presented in Example 13 demonstrated that the CLEAVASE reaction is relatively insensitive to significant changes in numerous reaction conditions including, the concentration of MnCl₂ and KCl, temperature, the incubation period, the amount of CLEAVASE BN enzyme added and DNA preparation. The results shown in Example 13 demonstrated that when the CLEAVASE reaction is performed using a single-stranded substrate, the reaction is remarkably robust to large changes in conditions. The experiments shown below show that the cleavage of double-stranded substrates is restricted to a somewhat narrower range of reaction conditions.

a) Generation of the Double-Stranded 157 bp Fragment of Exon 4 of the Tyrosinase Gene

The following experiments examine the effect of changes in reaction conditions when double-stranded DNA templates are used in the CLEAVASE reaction. The double-stranded substrate utilized was the 157 bp fragment of the wild type tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40). This 157 bp fragment was generated using symmetric PCR as described in Example 10b. Briefly, approximately 75 fmoles of double-stranded substrate DNA were incubated with 50 pmoles of the primer 5′ biotin-GCCTTATTTTACTTTAAAAAT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:45), 50 pmoles of the primer 5′ fluorescein-TAAAGTTTTGTGTTATCTCA-3′ (SEQ ID NO:46), 50 mM of each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP40). Tubes containing 95 μl of the above mixture were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and cooled to 70° C. Five microliters of enzyme mix containing 1.25 units of Taq DNA polymerase in 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 were then added. Each tube was overlaid with 50 μl of Chill Out 14™ (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.).

The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 50° C. for 45 seconds, heated to 72° C. for 75 seconds for 30 repetitions with a 5 minute incubation at 72° C. after the last repetition. The reactions were then ethanol precipitated to reduce the volume to be gel purified. NaCl was added to a final concentration of 400 mM and glycogen (in distilled water) was added to a final concentration of 200 μg/ml. Two and one-half volumes of 100% ethanol were added to each tube, and the tubes were chilled to −70° C. for two and one-half hours. The DNA was pelleted and resuspended in one-fifth the original volume of sterile distilled water.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. An equal volume of stop buffer (95% formamide, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol) was added to each tube and the tubes were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes. The products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% denaturing polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link) and 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3 and 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the 157 bp fragment was excised from the gel. The DNA was eluted from the gel slice by passive diffusion as described in Example 10a with the exception that diffusion was allowed to occur over two days at room temperature. The DNA was then precipitated with ethanol in the presence of 200 mM NaCl and no added carrier molecules. The DNA was pelleted and resuspended in 150 μl TE (10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA).

b) Effect of KCl Concentration on the Double-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

To determine the effect of salt concentration upon the cleavage reaction when a double-stranded substrate was utilized, a single substrate was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN (25 ng) in a buffer containing 10 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.2 mM MnCl₂ and varying concentrations of KCl from 0 to 100 mM.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 bp fragment derived from the exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40; prepared as described above in section a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in sterile distilled water in a volume of 6.25 μl (the final reaction volume was 10 μl). The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 45° C. The cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)), and KCl to yield a final concentration of 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50 or 100 mM. The final reaction volume was 10 μl. The enzyme solution was brought to room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. No enzyme (i.e., uncut) controls were set up in parallel at either 0 or 100 mM KCl, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN.

After 5 minutes at 45° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 57.

In FIG. 57, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the uncut control in 0 mM KCl and shows the mobility of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 11 contain reaction products generated by incubation of the substrate in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme in a buffer containing 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 100 mM KCl, respectively. Lane 12 contains the uncut control incubated in a buffer containing 100 mM KCl.

The results shown in FIG. 57 demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction S carried out on double-stranded DNA template was sensitive to variations in salt concentration. Essentially no cleavage was detected in reactions containing greater than 30 mM KCl. The same cleavage pattern was obtained when the 157 bp tyrosinase DNA substrate (SEQ ID NO:40) was incubated with the CLEAVASE BN enzyme regardless of whether the concentration of KCl was varied from 0 to 30 mM.

c) Effect of NaCl on the Double-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

The effect of substituting NaCl in place of KCl upon the cleavage pattern created by 5′ nuclease activity on a double-stranded DNA substrate was examined. Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 bp fragment derived from exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 40; prepared as described in Example 24a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in sterile distilled water in a volume of 6.25 μl and were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds. The tubes were cooled to 45° C. The cleavage reaction was started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)), and NaCl to yield a final concentration of 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50 or 100 mM. The final reaction volume was 10 μl. No enzyme (i.e., uncut) controls were set up in parallel at either 0 or 100 mM NaCl, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN.

The reactions were incubated at 45° C. for 5 minutes and were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formarnide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a with the exception that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 58.

In FIG. 58 , the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control incubated in a buffer containing 0 mM NaCl and shows the mobility of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2 through 11 contain reaction products generated by cleavage of the 157 bp substrate (SEQ ID NO:40) with the CLEAVASE BN enzyme in a buffer containing 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 100 mM NaCl, respectively. Lane 12 contains the no enzyme control incubated in a buffer containing 100 mM NaCl.

The results shown in FIG. 58 demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction carried out on a double-stranded DNA template was sensitive to variations in NaCl concentration. Essentially no cleavage was detected above 20 mM NaCl. The same cleavage pattern was obtained when the 157 bp tyrosinase DNA template (SEQ ID NO:40) was incubated with the CLEAVASE BN enzyme regardless of whether the NaCl concentration was varied from 0 to 20 mM.

d) Effect of Substituting (NH₄)₂SO₄ for KCl in Cleavage of Double-Stranded Template

In an approach similar to that described in Example 22b, the ability of (NH₄)₂SO₄ to substitute for KCl in the cleavage reaction when double-stranded substrates were utilized was tested. Cleavage reactions were set up exactly as described in Examples 24b and c with the exception that variable amounts of (NH₄)₂SO4 were substituted for the KCl or NaCl.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 bp fragment derived exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 40; prepared as described above in section a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in sterile distilled water in a volume of 6.25 μl and were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds. The tubes were cooled to 45° C.

Cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7×CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)), and (NH₄)₂SO4 to yield a final concentration of 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50 or 100 mM. The final reaction volume was 10 μl. No enzyme (i.e., uncut) controls were set up in parallel at either 0 or 100 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN.

The reactions were incubated at 45° C. for 5 minutes and were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 59.

In FIG. 59, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control incubated in a buffer containing 0 mM (NH₄)₂SO4and shows the migration of the uncleaved substrate DNA. Lanes 2 through 11 contain reaction products generated by incubation of the substrate in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme in a buffer containing 0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 100 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄, respectively. Lane 12 contains the no enzyme control incubated in a buffer containing 100 mM (H4)₂SO₄.

The results shown in FIG. 59 demonstrate that the CLEAVASE reaction was severely inhibited by the presence of (NH₄)₂SO₄. The reaction was completely inhibited by as little as 15 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄; the extent of the cleavage reaction in 5 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄ was comparable to that obtained in 20 mM KCl and was significantly reduced relative to that obtained in 0 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄. The pattern of cleavage obtained using 5 mM (NH₄)₂SO₄, however, was identical to that observed when the 157 bp substrate was incubated in the absence of (NH₄)₂SO4 or in KCl or NaCl, indicating that the choice of salt included in the CLEAVASE reaction has no effect on the nature of the sites recognized by the enzyme.

e) Time Course of the Double-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

To determine how quickly the double-stranded cleavage reaction is completed, a single substrate was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of CLEAVASE BN enzyme for various lengths of time. Approximately 100 fmoles of the double-stranded 157 bp fragment of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 40; prepared as described above in Example 24a) were placed in sterile distilled water in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in a volume of 6.25 μl. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds, as described in section b), and cooled to 45° C.

Cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/Al in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)). The final reaction volume was 10 μl. No enzyme (i.e., uncut) controls were set up in parallel and stopped after either 5 minutes or 120 minutes, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN enzyme.

The cleavage reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol) at the following times: 5 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 or 120 minutes. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a with the exception that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 60.

In FIG. 60, lane 1 contains the no enzyme control after a 5 minute incubation at 45° C. and shows the mobility of the uncleaved template DNA. Lanes 2-10 contain cleavage fragments derived from reactions incubated in the presence of CLEAVASE BN for 5 sec, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 (i hr), or 120 minutes (2 hr), respectively. Lane 11 contains the no enzyme control after a 120 minute incubation at 45° C.

FIG. 60 shows that the cleavage of a double-stranded DNA template mediated by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme was rapid. A full cleavage pattern was apparent and essentially complete within one minute. Unlike the example of cleavage of a single-stranded DNA template (Example 13c), very little cleavage is detectable after 5 seconds. This reaction contained one-tenth the amount of enzyme used in the reaction described in Example 13c. In addition, whereas incubation of single-stranded cleavage reactions for extended periods generated a pattern of increasingly truncated fragments (Example 22e), extended incubation of the double-stranded cleavage reaction resulted in a complete loss of signal (FIG. 60, lane 10); this result is probably due to nibbling by the enzyme of the 5′ biotin moiety from the reannealed strands. It is important to note that these results show that the same pattern of cleavage was produced for cleavage of double-stranded DNA, as for single-stranded, whether the reaction is run for 1 or 30 minutes. That is, the full representation of the cleavage products (i.e., bands) is seen over a 30-fold difference in time of incubation; thus the double-stranded CFLP reaction need not be strictly controlled in terms of incubation time.

The results shown in FIG. 61 contain short time courses of cleavage reactions performed at a variety of enzyme concentrations. Approximately 100 fmoles of the double-stranded 157 bp fragment of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40) were placed in sterile distilled water in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in a volume of 6.25 μl. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds, as described in Example 24b, and cooled to 45° C. Cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (at either 50, 100, 200, or 500 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA) to yield a final amount of enzyme of 25, 50, 100, or 250 ng). The final reaction volume was 10 μl. A no enzyme control was set up in parallel, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN enzyme, and stopped after 1 minute at 45° C.

The cleavage reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol) after either 5 seconds or 1 minute. Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 61.

In FIG. 61, lane “M” contains molecular weight markers as described in Example 10a. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control. Lanes 2 and 3 each contain reaction products generated by incubation of the substrate in the presence of 25 ng of CLEAVASE BN; the reaction in lane 2 was stopped after 5 seconds, that in lane 3, after 1 minute. Lanes 4 and 5 contain reaction products generated by cleavage of the substrate in the presence of 50 ng of CLEAVASE BN; the reaction in lane 4 was stopped after 5 seconds, that in lane 5, after 1 minute. Lanes 6 and 7 contain reaction products generated by cleavage of the substrate in the presence of 100 ng of CLEAVASE BN enzyme; the reaction in lane 6 was stopped after 5 seconds, that in lane 7, after 1 minute. The reactions shown in lanes 8 and 9 each contain 250 ng of CLEAVASE BN; that in lane 8 was stopped after 5 seconds, that in lane 9, after 1 minute.

The results presented in FIG. 61 indicate that the rate of cleavage of double-stranded DNA increased with increasing enzyme concentration. Note that as the concentration of enzyme was increased, there was a corresponding reduction in the amount of uncut DNA that remained after 1 minute. As was demonstrated below, in FIG. 63, the concentration of enzyme included in the cleavage reaction had no effect on the cleavage pattern generated. Comparison of the 250 ng reaction (shown in FIG. 61, lanes 8 and 9) to the short time point digestion described in Example 13c, indicates that the amount of enzyme rather than the double-stranded or single-stranded nature of the substrate controls the extent of cleavage in the very early time points.

f) Temperature Titration of the Double-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

To determine the effect of temperature variation on the cleavage pattern, the 157 bp fragment of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40) was incubated in the presence of a fixed amount of CLEAVASE BN enzyme for 5 minutes at various temperatures. Approximately 100 fmoles of substrate DNA (prepared as described in Example 24a) were placed in sterile distilled water in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in a volume of 6.25 μl. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds and cooled to either 37, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 60, 75, or 80° C. Cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of an enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/Al in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)). The enzyme mix was kept on ice throughout the duration of the experiment, but individual aliquots of the enzyme mix were allowed to come to room temperature before being added to the reactions. A second reaction was run at 37° C. at the end of the experiment to control for any loss of enzyme activity that may have occurred during the course of the experiment. No enzyme controls were set up in parallel and incubated at either 37° C. or 80° C., with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN. The reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 62.

In FIG. 62, the lane marked “M” contains molecular weight markers, prepared as described in Example 10a. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control after a 5 minute incubation at 37° C. Lanes 2 and 3 contain reactions incubated at 37° C., run at the beginning and end of the experiment, respectively. Lanes 4-13 contain reactions incubated at 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, or 80° C. (there are two 80° C. samples; the first was not covered with CHILL OUT 14 (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.), the second was overlaid with 20 μl CHILL OUT 14 after the addition of the enzyme mix), respectively. Lane 14 contains a no enzyme control incubated at 80° C. for 5 minutes.

FIG. 62 shows that cleavage of double-stranded DNA substrates proceeded most effectively at lower temperatures. The distribution of signal and pattern of cleavage changed smoothly in response to the temperature of incubation over the range of 37° C. to 60° C. Some cleavage products were evident only upon incubation at higher temperatures, whereas others were far more predominant at lower temperatures. Presumably, certain structures that are substrates for the CLEAVASE BN enzyme at one end of the temperature range are not favored at the other. As expected, the production of cleavage fragments became progressively less abundant in the high end of the temperature range as the cleavage structures were melted out. Above 70° C., the cleavage products were restricted to small fragments, presumably due to extensive denaturation of the substrate. When longer DNAs (350 to 1000 nucleotides) are used, it has been found that useful patterns of cleavage are generated up to 75° C.

These results show that the cleavage reaction can be performed over a fairly wide range of temperatures using a double-stranded DNA substrate. As in the case of the single-stranded cleavage reaction, the ability to cleave double-stranded DNA over a range of temperatures is important. Strong secondary structures that may dominate the cleavage pattern are not likely to be destabilized by single-base changes and may therefore interfere with mutation detection. Elevated temperatures can then be used to bring these persistent structures to the brink of instability, so that the effects of small changes in sequence are maximized and revealed as alterations in the cleavage pattern. This also demonstrates that within the useful temperature range, small changes in the reaction temperature due to heating block drift or similar device variations will not cause radical changes in the cleavage pattern.

g) Titration of the CLEAVASE BN Enzyme in Double-Stranded Cleavage Reactions

The effect of varying the concentration of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme in the double-stranded cleavage reaction was examined. Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 bp fragment of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40; prepared as described in Example 24a) were placed in sterile distilled water in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in a total volume of 6.25 μl. These tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 45° C.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of 3.75 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl CLEAVASE BN (2, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA) such that 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 or 250 ng of enzyme was added to the reactions). No enzyme controls were set up in parallel, with the difference that 1× dilution buffer was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN. After 5 minutes at 45° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 63.

The lane marked “M” in FIG. 63 contains molecular weight markers. Lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and shows the migration of the uncut substrate. Lanes 2-8 contain cleavage products derived from reactions containing 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100 or 250 ng of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme, respectively.

These results show that the same cleavage pattern was obtained using the 157 bp tyrosinase DNA substrate (SEQ ID NO:40) regardless of whether the amount of enzyme used in the reaction varied over a 50-fold range. Thus, the double-stranded cleavage reaction is ideally suited for practice in clinical laboratories where reaction conditions are not as controlled as in research laboratories. Note, however, that there is a distinct optimum for cleavage at intermediate enzyme concentrations for a double-stranded template, in marked contrast to what was observed on single-stranded substrates (Example 13e). The progressive loss of signal in the double-stranded reactions at increasing concentrations of CLEAVASE BN is likely due to the nibbling of the 5′ biotin label off the end of the reannealed double-stranded template.

EXAMPLE 25 Determination of the pH Optimum for Single-Stranded and Double-Stranded Cleavage Reactions

In order to establish optimal pH conditions for the two types of primer-independent cleavage reactions (i.e., single-stranded and double-stranded cleavage reactions), the CLEAVASE reaction buffer was prepared at a range of different pHs.

a) Establishment of a pH Optimum for the Single-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

The effect of varying the pH of the CLEAVASE reaction (i.e., CFLP) buffer upon the cleavage of single-stranded substrates was examined. Several 10× buffer solutions were made with 0.5 M MOPS at pH 6.3, 7.2, 7.5, 7.8, 8.0 and 8.2 by titrating a 1 M solution of MOPS at pH 6.3 with 6 N NaOH. The volume was then adjusted to yield a 0.5 M solution at each pH.

Approximately 100 fmoles of a single-stranded substrate prepared from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47; prepared as described in Example 10a), were placed in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 15 μl of 1× CFLP buffer, at varying pH, and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM). The final reaction volume was 20 μl. The reaction mixes were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and rapidly cooled to 65° C. The reactions were started by the addition of 5 μl of diluted enzyme mix containing 1 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)) in 1× CFLP buffer (without MnCl₂), again at the appropriate pH. A 20 μl no salt, no enzyme control was set up in parallel and incubated at 65° C. for each of the indicated pHs, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation. Reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol) after 5 minutes.

Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1× I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The results are presented in FIG. 64.

In FIG. 64, panels A and B contain reactions which used single-stranded DNA substrates. In panel A, 5 pairs of reactions are presented. In each case, the first lane of the pair is the no enzyme control and the second is the single-stranded cleavage reaction. Lanes 1 and 2 depict reaction products obtained using a reaction buffer at pH 6.3; lanes 3 and 4, at pH 7.2; lanes 5 and 6, pH 7.8; lanes 7 and 8, pH 8.0; lanes 9 and 10, at pH 8.2. Panel B contains the results of a separate experiment comparing cleavage reactions performed using a reaction buffer at pH 7.5 (lanes 1 and 2, uncut and cut, respectively) and at pH 7.8 (lanes 3 and 4, uncut and cut, respectively).

The results shown in FIG. 64, panels A and B, indicate that the cleavage of the single-stranded DNA template was sensitive to relatively small changes in pH. There was a pH optimum for the reaction between pH 7.5 and 8.0. Because the pK_(a) of MOPS is 7.2, the pH closest to that value which supported cleavage, pH 7.5, was determined to be optimal for the single-stranded cleavage reaction.

b) Establishment of a pH Optimum for the Double-Stranded Cleavage Reaction

The effect of varying the pH of the CLEAVASE reaction (i.e., CFLP) buffer upon the cleavage of double-stranded substrates was examined. Several 10×buffer solutions were made with 0.5 M MOPS at pH 7.2, 7.5, 7.8, and 8.0, as described above in section a). Approximately 100 fmoles of the double-stranded 157 bp fragment of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40; prepared as described in Example 10) were placed in 200 μl thin walled centrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in a total volume of 6.25 μl. The tubes were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds and cooled to 45° C. The clevage reactions were started by the addition of 3.75 μl of diluted enzyme mix containing 2.7× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5 (to yield a final concentration of 1×), 0.53 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 0.2 mM MnCl₂), 0.5 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50 ng/μl in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)).

The cleavage reactions were incubated for 5 minutes and then were terminated by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10b. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, washed in 1× I-BLOCK Blocking Buffer, washed and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The resulting autoradiographs are shown in FIG. 65, panels A and B.

In FIG. 65, panel A, lanes 1 and 2 contain cleavage products from reactions run in a buffer at pH 8.2 (lane 1 contains the cleavage reaction; lane 2 is the uncut control). Lanes 3 and 4 contain cleavage products from reactions run in a buffer at pH 7.2 (lane 3 contains the cleavage reaction; lane 4 is the uncut control). In panel B, lanes 1 and 2 contain cleavage products from reactions run in a buffer at pH 7.5 (lane 1 is the uncut control; lane 2 contains the cleavage reaction). Lanes 3 and 4 contain cleavage products from reactions run in a buffer at pH 7.8 (lane 3 contains the uncut control; lane 4 contains the cleavage reaction).

The results in FIG. 65, panels A and B, demonstrate that the cleavage of double-stranded DNA was not sensitive to changes in pH over the range of buffer conditions tested. Because the cleavage of single-stranded DNA, however, was sensitive to changes in pH, the buffer conditions that were determined to be optimal for the single-stranded cleavage reaction were chosen for subsequent double-stranded cleavage experiments.

EXAMPLE 26 The Presence of Competitor DNA does not Alter the Cleavage Pattern

The effect of the presence of competitor (i.e., non-labelled substrate) DNA upon the cleavage reaction was examined. The cleavage reaction was run using the 157 nucleotide fragment from the sense strand of the human tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) and human genomic DNA. The results shown below demonstrate that the presence of non-substrate DNA has no effect on the CFLP pattern obtained in the cleavage reaction.

a) Preparation of the Substrate DNA and the Cleavage Reactions

The 157 nucleotide single-stranded wild type tyrosinase substrate (SEQ ID NO:47) containing a biotin label on the 5′ end was prepared as described in Example 11. Human genomic DNA (Promega) present at 235μg/ml in Tris-HCl, pH 8.0; 1 mM EDTA was ethanol precipitated and resuspended in Tris-HCl, pH 8.0; 0.1 mM EDTA to final concentration 400 μg/ml. This DNA was used as a competitor in standard CFLP single- stranded reactions (described in Example 11). Tyrosinase DNA substrate (SEQ ID NO:47) and human genomic DNA were mixed in H₂O in final volume of 6 μl. Samples were heated at 95° C. for 10 seconds to denature the DNA, cooled to the target temperature of 65° C., and mixture of2 μl 5× CFLP buffer, pH 7.5, 1 μl 10 mM MnCl₂ and 1 μl (25 ng) the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in dilution buffer was added. After 5 minutes at 65° C., 6 μl of stop buffer was added to terminate reaction and 5 μl of each sample was separated on a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel. Membrane transfer and DNA visualization were performed as described in Example 21.

b) The Presence of Genomic DNA does not Alter the CFLP Pattern

FIG. 66 shows the resulting pattern corresponding to the cleavage products of the sense strand of the wild type tyrosinase substrate (SEQ ID NO:47) in the presence of 0 μg/ml (lane 2), 20 μg/ml (lane 3), 40 μg/ml (lane 4), 80 μg/ml (lane 5), 120 μg/ml (lane 6) and 200 μg/ml (lane 7) unlabeled human genomic DNA. Lane 1 shows an uncut control in the absence of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN and lane marked “M” contains the molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10.

FIG. 66 shows that the presence of genomic DNA in the cleavage reaction did not change either the position or the relative intensity of the product bands produced. Increasing the amount of nonspecific DNA in the reaction did, however, decrease the efficiency of the cleavage reaction and reduced the overall intensity of the pattern. These results can be explained by the binding of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme to the nonspecific DNA which has the effect of decreasing the effective enzyme concentration in the reaction. This effect became significant when the concentration of genomic DNA in the reaction was equal to or greater than 120 μg/ml (FIG. 66, lanes 6 (120 μg/ml) and 7 (200 μg/ml)). Under these conditions, the genomic DNA was present at more than a 20,000-fold excess relative to the specific substrate DNA; nonetheless the CFLP pattern could still be recognized under these conditions. The observed stability of the CFLP pattern in the presence of genomic DNA ruled out the possibility that nonspecific DNA could significantly change the structure of the substrate DNA or alter the interaction of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme with the substrate.

EXAMPLE 27 The CFLP Reaction can be Practiced Using a Variety of Enzymes

The above Examples demonstrated the ability of CLEAVASE BN, a 5′ nuclease derived from Taq DNA polymerase, to generate a characteristic set of cleavage fragments from a nucleic acid substrate. The following experiments demonstrate that a number of other enzymes can be used to generate a set of cleavage products which are characteristic of a given nucleic acid. These enzymes are not limited to the class of enzymes characterized as 5′ nucleases.

a) Cleavage Patterns Generated by Other DNA Polymerases from the Genus Thermus

To determine whether 5′ nuclease activity associated with DNA polymerases (DNAPs) other than Taq DNAP could generate a distinct cleavage pattern from nucleic acid substrates, DNAPs from two species of Thermus were examined. The DNAP of Thermus flavus (“Tfl”, Kaledin et al., Biokhimiya 46:1576 (1981); obtained from Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.) and the DNAP of Thermus thermophilus (“Tth”, Carballeira et al., Biotechniques 9:276 (1990); Myers et al., Biochem. 30:7661 (1991); obtained from U.S. Biochemicals, Cleveland, Ohio) were examined for their ability to generate suitable cleavage patterns (i.e., patterns which can be used to characterize a given nucleic acid substrate).

The ability of these other enzymes to cleave nucleic acids in a structure-specific manner was tested using the single-stranded 157 nucleotide fragment of the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47) under conditions reported to be optimal for the synthesis of DNA by each enzyme.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO 47; prepared as described in example 10a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM) and KCl to yield a final concentration of either 0 or 50 mM. Final reaction volumes were 20 μl. Samples were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then cooled to 65° C. A 20 μl no salt, no enzyme control was set up in parallel, with the differences that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.

The cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing either 1.25 units or 5 units of the indicated enzyme (see below) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2. After 5 minutes, reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

Samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl (in the case of the samples digested with Tfl) or 5 μl (in the case of the samples digested with Tth) were electrophoresed through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in Example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1 × I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The results are presented in FIGS. 67 and 68.

In FIG. 67, lane 1 contains the no enzyme control and indicates the migration of the uncut DNA. Lanes 2-5 contain cleavage products derived from reactions incubated with Tfl DNAP. The reactions represented in lane 2 and 3 each contained 5 units of Tfl DNAP; the sample in lane 2 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 0 mM KCl, while the sample in lane 3 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 50 mM KCl. The reactions in lanes 4 and 5 each contained 1.25 units of Tfl DNAP; the sample in lane 4 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 0 mM KCl; that in lane 5 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 50 mM KCl.

In FIG. 68, lanes 1 and 2 each contain cleavage products derived from reactions incubated with 1.25 units of Tth DNAP. The sample in lane 1 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 0 mM KCl; that in lane 2 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 50 mM KCl. Lanes 3 and 4 contain cleavage products derived from reactions incubated with 5 units of Tth DNAP. The sample shown in lane 3 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 0 mM KCl; that in lane 4 was incubated in a reaction buffer containing 50 mM KCl.

FIGS. 67 and 68 demonstrates that both Tth DNAP and Tfl DNAP display structure specific endonuclease activity similar in nature to that seen in the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. A comparison of the results shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 showed that the Tth DNAP was more efficient at generating a cleavage pattern under the reaction conditions tested. Comparison of the cleavage patterns generated by Tth DNAP with those generated by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme the indicates that essentially the same structures are recognized by these two enzymes (compare FIG. 69, lane 2 (CLEAVASE BN) with FIG. 68 (Tth DNAP)).

b) Enzymes Characterized as 3′ Nucleases can be Used to Generate Distinct Clevage Patterns

To determine whether enzymes possessing 3′ nucleolytic activity could also generate a distinct cleavage pattern, enzymes other than DNAPs (which possess 5′ nuclease activity) were tested in the cleavage reaction. Exonuclease III from Escherichia coli (E. coli Exo III) was tested in a cleavage reaction using the 157 nucleotide fragment prepared from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gen (SEQ ID NO:47). As a comparison, a reaction containing this substrate (SEQ ID NO:47) and CLEAVASE BN was also prepared.

Approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment prepared from the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47; prepared as described in Example 10a) were placed in 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 and 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM) and KCl to yield a final concentration of either 0 or 50 mM in a volume of 15 μl. Final reaction volumes were 20 μl.

The samples were heated to 95° C. for 5 seconds and then rapidly cooled to 37° C. A 20 μl no salt, no enzyme control was set up in parallel, with the differences that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C.

A reaction tube containing 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment (SEQ ID NO:47) and 50 ng of CLEAVASE BN in a buffer containing 0 mM KCl was prepared and treated as described in Example 23 (i.e., denatured by incubation at 95° C. for 5 seconds followed by cooling to 65° C. and the addition of the enzyme and incubation at 65° C. for 5 minutes).

The cleavage reactions were started by the addition of 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing either 1.25 units or 200 units of Exo III (United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio) in 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 (without MnCl₂) were added to the 15 μl reactions, and the reactions were incubated for 5 minutes. After 5 minutes at 37° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 16 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 5 μl were electrophoresed through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA, as described in Example 10a.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1 × I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a, except that the distilled water washes were omitted. The results are presented in FIG. 69.

Lane 1 in FIG. 69 contains the no enzyme control and indicates the mobility of the uncut DNA. Lane 2 contains cleavage fragments generated by incubation of the substrate with CLEAVASE BN enzyme and provides a comparison of the patterns generated by the two different enzymes. Lanes 3-6 contain cleavage fragments generated by incubation of the substrate with Exo III. Lanes 3 and 4 each contain reaction products generated in reactions which contained 200 units of Exo III; the reaction in lane 3 was run in a buffer containing 0 mM KCl, that in lane 4 was run in a buffer containing 50 mM KCl. Lanes 5 and 6 each contain reaction products generated in reactions which contained 1.25 units of Exo III; the reaction in lane 5 was run in a buffer containing 0 mM KCl, that in lane 6 was run in a buffer containing 50 mM KCl.

The results presented in FIG. 69 demonstrate that Exo III generated a distinct cleavage pattern when incubated with a single-stranded DNA substrate. The pattern generated by Exo III was entirely distinct from that generated by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. The results shown in FIG. 69 also show that significant differences in the cleavage pattern generated by Exo III were observed depending on the concentrations of both the enzyme and KCl included in the reactions.

c) Ability of Alternative Enzymes to Identify Single Base Changes

In sections and a) and b) above it was shown that enzymes other than CLEAVASE BN could generate a distinct pattern of cleavage fragments when incubated in the presence of a nucleic acid substrate. Because both Tth DNAP and E. coli Exo III generated distinct cleavage patterns on single-stranded DNA, the ability of these enzymes to detect single base changes present in DNA substrates of the same size was examined. As in Example 11, the human tyrosinase gene was chosen as a model system because numerous single point mutations have been identified in exon 4 of this gene.

Three single-stranded substrate DNAs were prepared; all three substrates contained a biotin label at their 5′ end. The wild type substrate comprises the 157 nucleotide fragment from the sense strand of the human tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:47). Two mutation-containing substrates were used. The 419 substrate (SEQ ID NO:54) and the 422 substrate (SEQ ID NO:55), both of which are described in Example 11. Single-stranded DNA containing a biotin label at the 5′ end was generated for each substrate using asymmetric PCR as described in Example 10a with the exception that the single-stranded PCR products were recovered from the gel rather than the double-stranded products.

Cleavage reactions were performed as follows. Each substrate DNA (approximately 100 fmoles) was placed in a 200 μl thin wall microcentrifuge tubes (BioRad, Richmond, Calif.) in 5 μl of 1×CFLP buffer with 1.33 mM MnCl₂ (to yield a final concentration of 1 mM). A no enzyme control was set up with the wild type DNA fragment in parallel and incubated at 65° C. for each of the indicated time points, with the differences that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN and all reaction components were added prior to denaturation at 95° C. The reaction tubes were brought to 95° C. for 5 seconds to denature the substrates and then the tubes were quickly cooled to 65° C. for the reactions containing Tth DNAP and 37° C. for the reactions containing Exo III.

Cleavage reactions were started immediately by the addition of a diluted enzyme mixture containing 1.25 units of the enzyme either Tth DNAP or Exo III in 5 μl of 1×CFLP buffer without MnCl₂. The enzyme solution was brought to room temperature before addition to the cleavage reaction. After 5 minutes at 65° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). The samples were heated to 72° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7 M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated and overlaid with a nylon membrane, as described in example 10a. The DNA was transferred to the membrane and the membrane was dried, blocked in 1 × I-BLOCK (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), conjugated with streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase (United States Biochemical), washed, reacted with CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.), and exposed to X-ray film as described in Example 22a with the exception that the distilled water washes were omitted. The results are presented in FIG. 70.

In FIG. 70, lanes 1-3 contain cleavage fragments generated by incubation of either the wild-type, mutant 419 and mutant 422 alleles of the tyrosinase gene, respectively, with Tth DNAP. Lanes 4-6 contain cleavage fragments generated by incubation of either the wild type, mutant 419 and mutant 422 substrates, respectively, with Exo III in a buffer containing 0 mM KCl. Lanes 7-9 contain cleavage fragments generated by incubation of either the wild type, mutant 419 and mutant 422 substrates, respectively, incubated with Exo III in a buffer containing 50 mM KCl. Lane 10 contains cleavage fragments generated by incubation of the wild type DNA substrate with CLEAVASE BN in a buffer containing 0 mM KCl; this reaction provides a comparison of the patterns generated by the three different enzymes (i.e., CLEAVASE BN, Tth DNAP and Exo III). Lane 11 contains the no enzyme control with the wild type DNA substrate incubated in the presence of 50 mM KCl.

The results shown in FIG. 70 demonstrate that both Tth DNAP and Exo III were able to detect single base changes in a single-stranded DNA substrate relative to a wild-type DNA substrate. The patterns generated by Tth DNAP were comparable to those generated by CLEAVASE BN for all three DNA substrates (See FIG. 32 for a comparison of the pattern generated by CLEAVASE BN).

The patterns generated by Exo III were entirely distinct from those generated by enzymes derived from the genus Thermus (i.e., CLEAVASE BN and Tth DNAP). Furthermore, the pattern produced by cleavage of the DNA substrates by Exo III were distinct depending on which concentration of KCl was employed in the reaction (FIG. 70). A distinct pattern change was evident for the 419 mutant at both KCl concentrations. As shown in FIG. 70, at 0 mM KCl, a band appears in the 40 nucleotide range in the 419 mutant (lane 5); at 50 mM KCl, the 419 mutant contains an additional band in the 70 nucleotide range (lane 8). Pattern changes were not discernable for the 422 mutant (relative to the wild-type) in the Exo III digestions; this difference in the ability of the E. coli Exo III enzyme to detect single base changes could relate to the relative positions of the changes with respect to secondary structures that act as substrates for the structure specific cleavage reaction, and the position of the label (5′ or 3′ end) relative to the preferred cleavage site (5′ or 3′), FIG. 71.

d) The Drosophila RrpI Enzyme can be Used to Generate Cleavage Patterns

Another protein in the Exo III family of DNA repair endonucleases, RrpI from Drosophila melanogaster (Nugent, M, Huang, S.-M., and Sander, M. Biochemistry, 1993: 32, pp. 11445-11452), was tested for its ability to generate a distinct cleavage pattern on a single-stranded DNA template. Because its characteristics in the cleavage assay were unknown, this enzyme was tested under a variety of buffer conditions. Varying amounts of this enzyme (1 ng or 30 ng) were incubated with approximately 100 fmoles of the 157 nucleotide fragment 3of the sense strand of exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO: 47) in either 1 mM MnCl₂ or 5 mM MgCl₂ and either 1× CFLP buffer, pH 8.2 or 1× CFLP buffer, pH 7.8, with 10 mM NaCl. Samples were heated to 95° C. and begun by the addition of a diluted enzyme mix containing either 1 or 30 ng of RrpI in 1× CFLP buffer. Reactions were carried out at 30° C. for either 5 or 30 minutes. The results (data not shown) indicated that this enzyme generates a weak, but distinct cleavage pattern on a single-stranded DNA template.

e) The Rad1/Rad10 Complex can be Used to Generate Cleavage Patterns

The Rad1-Rad10 endonuclease (Rad1/10) from S. cerevisiae is a specific 3′ endonuclease which participates in nucleotide excision repair in yeast. This enzyme is a heterodimer consisting of two proteins, Rad1 and Rad10. Rad1 and Rad10 alone do not have enzymatic activity. Rad1/10 recognizes structures comprising a bifurcated DNA duplex and cleaves the single-stranded 3′ arm at the end of the duplex (Bardwell, A. J et al. (1994) Science 265:2082). In this sense Rad1/10 shares the same substrate specificity as does the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. However, the cleavage products produced by Rad1/10 and CLEAVASE BN differ as the Rad1/10 cleaves on the 3′ single-stranded arm of the duplex while CLEAVASE BN cuts on the 5′ single-stranded arm.

FIG. 71 provides a schematic drawing depicting the site of cleavage by these two enzymes on a bifurcated DNA duplex (formed by the hairpin structure shown). In FIG. 71, the hairpin structure at the top shows the site of cleavage by a 5′ nuclease (e.g., CLEAVASE BN). The hairpin structure shown at the bottom of FIG. 71 shows the site of cleavage by an enzyme which cleaves at the 3′ single-stranded arm (e.g., Rad1/10). Enzymes which cleave on the 5′ single-stranded arm are referred to as CLEAVASE 5′ enzymes; enzymes which cleave on the 3′ single-stranded arm are referred to as CLEAVASE 3′ enzymes.

In order to determine whether the Rad1/10 protein is able to detect single base changes in DNA substrates, the cleavage patterns created by cleavage of DNA substrates by the Rad1/10 and CLEAVASE BN enzymes were compared. In this comparison the following substrates were used. The 157 nucleotide fragment from the wild type (SEQ ID NO:47), the 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:54) and the 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55) alleles derived from the sense strand of exon 4 of the human tyrosinase gene was generated containing a biotin label at the 5′ end as described in Example 11.

The Rad1 and Rad10 proteins were generously provided by Dr. Errol C. Friedberg (The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas). The Rad1/10 complex was prepared by mixing Rad1 and Rad10 proteins in 1× dilution buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA) to achieve a final concentration of 0.1 mM of each protein.

Cleavage reactions using the Rad1/10 endonuclease were performed as follows. The substrate DNA and 15 ng (0.1 pmole) of Rad1/10 complex in 1 μl of 1× dilution buffer were mixed on ice in 10 μl of 1×CFLP buffer pH 7.8, 1 mM MnCl₂. The reaction was then incubated at 37° C. for 5 minutes. The cleavage reaction was stopped by addition of 6 μl of stop buffer.

Cleavage reactions using the CLEAVASE BN enzyme were done exactly as described above for the Rad1/10 cleavages with the exception that 10 ng of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme was added and the incubation at 37° C. was performed for 3 minutes. Uncut or no enzyme controls were run for each substrate DNA and were prepared as described for the reactions containing enzyme with the exception that sterile water was added in place of the enzyme (data not shown).

The cleavage products (3 μl each) were separated by electrophoresis through a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel, transferred to a membrane and visualized as described in Example 21. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 72.

FIG. 72 shows the resulting patterns corresponding to the cleavage products of the sense strand of the wild type tyrosinase substrate (SEQ ID NO:47) (lanes 1 and 4), the 419 mutant (SEQ ID NO:54) (lanes 2 and 5) and the 422 mutant (SEQ ID NO:55) (lanes 3 and 6). Lanes 1-3 show the cleavage pattern created by incubation of the three substrate DNAs with the CLEAVASE BN enzyme and lanes 4-6 show cleavage patterns created by incubation of the three substrate DNAs with the Rad1/10 enzyme. Lanes marked “M” contain molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10.

The results shown in FIG. 72 demonstrate that the Rad1/10 enzyme was able to produce distinctive cleavage patterns from the substrate DNAs (lanes 4-6); the average product length produced by cleavage of the substrate was longer than that produced by CLEAVASE BN. Importantly, the results shown in FIG. 72 demonstrate that the single base substitutions found in the mutant tyrosinase substrates resulted in the production of specific changes in the otherwise similar cleavage patterns of tyrosinase substrates (compare lanes 5 and 6 with lane 4). Note that in the digestion of the mutant 419 substrate with Rad1/10, the bands below about 40 nucleotides have lower intensity and one band is absent, when compared to wild-type, while in the digest of the mutant 422 substrate several new bands appear in the range of 42-80 nucleotides. Since both enzymes were tested using the same reaction conditions, these results show that Rad1/10 was able to detect the same differences in DNA secondary structure that were recognized by CLEAVASE BN. Rad1/10 generates a different cleavage pattern relative to that produced by CLEAVASE BN, since cleavage takes place at the 3′ end of DNA hairpins producing inherently longer fragments when the substrate contains a 5′ end label.

EXAMPLE 28 Detection of Mutations in the Human β-Globin Gene Using Double-Stranded DNA Substrates

The results shown in Example 15 demonstrated that single base changes in fragments of the β-globin gene can be detected by cleavage of single-stranded DNA substrates with the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. In this example it is shown that mutations in the β-globin gene can be detected by cleavage of double-stranded DNA substrates using the CLEAVASE BN enzyme.

Double-stranded substrate DNA comprising 536 bp fragments derived from the wild-type β-globin gene (SEQ ID NO:69), mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:71) and mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:72) were generated containing a 5′ biotin label on the sense strand using the PCR. PCR amplification of these substrates was done as described in Example 15a. Gel purification and isolation of double-stranded fragments was performed as described in Example 21a.

The cleavage reactions were performed as described in Example 21c. Briefly, 2 μl of stock DNA (80 ng) in 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA was mixed with 3 μl H₂O and denatured at 95° C. for 20 seconds. The denatured DNA was cooled to 70° C. and a mixture consisting of 2 μl of 5× CFLP buffer pH 7.5, 2 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂ and 1 μl (25 ng) of the enzyme CLEAVASE BN in dilution buffer was added to start the cleavage reaction. The cleavage reactions were stopped after 1 minute by the addition of 6 μl of stop buffer. Control uncut reactions were performed as described above with the exception that of 1 μl of H₂O was used in place of 1 μl of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. The cleavage products (5 μl each) were separated by electrophoresis through a 6% denaturing polyacrylamide gel, transferred to a membrane and visualized as described in Example 21. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 shows the cleavage patterns which correspond to the cleavage of the sense strand of the wild type β-globin 536 bp fragment (lane 4), mutant 1 fragment (lane 5) and mutant 2 fragment (lane 6). Lanes 1-3 show the uncut controls for wild-type, mutant 1 and mutant 2 substrates, respectively. The lane marked “M” contains biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10.

As shown in FIG. 73, the base substitution present in mutant 1 results in a reduction in the intensity of a band which migrates close to the uncut DNA (lane 5), when compared to wild-type cleavage pattern. The base substitution present in mutant 2 results in the disappearance of the band present in the region just above major product band (approximately 174 nucleotides), when compared to the wild-type cleavage pattern.

For the double-stranded cleavage reactions described above, different reaction conditions were used than those employed for the cleavage of the single-stranded β-globin DNA substrates described in Example 15. The conditions employed for the cleavage of the double-stranded substrates used a lower MnCl₂ concentration, no KCl was added, a higher temperature and shorter time course relative to the conditions used in Example 15. Although the cleavage patterns generated by cleavage of the double-stranded and single-stranded β-globin DNA were slightly different, the positions of the pattern changes for mutants 1 and 2 are similar to those demonstrated in Example 15, and it was possible to detect the base substitutions in both double-stranded cases. These results show that the subtle changes in DNA secondary structure caused by single base substitutions in larger DNA substrates can be detected by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme whether a single- or double-stranded form of the DNA substrate is employed.

EXAMPLE 29 Identification of Mutations in the Human β-Globin Gene CFLP Patterns of Unknowns by Comparison to an Existing Library of Patterns

The results shown in Examples 15 demonstrated that CLEAVASE BN enzyme generates a unique pattern of cleavage products from each β-globin substrate tested. Differences in banding patterns were seen between the wild-type and each mutant; different banding patterns were seen for each mutant allowing not only a discrimination of the mutants from the wild-type but also a discrimination of each mutant from the others. To demonstrate that the products of the CLEAVASE reaction can be compared to previously characterized mutants for purposes of identification and classification, a second set of β-globin mutants were characterized and the CFLP patterns, by comparison to the set analyzed in Example 15, were used to determine if the mutants in the second set were the same as any in the first set, or were unique to the second set. Although these isolates have all been described previously (specific references are cited for of these isolates at the end of this example), the experiment was performed “blind”, with the samples identified only by a number.

Five β-globin mutants were compared to the CFLP patterns from the first set: the wild type β-globin gene (SEQ ID NO:69) or mutant 1 (SEQ ID NO:71), mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:72) or mutant 3 (SEQ ID NO:70). Plasmids for containing these 5 new isolates were grown and purified, and single-stranded substrate DNA, 534 or 536 nucleotides in length, was prepared for each of the 5 β-globin genes as described above in Example 15a. Cleavage reactions were performed and reaction products were resolved as described in Example 15; the resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 74.

In FIG. 74, two panels are shown. Panel A shows the reaction products from the β-globin isolates described in Example 15 (and as seen in FIG. 43). Panel B shows the reaction products of the five additional isolates, numbered 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. The lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10.

By comparison to the CFLP patterns shown in Panel A, the isolates shown in Panel B can be characterized. It can be seen that the banding pattern of isolate 4 (Panel B, lane 1) is the same as was seen for the wild-type β-globin substrate shown in Panel A (lane 1); isolate 8 (Panel B, lane 5) is comparable to the previously characterized mutant 3 (Panel A, lane 4); isolate number 6 (Panel B, lane3) has changes in two areas of the pattern and appears to have features of both isolates 2 (Panel A, lane 3)and 3 (Panel A, lane 4); isolates 5 and 7 (Panel B, lanes 2 and4, respectively) appear to be identical, and they show a pattern not seen in panel A.

To confirm the relationships between the different isolates, the identities of the mutations were then determined by primer extension sequencing using the FMOL DNA Sequencing System (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.) using the PCR primers (5′-biotinylated KM29 primer (SEQ ID NO:67) and 5′-biotinylated RS42 primer (SEQ ID NO:68)), according to the manufacturer's protocol. The sequencing reactions were visualized by the same procedures used for the β-globin CFLP reactions, as described in Example 15b.

The two isolates that matched members of the original set by CFLP pattern analysis matched by sequence also. Isolate 4 is identical to the wild type sequence (SEQ ID NO:69); isolate 8 is a duplicate of mutant 3 (SEQ ID NO:70).

Isolate 6 appears by CFLP pattern to have changes similar to both mutant 2 and mutant 3 of the original set. The sequence of mutant 6 (SEQ ID NO:82) reveals that it shares a one base change with mutant 3, a silent C to T substitution in codon 3. Mutant 6 also has a G-to-A substitution in codon 26, only 4 bases downstream of that found in mutant 2 (SEQ ID NO:72). This mutation has been shown to enhance a cryptic splice site causing a fraction of the mRNA to encode a nonfunctional protein (Orkin, S. H., et al. (1982) Nature, 300:768). It is worthy of note that while mutant 6 and mutant 2 both showed alteration in the band that migrates at about 200 nucleotides (e.g., the band is missing or weak in mutant 2 but appears to be split into 3 weak bands in mutant 6) these changes are not of identical appearance. These CFLP changes, caused by mutations four nucleotides apart, are distinguishable from each other.

The last two isolates, 5 and 7, had the same sequence (SEQ ID NO:83), and revealed a single base substitution within the first intron, at IVS position 110. This mutation is associated with abnormal splicing leading to premature termination of translation of the β-globin protein (R. A. Spritz et al. (1981) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 78:2455). It is worthy of note that the band that disappears in the CFLP patterns for these mutants (at approximately 260 nucleotides, as compared to the size markers) is between the indicative bands in the mutant 1 (at approximately 400 nucleotides) and mutant 2 (at approximately 200 nucleotides) CFLP patterns, and the actual mutation (at nucleotide 334 from the labeled 5′ end) is between those of mutants 1 and 2, at nucleotides 380 and 207, respectively. Thus, the CFLP analysis not only indicated the presence of a change, but also gave positional information as well.

From the results shown in FIG. 74, the unique pattern of cleavage products generated by CLEAVASE BN from each of the first four (wild type plus three variants) β-globin substrates tested was used as reference to characterize additional β-globin isolates. The banding patterns show an overall “familial” similarity, with subtle differences (e.g., missing or shifted bands) associated with each particular variant. Differences in banding patterns were seen between the wild-type and each mutant; different banding patterns were seen for each mutant allowing not only a discrimination of the mutant from the wild-type but also a discrimination of each mutant from the others.

EXAMPLE 30 Effect of the Order of Addition of the Reaction Components on the Double-Stranded Cleavage Pattern

The cleavage reaction using a double-stranded DNA substrate can be considered a two-step process. The first step is the denaturation of the DNA substrate and the second step is the initiation of the cleavage reaction at the target temperature. As it is possible that the resulting cleavage pattern may differ depending on the conditions present during denaturation (e.g., whether the DNA is denatured in water or in a buffer) as well as on the conditions of reaction initiation (e.g., whether the cleavage reaction is started by the addition of enzyme or MnCl₂) the following experiment was performed.

To study the effect of the addition of the reaction components on the resulting cleavage pattern, all possible mixing combinations for 4 reaction components (i.e., DNA, CFLP buffer, MnCl₂ and the CLEAVASE BN enzyme) were varied. A single DNA substrate was used which comprised the 536 bp fragment derived from the wild-type β-globin gene (SEQ ID NO:69). The substrate DNA contained a biotin label at the 5′ end of the sense strand and was prepared as described in Example 28.

The substrate was cut in 8 different cleavage reactions which employed different combinations for the addition of the reaction components at the denaturing and initiation steps. These reactions are described below.

FIG. 75 shows the resulting patterns generated by cleavage of the sense strand of the wild-type β-globin 536-bp substrate (SEQ ID NO:69). In lane 1, the substrate DNA (40 fmoles of DNA in 1 μl of 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0, 0.1 mM EDTA mixed with 5 μl H₂O) was denatured at 95° C. for 10 seconds, cooled to 55° C. and the reaction was started by the addition of a mixture containing 2 μl of 5× CFLP buffer with 150 mM KCl, 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂ and 1 μl (50 ng) of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. In lane 2, the DNA was denatured in the presence of 2 μl of 5× CFLP buffer and reaction was started at 55° C. by the addition of 1 μl MnCl₂ and 1 μl (50 ng) of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. In lane 3, the DNA was denatured in the presence of MnCl₂ and the reaction was started with addition of the buffer and the enzyme. In lane 4, the denaturation mixture included the substrate DNA and the enzyme and the reaction was started with addition of the buffer and MnCl₂. In lane 5, the substrate DNA was denatured in the presence of CFLP buffer and MnCl₂ and then the enzyme was added at 55° C. In lane 6, the substrate DNA was denatured in the presence of CFLP buffer and the enzyme and then MnCl₂ was added at 55° C. Lane 7 shows the uncut control. In lane 8, the DNA was denatured in the presence of the enzyme and MnCl₂ and then the buffer was added at 55° C. In lane 9, the substrate DNA was denatured in the presence of the enzyme, MnCl₂ and the CFLP buffer and then the mixture was incubated at 55° C. for 5 minutes. The lane marked “M” contains biotinylated molecular weight markers prepared as described in Example 10.

In all cases reaction was stopped by addition of 6 μl of stop buffer. The reaction products (5 μl each) were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel and the DNA was transferred to a membrane and visualized as described in Example 21. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 75.

The results shown in FIG. 75 demonstrate that most of denaturation-initiation protocols employed generated identical cleavage patterns with the exception of the reaction shown in lane 3. In the reaction shown in lane 3, the DNA was denatured in the presence of MnCl₂ and in the absence of CFLP buffer. In the cases where the enzyme and MnCl₂ were added before the denaturation step (lanes 8,9) no labeled material was detected. In these cases the label was released in a form of short DNA fragments which were produced as a result of nibbling (i.e., the exonucleolytic removal) of the label from the 5′ end of the double-stranded DNA template.

The results shown in FIG. 75 demonstrate that the order of addition of the reaction components has little effect upon the cleavage pattern produced with the exception that 1) the DNA should not be denatured in the presence of MnCl₂ but in the absence of any buffering solution and 2) the CLEAVASE BN enzyme and MnCl₂ should not be added together to the DNA prior to the denaturation step. Under these two exceptional conditions, the 5′ label was removed from the 5′ end of the substrate by the enzyme resulting in a loss of the signal.

EXAMPLE 31 Detection of Mutations in Human p53 Gene by CLEAVASE Fragment Length Polymorphism (CFLP) Analysis

The results shown in preceeding examples demonstrated that the CFLP reaction could detect single base changes in fragments of varying size from the human β-globin and tyrosinase genes and that the CFLP reaction could be used to identify different strains of virus. The ability of the CLEAVASE reaction to detect single base changes in the human tumor suppressor gene p53 was next examined. Mutation of the human p53 gene is the most common cancer-related genetic change; mutations in the p53 gene are found in about half of all cases of human cancer.

The ability of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme to cleave DNA fragments derived from the human p53 gene and to detect single base changes in fragments of the same size was examined. Plamsids containing cDNA clones containing either wild type or mutant p53 sequences were used to generate templates for analysis in the CFLP reaction. The p53 gene is quite large, spanning 20,000 base pairs and is dividied into 11 exons. The use of a template derived from a cDNA allows for maximization of the amount of protein-encoding sequence that can be examined in a DNA fragment of a given size.

The nucleotide sequence of the coding region of the wild type human p53 cDNA gene is listed in SEQ ID NO:92. The nucleotide sequence of the coding region of the mutant 143 human p53 cDNA gene is listed in SEQ ID NO:93. The nucleotide sequence of the coding region of the mutant 249 (silent) human p53 cDNA gene is listed in SEQ ID NO:94. A 601 nucleotide fragment spanning exons 5 through 8 was generated from each of these three p53 cDNAs as follows.

a) Preparation of the Substrate DNA

Six double stranded substrate DNAs were prepared for analysis in the CFLP reaction. The substrates contained a biotin label at either their 5′ or 3′ end. The wild type substrate comprises a 601 nucleotide fragment spanning exons 5 through 8 of the cDNA sequence of the human p53 gene (SEQ ID NO:92) (Baker, S. J. et al., Science (1990) 249:912). Two mutation containing substrates were used. The mutant 143 substrate (SEQ ID:93) is derived from a p53 mutant V143A which contains a valine (GTG) to alanine (GCG) substitution; this mutation differs from the wild type p53 exon 5-8 fragment by a single nucleotide change (Baker, S. J. et al., Science (1990) 249:912). The mutant 249 (silent) substrate is derived from a p53 mutant which contains a single base change at amino acid 249, from AGG to AGA (SEQ ID NO:94). This single base change does not result in a corresponding amino acid change and is therefore referred to as a silent mutation.

The 601 bp double stranded PCR fragments were generated as follows. The primer pair 5′-TCTGGGCTTCTTGCATTCTG (SEQ ID NO:95) and 5′-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG (SEQ ID NO:96) were used to prime the PCRs. The synthetic primers were obtained from Integrated DNA Technologies (Coralville, Iowa). The primers were biotinylated on their 5′ ends with the Oligonucleotide Biotinylation Kit purchased from USB-Amersham (Cleveland, Ohio) according to the manufacturers' protocols. When the sense strand was to be analysed in the CFLP reaction, the primer listed in SEQ ID NO:95 was labeled at the 5′ end with the biotin. When the anti-sense strand was to be analysed in the CFLP reaction, the primer listed in SEQ ID NO:96 was labeled at the 5′ end with the biotin.

The target DNA used in the PCR for the generation of the 601 bp fragment derived from the wild type p53 cDNA was the plasmid CMV-p53-SN3 (Baker, S. J. et al., supra); this plasmid contains the coding region listed in SEQ ID NO:92. The target for the generation of the 601 bp fragment derived from the mutant 143 was the plasmid CMV-p53-SCX3 (Baker, S. J. et al., supra); this plasmid contains the coding region listed in SEQ ID NO:93. REF). The target for the generation of the 601 bp fragment derived from mutant 249 (silent) was the plasmid LTR 273 His (Chen, P. L. et al., Science (1990) 250:1576); this plasmid contains the coding region listed in SEQ ID NO:94. DNA was prepared from bacteria harboring each plasmid (plasmid DNA was isolated using standard techniques). The 601 bp PCR products were prepared as follows.

The symmetric PCR reactions contained 50 ng of plasmid DNA, 50 pmoles primer 5′-TCTGGGCTTCTTGCATTCTG (SEQ ID:95), 50 pmoles of primer 5′-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG (SEQ ID:96), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP40) in a reaction volume of 95 μl. The reaction mixtures were overlaid with 50 μl CHILL OUT (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) and the tubes were heated to 95° C. for 2.5 min. Taq DNA polymerase (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.) was then added as 1.25 units of enzyme in 5,1 of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were then heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 55° C. for 45 seconds and heated to 72° C. for 75 seconds for 34 cycles with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last cycle.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. The products were precipitated by the addition of NaCl to a final concentration of 0.4M, 20 μg glycogen carrier and 500 μl ethanol. The DNA was pelleted by centrifugation and the PCR products were resuspended in 25 or 50 μl sterile distilled water to which was added an equal volume of a solution containing 95% formamide, 20 mM EDTA and 0.05% each xylene cyanol and bromophenol blue. The tubes were then heated to 85° C. for 2 min and the reaction products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylimide gel (19:1 cross-link) containing 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the 601 bp fragments were excised from the gel slices by passive diffusion overnight into a solution containing 0.5 M NH₄OAc, 0.1% SDS and 0.1% EDTA. The DNA was then precipitated with ethanol in the presence of 4 ug of glycogen carrier. The DNA was pelleted, resuspended in sterile distilled water and reprecipitated by the addition of NaCl to a final aqueous concentration of 0.2 M and 80% ethanol. After the second precipitation, the DNA was pelleted and resuspended in 30 μl sterile distilled water or TE (10 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0 and 0.1 mM EDTA).

The nucleotide sequnence of these 601 bp templates are listed in SEQ ID NOS:97-102. The sense strand of the 601 nucleotide wild type fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:97. The anti-sense strand of the 601 nucleotide wild type fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:98. The sense strand of the 601 nucleotide mutant 143 fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:99. The anti-sense strand of the 601 nucleotide mutant 143 fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:100. The sense strand of the 601 nucleotide mutant 249 (silent) fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:101. The anti-sense strand of the 601 nucleotide mutant 249 (silent) fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:102.

b) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

Cleavage reactions comprised approximately 100 fmoles of the resulting double stranded substrate DNAs (the substrates contained a biotin moiety at the 5′ end of the sense or antisense strand) in a total volume of 5 μl of sterile distilled water. The reactions were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds to denature the substrates and then quickly cooled to 50° C. (this step allows the DNA to assume its unique secondary structure by allowing the formation of intra-strand hydrogen bonds between complimentary bases).

The reactions were performed in either a thermocycler (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) programmed to heat to 95° C. for 15 seconds and then cooled immediately to 50° C.

Once the tubes were cooled to the reaction temperature of 50° C., the following components were added: 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing 0.2 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50ng/μl 1× CLEAVASE Dilution Buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)); 1 μl of 10× CFLP reaction buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.5% NP 40, 0.5% TWEEN 20), and 1 AIl of 2mM MnCl₂.

A no enzyme control (10 μl) was set up in parallel for each PCR fragment examined; this control differed from the above reaction mixture only in that sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Reactions were stopped after 3 minutes by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol).

The samples were then heated to 85° C. for 2 minutes and 4 μl of each reaction mixture were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylimide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively charged nylon membrane (Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted with 0.5× TBE (45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), was laid on top of the exposed acrylamide gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and washed in 1× Sequencase Images Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) for two 15 minute intervals with gentle agitation. Three tenths of a ml of the buffer was used per cm² of membrane. A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio) was added to a 1:3000 dilution directly to the blocking solution, and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was washed 3 times (5 min/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% SDS, using 0.5 mls/cm² of membrane. The membrane was then washed twice in 1× SAAP buffer without SDS, but containing 1 mM MgCl₂, drained thoroughly and placed in a heat sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) was added to the bag and distributed over the membrane for 5 minutes. The bag was drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles. The membrane was then exposed to X-ray film (Kodak XRP) for an initial 30 minute exposure. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The result autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 79.

In FIG. 79, the lane marked “M” contains biotinlyated molecular weight markers. The marker fragments were purchased from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.). Lanes 1-4 contain the reaction products from the incubation of double stranded DNA substrates in the absence of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme (i.e., uncut controls). Lane 1 contains the wild type fragment labeled on the sense strand of the 601 bp PCR fragment. Lane 2 contains the mutant 143 fragment labeled on the sense strand of the 601 bp PCR fragment. Lane 3 contains the wild type fragment labeled on the antisense strand of the PCR product. Lane 4 contains the fragment encoding the silent mutation at amino acid 249 labeled on the antisense strand of the PCR product. Lanes 5-8 contain the reaction products from the incubation of the 601 bp double stranded substrates with CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Lane 5 contains products generated using the wild type fragment labeled on the sense strand; lane 6 contains products generated using the mutant 143 labeled on the sense strand. Lanes 7 and 8 contain products generated using the wild type and mutant 249 (silent) substrates, respectively, labeled on the anti-sense strand.

The results shown in FIG. 79 demonstrate that a similar, but distinctly different, pattern of cleavage products was generated by the digestion of wild type and mutant-containing templates by the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Comparison of lanes 5 and 6 reveals a difference in the band pattern in the 100 nucleotide range. Specifically, the strong band present in the wild type (at around 100 nucleotides) was missing in the V143A mutant while two bands immediately below this strong band were prominent in the mutant and not evident in the wild type. In the 200 nucleotide range, a pronounced doublet seen in the wild type is missing from the mutant, which instead contained a strong single band migrating slightly faster than the wild type doublet. Similarly, comparison of lanes 7 and 8 revealed differences between the pattern generated from cleavage of the anti-sense strand of the wild type fragment and the mutant 249 (silent) fragment. In the 100 nucleotide range, the wild type fragment exhibited a strong doublet whereas the upper band of this doublet was missing in the mutant 249 (silent) fragment. In addition, two prominent bands present in the wild type pattern in the 150-180 bp range were completely absent from the mutant 249 (silent) cleavage products.

Although each mutant fragment analyzed in FIG. 79 differs from the wild type by only one of the 601 nucleotides, a unique pattern of cleavage fragments was generated for each. Furthermore, at least one pattern change occured in each mutant in the immediate vicininty (i.e., within 10-20 nucleotides) of the DNA sequence change. This experiment demonstrates that CFLP is capable of distinguishing the presence of single base changes in PCR fragments containing exons 5 through 8 of the p53 gene.

EXAMPLE 32 Detection of Genetically Engineered Mutations in PCR Fragments of the Human p53 Gene

The ability of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme to detect single base changes genetically engineered into PCR fragments containing exons 5 through 8 of the human p53 gene was analyzed. The single base changes introduced were 1) a change from arginine (AGG) to serine (AGT) at amino acid 249 (termed the R249S mutation) and 2) a change from arginine (CGT) to histidine (CAT) at amino acid 273 (termed the R273H mutation). Both of these mutations have been found in human tumors and have been identified as mutational hot spots (Hollstein et al., Science 253:49 (1991)). The R249S mutation is strongly correlated with exposure to aflatoxin B and/or infection with hepatitus B virus (Caron de Fromental and Soussi, Genes, Chromosomes and Cancer (1992) pp. 1-15). The R273H mutation arises as a result of a transition at a CpG dimucleotide. Such transitions account for approximately one-third of the known p53 mutationns and are characteristic of a variety of tumor types (Caron de Fromental and Soussi, supra; Hollstein et al., supra).

Plasmids containing the R249S and R273H mutations were engineered according to a variation of a protocol described by R. Higuchi (in PCR Technology: Principles and Applications for DNA Amplification, H. A. Ehrlich, Ed.(1989) Stockton Press, NY, pp. 61-70). This methodology allows the generation of collection of plasmids this collection allows the generation of p53 “bar code” library which contains the CFLP patterns generated by cleavage of the p53 mutants using the CLEAVASE enzymes.

a) Construction of a 601 bp PCR Fragment Containing the R249S Mutation

To generate a 601 bp fragment containing the R249S mutation, a 2-step recombinant PCR was performed (see FIG. 78 for a schematic representation of the 2-step recombinant PCR). In the first or “upstream” PCR, oligonucleotides 5′-TCTGGGCTTCTTGCATTCTG (SEQ ID NO:95) and 5′-GAGGATGGGAC TCCGGTTCATG (SEQ ID NO:103) were used to amplify a 427 bp fragment containing the G to T base change resulting in the R249S mutation; the sequence of the 427 bp fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:111. In the second or “downstream” PCR, oligonucleotide 5′-CATGAACCGGAGTCCCATCCTCAC (SEQ ID NO:104) and 5′-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG (SEQ ID NO:96) were used to amplify a 196 bp fragment containing the same base change on the complementary strand; the sequence of the 196 bp fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:112.

For each PCR, 10 ng of a cDNA clone encoding the wild type p53 gene (coding region listed in SEQ ID NO:92) were used as the template in a 50 μl PCR reaction. In the case of the upstream fragment, 10 ng of template were added to a tube containing 5 picomoles of the oligonucleotide 5′-TCTGGGCTTCTTGCATT CTG (SEQ ID NO:95), 5 pmoles of the oligonucleotide 5′-GAGGATGGGACTCC GGTTCATG (SEQ ID NO:103), 50 M each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl2, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP40) in a volume of 45 μl. For the downstream fragment, 10 ng of the wild type template, plasmid CMV-p53-SN3 (Example 31) were added to 5 picomoles of the oligonucleotide 5′-CATGAACCGGAGTCCCATCCTCAC (SEQ ID NO:104) and 5 picomoles of the oligonucleotide 5′-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG (SEQ ID NO:96), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-C1, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP-40).

Tubes containing 45 μl of the above mixtures for each template to be amplified were overlaid with 50 μl CHILL OUT (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) and the tubes were heated to 95° C. for 2.5 min and then cooled to 70° C. Taq DNA polymerase (Promega) was then added as 1.25 units of enzyme in 51l of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were then heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 55° C. for 45 seconds and heated to 72° C. for 75 seconds for 24 cycles with a 5 min incubation at 72° C. after the last cycle.

The PCR products were gel purified as follows. Ten microliters of each PCR product were mixed with 10 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). The tubes were then heated to 85° C. for 2 min and the reaction products were resolved by electrophoresis through a 6% polyacrylimide gel (19:1 cross-link) containing 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA (the polyacrylimide solutions used were freshly prepared). The DNA was visualized by ethidium bromide staining and the fragment was excised from the gel slice by passive diffusion overnight into a solution containing 0.5 M NH₄OAc, 0.1% SDS and 0.1% EDTA at 37° C.

Ten microliters of each eluted PCR product were combined to serve as the recombinant template to prime a second round of PCR. To this template, 10 picomoles of 5′-biotin exon 8 primer (SEQ ID NO:96), 10 pmoles of 5′-exon 5 primer (SEQ ID NO:95), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40 (NP-40) were added. Tubes containing 90 μl of the above mixtures for each template to be amplified were overlaid with 50 μl CHILL OUT (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) and the tubes were heated to 95° C. for 2.5 min and then cooled to 70° C. Taq DNA polymerase (Promega) was then added as 2.5 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were then heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 47° C. to allow the two template molecules to anneal, then heated to 72° C. to allow extension of the primers by Taq DNA polymerase. Following this initial cycle of denaturation, annealing and extension, 25 cycles in which the reactions were heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 55° C. for 45 seconds, and then heated to 72° C. for 1 minute were carried out, followed by a 5 min extension at 72° C. The fragments were then ethanol precipitated and gel purified as described in Example 31.

b) Construction of a 601 bp PCR Fragment Containing the R273H Mutation

To generate a 601 bp fragment containing the R273H mutation, a 2-step recombinant PCR was performed using the procedure described in section a) was used to simultaneously amplify PCR fragments encoding a single base change from arginine (CGT) to histidine (CAT) at amino acid 273. In the first or “upstream” PCR, oligonucleotide 5′-TCTGGGCTTCTTGCATTCTG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:95) and 5′-GCACAAACATGCACCTCAAAGCT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:105) were used to generate the 498 bp fragment whose sequence is listed in SEQ ID NO:113. In the second or “downstream” PCR, oligonucleotide 5′-CAGCTTTGAGGTGCATGTTTGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:106) was paired with oligonucleotide 5′-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:96) to generate a 127 nucleotide fragment whose sequence is listed in SEQ ID NO:114. The DNA fragments were electrophoresed, eluted, combined and used to prime a second round of PCR as described in section a) to generate a 601 bp PCR product containing the R273H mutation.

c) Sequence Analysis of the 601 Nucleotide PCR Fragments

The recombinant 601-bp PCR products generated through this two step PCR procedure were gel purified as described in Example 31. The PCR products were sequenced using the FMOL DNA Sequencing System (Promega) in conjunction with oligonucleotide 5′-biotin-GTTGGGCAGTGCTCGCTTAG (SEQ ID NO:96) according to manufacturers' standard protocols to verify the presence of the engineered mutations.

The nucleotide sequence corresponding to the sense strand of the 601 nucleotide R249S mutant fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:107. The anti-sense strand of the 601 nucleotide R249S mutant fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:108. The sense strand of the 601 nucleotide R273H mutant fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:109. The anti-sense strand of the 601 nucleotide R273H mutant fragment is listed in SEQ ID NO:110.

d) Cleavage Reactions

In order to generate ample quantities of DNA for subsequent CFLP analysis, the 601 bp fragments conatining either the R249S or the R273H mutation were used as templates in an additional round of PCR. Approximately 2 fmoles of each 601 bp fragment were added to 20 pmoles of the primers corresponding to SEQ ID NOS:95 and 96 (SEQ ID NO:96 contained a biotin on the 5′ end), 50 μM each dNTP, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NP40. Tubes containing 90 μl of the above mixture were assembled for each template to be amplified; the tubes were overlaid with 50 μl CHILL OUT (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) and the tubes were heated to 95° C. for 2.5 min and then cooled to 70° C. Taq DNA polymerase (Promega) was then added as 2.5 units of enzyme in 5 μl of 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.3, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 50 mM KCl, with 0.05% TWEEN 20 and 0.05% NONIDET P-40. The tubes were then heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 47° C. to allow the two template molecules to anneal, then heated to 72° C. to allow extension of the primers by Taq DNA polymerase. Following this initial cycle of denaturation, annealing and extension, 25 cycles in which the reactions were heated to 95° C. for 45 seconds, cooled to 55° C. for 45 seconds, and then heated to 72° C. for 1 minute were carried out, followed by a 5 min extension at 72° C. The fragments were then ethanol precipitated and gel purified as described in Example 31. The gel purified fragments were then used in CFLP reactions as follows.

Cleavage reactions comprised approximately 100 fmoles of the resulting double stranded substrate DNAs (the substrates contained a biotin moiety at either the 5′ end of the sense or anti-sense strand) in a total volume of 5 μl (sterile distilled water was used to bring the volume to 5 μl). The reactions were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds to denature the substrates and then quickly cooled to 50° C. (this step allows the DNA to assume its unique secondary structure by allowing the formation of intra-strand hydrogen bonds between complimentary bases). The reaction were performed in either a thermocycler (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) programmed to heat to 95° C. for 15 seconds and then cool immediately to 50° C. or the tubes were placed manually in a heat block set at 95° C. and then transferred to a second heat block set at 50° C.

Once the tubes were cooled to the reaction temperature of 50° C., 5 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing 0.2 μl of CLEAVASE BN enzyme (50 ng/Al 1× CLEAVASE Dilution Buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-CI, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)), 1 μl of 10× CFLP reaction buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.5% NP 40, 0.5% TWEEN 20), and 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂. A 10 μl no enzyme control was set up in parallel for each PCR fragment examined in which sterile distilled water was substituted for CLEAVASE BN enzyme. After 2 minutes at 50° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol) .

The samples were heated to 85° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylimide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively charged nylon membrane (Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted with 0.5× TBE (45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), was laid on top of the exposed acrylamide gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and washed in 1× Sequencase Images Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) for two 15 minute intervals with gentle agitation. Three tenths of a ml of the buffer was used per cm2 of membrane. A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio) was added to a 1:3000 dilution directly to the blocking solution, and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was washed 3 times (5 min/wash) in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% SDS, using 0.5 mls/cm² of membrane. The membrane was then washed twice in 1× SAAP buffer without SDS, but containing 1 mM MgCl₂, drained thoroughly and placed in a heat sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) was added to the bag and distributed over the membrane for 5 minutes. The bag was drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles. The membrane was then exposed to X-ray film (Kodak XRP) for an initial 30 minute expsoure. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The results are shown in FIG. 80.

In FIG. 80, the lane marked “M” contains biotinlyated molecular weight markers. The marker fragments were purchased from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.) and include bands corresponding to lengths of 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 700, and 1000 nucleotides. Lanes 1-4 contain the reaction products from the incubation of double stranded DNA substrates labeled on the antisense strand in the absence of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Lane 1 contains the reaction products from the wild type fragment (SEQ ID NO:98); lane 2 contains the reaction products from the engineered R249S mutation (SEQ ID NO:108); lane 3 contains the reaction products from the 249 (silent) mutation (SEQ ID NO:102); lane 4 contains the reaction products from the engineered R273H mutation (SEQ ID NO:110).

Lanes 5-8 contain the cleavage products generated from the sense strand each of these templates when incubated in the presence of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Lane 5 contains the cleavage products from the wild type fragment (SEQ ID NO:97); lane 6 contains the cleavage products from the R249S fragment (SEQ ID NO:107); lane 7 contains the cleavage products from the 249 (silent) mutant fragment (SEQ ID NO:101); lane 8 contains the cleavage products from the R273S fragment (SEQ ID NO:109).

The results shown in FIG. 80 demonstrate that similar, but distinctly different, patterns of cleavage were generated from each of these templates containing single-base changes. Lane 6 shows the attenuation of bands in the 150-180 nucleotide range, as well as, the loss of a band in the 100 nucleotide range when compared to the wild-type pattern shown in lane 5. In addition, lane 6 shows a new band appearing in the 140 nucleotide range, and increased intensity in the top band of a doublet at about 120 nucleotides. Examination of the silent 249 mutant (lane 7) which differs from wild-type at the same nucleotide position as R249S (lane 6), revealed pattern differences relative to both the wild type (lane 5) as well as to the R249S (lane 6) mutation. Specifically, comparision to lane 5 shows an attenuation of bands in the 150-180 nucleotide range as well as the loss of a band in the 100 nucleotide range, as was seen in lane 6. However, the sample in lane 7 does not exhibit the additional band in the 140 nucleotide range, nor the increased intensity in the top band of the doublet in the 120 nucleotide range seen in lane 6. This result demonstrates that the CFLP technique is capable of distinguishing between changes to a different base at the same nucleotide position.

Examination of the reaction products in lane 8 reveals the loss of a band in the 100 nucleotide range in the R273S frgament when compared to the wild-type pattern in lane 5. This CFLP pattern is distinct from those in lanes 6 and 7, however, in that it does not show attenuation of bands in the 150-180 nucleotide range; in this region of the gel this pattern is essentially indistinguishable from that generated from the wild type fragment.

The above results demonstrate that CFLP can be used to detect clinically significant mutations in the human p53. Further, these results indicate that the CFLP technique is sufficiently sensitive to distinguish different base changes at the same position from one another, as well as from wild type. In addition these results show that the 2-PCR technique can be used to generate a collection of PCR fragments containing known p53 mutations; such a collection allows the generation of a p53 bar code library containing the CFLP patterns generated by different p53 mutations.

EXAMPLE 33 Detection of the Presence of Wild Type and Mutant Sequences in Mixed Samples

The ability of the CFLP reaction to detect the presence of different alleles of the same sized PCR fragments in a mixed sample, such as might be found in heterozygous or otherwise heterogenous tissue, samples was examined.

PCR products containing a bitoin label on the sense strand were produced and purified as described in Example 31 for the wild type p53 (SEQ ID NO:97) and mutant 143 (SEQ ID NO:99) 601-bp fragments. Aliquots of these samples were diluted to a final concentration of approximately 12.5 fmols/μl and mixed in different proportions to give a spectrum of ratios of wild type to mutant DNA. Four microliters of the diluted DNA samples, for an approximate total of 50 fmols of DNA in each sample, mixed in various combinations, were placed in microfuge tubes and heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds. The tubes were rapidly cooled to 50° C. and 6 μl of a diluted enzyme mix containing 0.2 μl of CLEAVASE BN (50ng/μl 1× CLEAVASE Dilution Buffer (0.5% NP40, 0.5% TWEEN 20, 20 mM Tris-Cl, pH 8.0, 50 mM KCl, 10 μg/ml BSA)), 1 μl of 10× CFLP reaction buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.5% NP 40, 0.5% TWEEN 20), and 1 μl of 2mM MnCl₂. A 10 μl no enzyme control was set up in parallel for each PCR fragment examined, with the difference that sterile distilled water was substituted for the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. After 1.5 minutes at 50° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 8 μl of stop buffer (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% bromophenol blue, 0.05% xylene cyanol). In addition, 4 μl of wild type only as well as 4 μl of V143A only were analyzed by the same method for comparison to the mixed samples.

Samples were heated to 85° C. for 2 minutes and 7 μl of each reaction were resolved by electrophoresis through a 10% polyacrylimide gel (19:1 cross-link), with 7M urea, in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

After electrophoresis, the gel plates were separated allowing the gel to remain flat on one plate. A 0.2 μm-pore positively charged nylon membrane (Schleicher and Schuell, Keene, N.H.), pre-wetted with 0.5× TBE (45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA), was laid on top of the exposed acrylamide gel. All air bubbles trapped between the gel and the membrane were removed. Two pieces of 3MM filter paper (Whatman) were then placed on top of the membrane, the other glass plate was replaced, and the sandwich was clamped with binder clips. Transfer was allowed to proceed overnight. After transfer, the membrane was carefully peeled from the gel and washed in 1× Sequencase Images Blocking Buffer (United States Biochemical) for two 15 minute intervals with gentle agitation. Three tenths of a ml of the buffer was used per cm² of membrane. A streptavidin-alkaline phosphatase conjugate (SAAP, United States Biochemical, Cleveland, Ohio) was added to a 1:3000 dilution directly to the blocking solution, and agitated for 15 minutes. The membrane was washed 3 times (5 min/wash). in 1× SAAP buffer (100 mM Tris-HCl, pH 10; 50 mM NaCl) with 0.1% SDS, using 0.5 mls/cm² of membrane. The membrane was then washed twice in 1× SAAP buffer without SDS, but containing 1 mM MgCl₂, drained thoroughly and placed in a heat sealable bag. Using a sterile pipet tip, 0.05 ml/cm² of CDPSTAR (Tropix, Bedford, Mass.) was added to the bag and distributed over the membrane for 5 minutes. The bag was drained of all excess liquid and air bubbles. The membrane was then exposed to X-ray film (Kodak XRP) for an initial 30 minute exposure. Exposure times were adjusted as necessary for resolution and clarity. The resulting autoradiograph is shown in FIG. 81.

In FIG. 81, the lane marked “M” contains biotinylated molecular weight markers obtained from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.) and include bands corresponding to lengths of 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 700, and 1000 nucleotides. Lanes 1 and 2 contain the reaction products from the no enzyme controls for the wild type and V143A mutant fragments, respectively. Lane 3 contains cleavage products from the sample containing the wild type fragment only. Lane 4 contains cleavage products from wild type and mutant fragments mixed in a 1:1 ratio. Lane 5 contains cleavage products from a reaction containing a 1:2 ratio of wild type to mutant fragment. Lane 6 contains reaction products present in a ratio of wild type to mutant of 1:9. Lane 7 contains cleavage products from a sample containing V143A mutant DNA only. Lane 8 contains cleavage products mixed at a ratio of wild type to mutant of 2:1. Lane 9 contains cleavage products mixed at a ratio of wild type to mutant 4:1. Lane 10 contains cleavage products mixed a ratio of wild type to mutant to 9:1.

The results shown in FIG. 81 demonstrate that the presence of different alleles can be detected in a mixed sample. Comparison of lanes 4-6 and lanes 8-10 with either lane 3 or lane 7 demonstrates that the lanes containing mixed reactions exhibit distinct differences from either sample alone. Specifically, in the 100 nucleotide region, there is a doublet in the wild type sample that shifts in the mutant (see discussion of FIG. 80 in Example 31). All three of these bands are present in the mixed samples (lanes 4-6 and lanes 8-10) whereas only one or the other pair is detectable in lanes 3 and 7.

EXAMPLE 34 Detection and Identification of Hepatitis C Virus Genotypes by CLEAVASE Fragment Length Polymorphism Analysis

Hepatitis C virus (HCV) infection is the predominant cause of post-transfusion non-A, non-B (NANB) hepatitis around the world. In additon, HCV is the major etiologic agent of hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC) and chronic liver disease world wide. Molecular biological analysis of the small (9.4 kb) RNA genome has showed that some regions of the genome are very highly conserved between isolates, while other regions are subject to fairly rapid mutation. These analyses have allowed these viruses to be divided into six basic genotype groups, and then further classified into several sub-types (Altamirano et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:1034 (1995)). These viral groups are associated with different geographical areas, and and accurate identification of the agent in outbreaks is important in montoring the disease. While only genotype 1 HCV has been observed in the United States, multiple HCV genotypes have been observed in both Europe and Japan. HCV genotype has also been associated with differential efficacy of treatment with interferon, with Group 1 infected individuals showing little response. The ability to identify the genotype of HCV present in an infected individual allows comparisons of the clinical outcomes from infection by the different types of HCV, and from infection by multiple types in a single individual. Pre-screening of infected individuals for the viral type will allow the clinician to make a more accurate diagnosis, and to avoid costly but fruitless drug treatment.

In order to develop a rapid and accurate method of typing HCV present in infected individuals, the ability of the CLEAVASE reaction to detect and distinguish between the major genotypes and subtypes of HCV was examined. Plasmids containing DNA derived from the conserved 5′ untranslated region of six different HCV RNA isolates were used to generate templates for analysis in the CFLP reaction. The HCV sequences contained within these six plasmids represent genotypes 1 (four sub-types represented; 1a, 1b, 1c and Δ1c), 2 and 3. The nomenclature of the HCV genotypes used is that of Simmonds et al. (as described in Altamirano et al., supra).

a) Generation of Plasmids Containing HCV Sequences

Six DNA fragments derived from HCV were generated by RT-PCR using RNA extracted from serum samples of blood donors; these PCR fragments were a gift of Dr. M. Altamirano (University of British Columbia, Vancouver). These PCR fragments represent HCV sequences derived from HCV genotypes 1a, 1b, 1c, Δ1c, 2c and 3a.

The RNA extraction, reverse transcription and PCR were performed using standard techniques (Altamirano et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:1034 (1995)). Briefly, RNA was extracted from 100 μl of serum using guanidine isothiocyanate, sodium lauryl sarkosate and phenol-chloroform (Inchauspe et al., Hepatology 14:595 (1991)). Reverse transcription was performed according to the manufacturer's instructions using a GeneAmp rTh reverse transcriptase RNA PCR kit (Perkin-Elmer) in the presence of an external antisense primer, HCV342. The sequence of the HCV342 primer is 5′-GGTTTTTCTTTGAGGTTTAG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:115). Following termination of the RT reaction, the sense primer HCV7 (5′-GCGACACTCCACCATAGAT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:116)) and magnesium were added and a first PCR was performed. Aliqouts of the first PCR products were used in the second (nested) PCR in the presence of primers HCV46 (5′-CTGTCTTCACGCAGAAAGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:117)) and HCV308 (5′-GCACGGTCTACGAGACCTC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:118)). The PCRs produced a 281 bp product which corresponds to a conserved 5′ noncoding region (NCR) region of HCV between positions −284 and −4 of the HCV genome (Altramirano et al., J Infect. Dis. 171:1034 (1995)).

The six 281 bp PCR fragments were used directly for cloning or they were subjected to an additional amplification step using a 50 μl PCR comprising approximately 100 fmoles of DNA, the HCV46 and HCV308 primers at 0.1 μM, 100 μM of all four dNTPs and 2.5 units of Taq polymerase in a buffer containing 10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 1.5 mM MgCl₂ and 0.1% TWEEN 20. The PCRs were cycled 25 times at 96° C. for 45 sec., 55° C. for 45 sec. and 72° C. for 1 min. Two microliters of either the original DNA samples or the reamplified PCR products were used for cloning in the linear pT7Blue T-vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) according to manufacturer protocol. After the PCR products were ligated to the pT7Blue T-vector, the ligation reaction mixture was used to transform competent JM109 cells (Promega). Clones containing the pT7Blue T-vector with an insert were selected by the presence of colonies having a white color on LB plates containing 40 μg/ml X-Gal, 40 μg/ml IPTG and 50 μg/ml ampicillin. Four colonies for each PCR sample were picked and grown overnight in 2 ml LB media containing 50 μg/ml carbenicillin. Plasmid DNA was isolated using the following alkaline miniprep protocol. Cells from 1.5 ml of the overnight culture were collected by centrifugation for 2 min. in a microcentrifuge (14K rpm), the supernatant was discarded and the cell pellet was resuspended in 50 μl TE buffer with 10 μg/ml RNAse A (Pharmacia). One hundred microliters of a solution containing 0.2N NaOH, 1% SDS was added and the cells were lysed for 2 min. The lysate was gently mixed with 100 μl of 1.32 M potassium acetate, pH 4.8, and the mixture was centifugated for 4 min. in a microcentrifuge (14K rpm); the pellet comprising cll debris was discarded. Plasmid DNA was precipitated from the supernatant with 200 μl ethanol and pelleted by centrifugation a microcentrifuge (14K rpm). The DNA pellet was air dried for 15 min. and was then redissolved in 50 μl TE buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.8, 1 mM EDTA).

To analyze the cloned HCV inserts, 1 μl of plasmid DNA (approximately 10 to 100 ng) reamplified in a 50 μl PCR using the HCV46 and HCV308 primers as described above with the exception that 30 cycles of amplification were employed. The PCR products were separated by electrophoresis on a 6% non-denaturing acrylamide gel (29:1 cross linked) in 0.5× TBE buffer; clones that gave rise to a 281 bp PCR product were selected for further analysis.

For sequencing purposes, plasmid DNA from selected clones was PEG purified as follows. To 50 μl of plasmid DNA in TE buffer (approximately 10-100 ng/μl), 25 1A of 5M NaCl and 10 , 20% PEG (M.W.8,000; Fisher) was added, mixed well, and the mixture was incubated on ice for 1 hour. The mixture was then centrifuged for 5 min in a table-top microcentrifuge (at 14K rpm), the pellet was removed and an additional 15 μl of 20% PEG was added to the supernatant. After incubation for 1 hour on ice, a second pellet was collected by centrifugation, the supernatant was discarded, and the pellet was redissolved in 20 μl H₂O. Two microliters of PEG-purified plasmid DNA (approximately 100 ng) was used in cycle-sequencing reactions using the FMOL DNA Sequencing System (Promega, Madison, Wis.) according to manufacturer protocol, in conjunction with the HCV46 or HCV308 primers. The HCV46 or HCV308 primers were biotinylated at the 5′ end using Oligonucleotide Biotin Labeling kit (Amersham, Arlington Heights, Ill.) prior to use in the sequencing reactions. Sequencing reactions were separated on 10% denaturing acrylamide gel, transferred on nylon membrane and visualized as described in Example 21.

Alternatively, DNA sequencing was done using either the Blue-T1 (5′-GATCTACTAGTCATATGGAT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:119)) and Blue-T2 (5′-TCGGTACCCGGGGATCCGAT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:120)) primers labeled at the 5′ end with tetra chloro fluorescein (TET) dye (Integrated DNA Technologies). In this case, the sequencing reactions were separated on a 10% denaturing acrylamide gel and the products were visualized using a FMBIO-100 Image Analyzer (Hitachi). The six HCV clones were termed HCV1.1, HCV2.1, HCV3.1, HCV4.2, HCV6.1 and HCV7.1; the double-stranded DNA sequence of these clones are listed in SEQ ID NOS:121-126, respectively. The sequence of the sense strand for each of the six HCV clones is shown as the top line in SEQ ID NOS:121-126. The sequence of the anti-sense strand for HCV clones HCV1.1, HCV2.1, HCV3.1, HCV4.2, HCV6.1 and HCV7.1 is listed in SEQ ID NOS:127-132, respectively.

The DNA sequences of each of the six HCV clones are aligned in FIG. 82. In FIG. 82, nucleotides which represent variations between the six HCV clones are indicated by bold type and underlining; dashes are used to indicate gaps introduced to maximize alignemnt between the sequences (necessary due to the insertion found in clone HCV4.2). This alignment shows that these six HCV clones represent six different HCV genotypes. HCV1.1 represents a genotype 1c HCV; HCV2.1 represents a genotype 1a HCV; HCV3.1 represents a genotype 1b HCV; HCV4.2 represents a genotype 1c HCV; HCV6.1 represents a genotype 2c HCV and HCV7.1 represents a genotype 3a HCV. For one sample, HCV4.2, an insertion of an “G” nucleotide was found at position 146 (relative to the protypical HCV; Altamirano et al., supra), since no insertion or deletions in the HCV NCR have been previously reported, a second independent clone derived from the PCR products corresponding to HCV4 was sequenced. This second HCV4 clone was found to have the same sequence as that shown for HCV4.2 in FIG. 82.

b) Preparation of HCV Substrates

Six double stranded substrate DNA were prepared for analysis in the CFLP reaction. The substrates were labelled at the 5′ end of either the sense or the anti-sense strand by the use of labeled primers in the PCR to permit CFLP analysis of each strand of the HCV DNA substrates.

To prepare PCR products for CFLP analysis, the HCV46 and HCV308 primers were 5′ end labeled with TMR dye using the ONLY BODIPY TMR Oligonucleotide Phosphate Labeling Kit (Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, Oreg.) according to manufacturer protocol. All six HCV 281 bp NCR sequences were PCR amplified using 10 ng of template and 30 cycles of amplification as described above in section a).

For sense strand analysis, the PCR was conducted using the HCV46 primer (SEQ ID NO:117) labeled with TMR and unlabeled HCV308 primer (SEQ ID NO:118). For antisense analysis, the PCR was conducted using unlabeled HCV46 primer (SEQ ID NO:117) and HCV308 primer (SEQ ID NO:118) labeled with TMR. The PCR products were purified by electrophoresis on a 6% denaturing acrylamide gel and eluted overnight as described above in Example 21. The gel-purified DNA substrates were redissolved in 20 μl H₂O at an approximate concentration of 100 fmoles/μl.

c) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

Cleavage reactions comprised 1 μl of TMR-labeled PCR products (approximately 100 fmoles of the double-stranded substrates) in a total volume of 10 μl containing 1× CFLP buffer (10 mM MOPS, pH 7.5; 0.5% each TWEEN 20 and NP-40) and 10 ng CLEAVASE BN enzyme. All components except the MnCl₂ were assembled in a volume of 8 μl. The reactions were heated to 95° C. for 15 seconds to denature the substrates and then quickly cooled to 55° C. The reaction were performed in either a thermocycler (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) programmed to heat to 95° C. for 15 seconds and then cool immediately to 55° C. or the tubes were placed manually in a heat block set at 95° C. and then transferred to a second heat block set at 55° C.

Once the tubes were cooled to the reaction temperature of 55° C., the cleavage reaction was started by the addition of 2 μl of 1 mM MnCl₂. After 2 minutes at 55° C., the reactions were stopped by the addition of 5 μl of a solution containing 95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA and 0.02% methyl violet.

Five microliters of each reaction mixture were heated at 85° C. for 2 min, and where than resolved by electrophoresis through a 12% denaturing polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross link) with 7M urea in a buffer of 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The gels were run at 33 watts for 1.5 hours. The labeled reaction products were visualized using the FMBIO-100 Image Analyzer (Hitachi), with the resulting fluoroimager scan shown in FIG. 83.

In FIG. 83, the CFLP patterns produced by cleavage of the six HCV samples labeled on the sense strand are shown in lanes 1-6; the CFLP patterns produced by cleavage of the six HCV samples labeled on the anti-sense strand are shown in lanes 7-12. The position of molecular weight markers is indicated on the left-hand side of the fluoroimager scan by the large arrowheads; the size of the markers is indicated in nucleotides.

The experiment presented in FIG. 83 demonstrates the ability of CFLP to differentiate six distinct hepatitis C viral subtypes. The six samples in the left hand side of the panel (lanes 1-6) were labeled on the 5′ end of the sense strand; the six on the right (lanes 7-12), on the 5′ end of the antisense strand. The first four samples in each set all contain samples amplified from HCV type 1. Subtypes a, b, and c are represented, as is a single base deletion of type 1c (i.e., Δ1c). Analysis of either strand points out numerous similarities as well as several distinctive differences between the subtypes. Most notable among the similarities on the sense strand are prominent bands marked A, B and C. Specifically, whereas bands B and C are evident in the patterns generated from both subtypes 1a and 1b (and are, in fact, more prominent in subtype 1b than in 1a), they are barely visible in subtype 1c. Band A, though present in all 4 of these samples, is more prominent in the patterns generated from subtypes 1c and 1a. Differences between subtypes 2c and 3a vs. all of the subtype 1 samples, are evident in the region between 50 and 100 nt (compare bands D and E) on the sense strand and between the 80 and 150 nt on the antisense strand (compare bands F-J). Viral type 2 gives rise to the most significantly altered CFLP pattern, while type 3 appears to be similar to type 1; these relationships appear to be consistent with the relative number of sequence differences between the different isolates.

The results shown in FIG. 83 demonstrate that the CFLP method provides a simple and rapid method to determine the genotype of HCV strains. This method will facilitate the diagnosis of HCV infection, permit appropriate treatment of HCV-infected patients, and aid in the moinitoring of HCV outbreaks.

EXAMPLE 35 Detection of Mutations Associated with Antiobiotic Resistance in Mycobacterium Tuberculosis

In the past decade there has been a tremendous resurgence in the incidence of tuberculosis in this country and throughout the world. Worldwide, the number of new cases reported annually is forecast to increase from 7.5 million in 1990 to 10.2 million by the year 2000. An alarming feature of this resurgence in tuberculosis is the increasing numbers of patients presenting with strains of M. tuberculosis which are rewistant to one or more antituberculosis drugs (i.e., multi-drug resistant tuberculosis (MDR-TB)).

Resistance to either or both of the antibiotics rifampin (rif) and isoniazid (inh) is the standard by which M. tuberculosis strains are judged to be multi-drug reistant. Both because of their potent bactericidal activities and because acquisition of primary resistance to these drugs is rare (the spontaneous mutation rate of resistance to rifampin is approximately 10-8 and to isoniazid, 1 08 to 10-9), until very recently, these two antibiotics were among the most powerful front-line drugs used to comabt the advance and spread of tuberculosis. However surveys of tuberculosis patients in the U.S. reveal that as many as one-third were infected with strains resistant to one or more antituberculosis drugs; greater than 25% of the M. tuberculosis cultures isolated were resistant to isoniazid and 19% were resistant to both isoniazid and rifampin (Frieden et al., New Eng. J. Med. 328:521 (1993)).

As discussed above (Description of the Invention), reistance to rifampin is associated with mutation of the rpoB gene in M. tuberculosis. While the exact mechanism of resistance to isoniazid is not clear, the majority (as many as 80%) of inh^(r) mutations occur in the katG and inhA genes of M. tuberculosis. To investigate whether CFLP could be used to detect mutations in the genes involved in MDR-TB, DNA fragments were amplified from the rpoB and katG genes of M tuberculosis. DNA fragments derived from wild-type (i.e., antibiotic-sensitive) or mutant (i.e., antibiotic-resistant) strains of M. tuberculosis were subjected to CFLP analysis.

a) CFLP Analysis of Mutations in the RpoB Gene of M. tuberculosis

i) Generation of Plasmids Containing RpoB Gene Sequences

Genomic DNA isolated from wild-type M. tuberculosis or M. tuberculosis strains containing mutations in the rpoB gene associated with rifampin resistance were obtained from Dr. T. Schinnick (Centers for Disase Control and Prevention, Atlanta, Ga.). The rifampin resistant strain #13 (91-3083) contains a tyrosine residue at codon 451 of the rpoB gene in place of the histidine residue found in the wild-type strain (i.e., H451Y); this mutation is is present in 28% of rifampin resistant TB isolates. The H451Y mutation is hereinafter refered to as mutant 1. The rifampin resistant strain #56 (91- 2763) contains a luecine residue at codon 456 of the rpoB gene in place of the serine residue found in the wild-type strain (i.e., S456L); this mutation is present in 52% of rifampin resistant TB isolates. The S456L mutation is hereinafter refered to as mutant 2.

A 620 bp region of the TB rpoB gene was amplified using the PCR from DNA derived from the wild-type and mutant 1 and mutant 2 strains. The primers used to amplifiy the rpoB gene sequences were PolB-5A (5′-ATCAACATCCGGCCGGTGGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:133)) and PolB-5B (5′-GGGGCCTCGCTACGGACCAG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:134)); these PCR primers amplify a 620 bp region of the rpoB gene which spans both the H451Y and S456L mutations (Miller et al., Antimicrob. Agents Chemother., 38:805 (1994)). The PCRs were conducted in a final reaction volume of 50 μl containing the PolB-5A and PolB-5B primers at 1 μM, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40 and 60 μM of all four dNTPs. The reaction mixture was heated at 95° C. for 3 min. Amplification was started by the addition of 2.5 units of Taq polymerase and was continued for 35 cycles at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min.

To clone the PCR-amplified fragments, 1 μl of each PCR product was used for ligation in the linear pT7Blue T-vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.). The ligation products were used to transform competent JM109 cells and clones containing pT7Blue T-vector with an insert were selected by white color on LB plates containing 40 μg/ml X-Gal, 40 μg/ml IPTG and 50 μg/ml ampicillin. For each PCR sample (i.e., wild-type and mutants 1 and 2), five independent colonies were picked and grown overnight in 2 ml of LB media containing 50 μg/ml carbenicillin. Plasmid DNA was isolated using the alkaline miniprep protocol described above in Example 34.

To analyze the cloned fragments, 1 μl of plasmid DNA from each clone was amplified by PCR using 50 μl reaction containing the PolB-5A and PolB-5B primers at 1 μM, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 μM of all 4 dNTPs and 2.5 units of Taq polymerase. The PCRs were cycled 35 times at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min. The PCR products were separated by electrophoresis on a 6% native polyacrylamide gel in 0.5× TBE buffer and clones that gave rise to a 620 bp fragment were selected for further analysis.

For sequencing purposes, plasmid DNA from selected clones was PEG-purified as described in Example 34. Two microliters of PEG-purified plasmid DNA (approximately 100 ng) was used for cycle-sequencing with FMOL kit (Promega, Madison, Wis.) in conjunction with the PolB-5A and PolB-5B primers containing a biotin moity at the 5′ end. Biotinylation of the primers was performed using an Oligonucleotide Biotin Labeling kit (Amersham). Sequencing reactions were separated in a 8% denaturing polyacrylamide gel, transferred to a nylon membrane and visualized as described above in Example 21. The DNA sequences of the 620 bp rpoB gene fragment derived from the wild-type, mutant 1 and mutant 2 strains are listed in SEQ ID NOS:135-137. The sequence of the sense strand for each of the three TB strains is shown as the top line in SEQ ID NOS:135-137. The sequence of the anti-sense strand for the wild-type, mutant 1 and mutant 2 TB strains is listed in SEQ ID NOS:138-140, respectively.

ii) Preparation of M. tuberculosis rpoB Gene Substrates

In order to generate substrates for use in CFLP reactions, the cloned 620 bp fragment derived from the wild type and mutants 1 and 2 rpoB gene were amplified using the PCR. The PCRs were conducted using one primer of the primer pair labeled at the 5′ end so that the resulting PCR product would permit the analysis of either the sense or anti-sense strand of the rpoB gene fragmnets. In order to generate substrates labelled on the anti-sense strand, ten nanograms of plasmid DNA from the sequenced clones was used as the template in 50 μl reactions containing 1 μM of each the PolB-5A primer (unlabelled) and PolB-5B primer biotinylated at the 5′ end using Oligonucleotide Biotin Labeling kit (Amersham), 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 μM of all 4 dNTPs and 2.5 units of Taq polymerase. The reactions were cycled 35 times at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min. The resulting 620 bp PCR products containing a biotin-labeled antisense strand were gel-purified as described in Example 21. The purified fragments were dissolved in 20 μl H₂O.

To generate substrates labelled on the sense strand of the 620 bp fragment of rpoB gene fragments (wild-type and mutats 1 and 2), the PCRs were conducted using 1 μM each PolB-5A primer 5′ end labeled with TMR dye using ONLY BODIPY TMR Oligonucleotide Phosphate Labeling Kit (Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, Oreg.) and unlabeled PolB-5B primer. The PCR reactions also contained 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 μM of all 4 dNTPs, 5 units of Taq polymerase and 10 ng of plasmid DNA from the sequenced clones as a template in a final volume of 100 μl. The reactions were cycled for a total of 35 cycles comprising 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min.

In addition to the above PCR conditions, the PCR reactions were also conducted using dUTP in place of dTTP to generate uridine-containing PCR fragments. Uridine-containing PCR fragments have become the standard type of PCR fragment analyzed in clinical laboratories. In order to demonstrate that uridine-containing PCR fragmrnts can be used to produce distinct CFLP patterns from substrates which vary by a single base pair change within a 620 bp fragment, rpoB gene fragments containing a 5′ TMR label on the sense strand and uridine in place of thymidine were generated as follows. Uridine-containing 620 bp fragments (wild-type and mutants 1 and 2) were amplified according to the PCR protocol described above for the generation of fragments labelled at the 5′ end of the sense strand with TMR with the exception that 2.5 mM MgCl₂ was used in place of 1.5 mM MgCl₂ and 100 μM dATP, 100 μM dCTP, 100 μM dGTP and 200 μM dUTP were used in place of the mixture containing 60 μM each of all 4 dNTPs (i.e., dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP).

The 620 bp PCR products containing a TMR-labeled sense strand (either uridine- or thymidine-containing) were purified in 6% denaturing gel as described above, eluted overnight, precipitated with ethanol and redissolved in 20 μl H₂O as described in Example 21, for a concentration of approximately 15 fmoles/μl.

iii) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

Cleavage reaction conditions for analysis of the 620 bp rpoB fragments containing a biotin-labelled antisense strand were as follows. Six microliters of biotin labeled PCR product were combined with 1 μl of 10× CFLP buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.5% each TWEEN 20 and NP-40) and 25 ng CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Prior to the initiation of the cleavage reaction, the DNA mixtures were denatured by incubation at 95° C. for 10 sec. The reactions were then cooled to 60° C. and reaction was started by the addition of 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂. The cleavage reactions were conducted at 60° C. for 2 min. Cleavage reactions were stopped after 2 min. by adding 5 μl of STOP solution (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA and 0.02% each bromphenol blue and xylene cyanol). Six microliters of each sample were resolved by electrophoresis on a 6% denaturing polyacrylamide gel and labeled fragments were visualized as described in Example 21. The resulting autoradiogram is shown in FIG. 84.

In FIG. 84, the lane marked “M” contains biotinylated molecular weight markers obtained from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.) and include bands corresponding to lengths of 200, 300, 400, 500 nucleotides. The size of the markers and of the uncleaved rpoB substrates (620) is indicated on the left-hand side of the autoradiograph using large arrowheads. Lanes 1-3 contain the reaction products generated by the cleavage of the mutant 1, wild-type and mutant 2 substrates labelled on the anti-sense strand, respectively. The distance of the point mutation (relative to the wild-type sequence) from the 5′ end label was 511 nucleotides for the mutant 1 substrate and 499 nucleotides for the mutant 2 substrate.

The results shown in FIG. 84 demonstrate that similar, but distinctly different patterns of cleavage were generated from the each of the rpoB substrates labelled on the anti-sense strand. In comparision with the cleavage pattern generated by the wild-type substrate, the pattern generated by cleavage of the mutant 1 substrate shows a disappearance of Band A. A comparision of the pattern generated by cleavage of the wild-type and mutant 2 substrates shows that the mutant 2 substrate has a significant reduction of insensity of Band B. Thus, the two mutants can be distinguished from the wild-type and from each other.

Cleavage reaction conditions for analysis of the 620 bp rpoB fragments containing a TMR-labelled sense strand were as follows. Four microliters of TMR-labeled PCR product were cleaved as described above. Cleavage reactions were stopped after 2 min. by adding 5 μl 95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA and 0.02% of methyl violet (Sigma).

The reactions were heated to 85° C. for 2 min. and five microliters of each reaction mixture were resolved by electrophoresis through a 12% denaturing polyacrylamide gel (19:1 cross link) with 7M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris-Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The gel was run at 33 W (watts) for 1.5 hours. The labeled reaction products were visualized using the FMBIO-100 Image Analyzer (Hitachi) with the resulting fluoroimager scan shown in FIG. 85, PAnel A. the gel was then electrophoresed for another 1 hour, and the second scan is shown in Panel B.

In FIG. 85, two panels, A and B, are shown. Panel B represents a scan of the same gel shown in Panel A following a longer period of electrophoresis than that shown in Panel A. Thus, Panel B serves to spread out the banding pattern seen in the upper portion of Panel A (lines connecting Panels A and B show the region of expansion). In FIG. 85, Panels A and B, lanes 1-4 contain the reaction products produced by cleavage of thymidine-containing substrates having a TMR-label on the sense strand derived from the mutant 1, wild-type, mutant 2 and a mixture of the wild-type and mutant 2 substrates, respectively. Lane 5 of Panels A and B contains the 157 bp fragment derived from exon 4 of the tyrosinase gene (SEQ ID NO:40) labeled with TET as a marker. Lanes 6-9 of Panels A and B contain the reaction products produced by cleavage of uridine-containing substrates having a TMR-label on the sense strand derived from the mutant 1, wild-type, mutant 2 and a mixture of the wild-type and mutant 2 substrates, respectively. Mixtures of the wild-type and mutant 2 substrates (lanes 4 and 9) were generated by mixting together 5 μl of each substrate after the cleavage reaction; 6 Al of the mixture was then loaded on the gel. The distance of the point mutation (relative to the wild-type sequence) from the 5′ end label was 100 nucleotides for the mutant 1 substrate and 116 nucleotides for the mutant 2 substrate.

The results shown in FIG. 85 demonstrate that similar, but distinctly different patterns of cleavage were generated from the each of the rpoB substrates labelled on the sense strand. The left hand set of each panel contains CFLP patterens generated from PCR products containing dNTPs, while the right hand side contains CFLP patterns generated from PCR products in which dUTP was substituted for dTTP. Comparision of the CFLP patterns generated from dNTP-containing amplicons of mutant 1 and wild-type reveals a marked reduction in intensity of a band approximately 80 nt from the labeled 5′ end (band A), in the vicinity of the sequence change in this mutant (100 bp from the labeled 5′ end). In addition, a band migrating at approximately 200-250 nt from the labeled 5′ end (band B) is missing in mutant 1. In contrast, comparision of the patterns generated from wild-type and muatnt 2 reveals the loss of a band 120 nt from the labeled 5′ end (band C). Furthermore, examination of the region of the gel corresponding to 120 nt shows, particularly in Panel B, that band D is shifted downward in mutant 2 relative to wild-type. In Panel B, another band, migrating just above band D (labeled band D′) also appears to be shifted downward in mutant 2 relative to wild-type. Lane 4 of each panel, in which aliquots from the wild-type and mutant CFLP reactions were mixed prior to electrophoresis demonstrates that this shift (in band D′) in mutant 2 is real and not due to an electrophoresis artifact.

Examination of the CFLP patterns generated from the dUTP-containing amplicons demonstrates that the ability to distinguish these mutants from one another, as well as from the wt, is not adversely affected by substitution of dUTP for dTTP and may, in fact, be enhanced. In this example, both mutants 1 and 2 are more readily distinguished from the wt when the patterns are generated from amplicons containing dUTP than dTTP. In the right-hand portion of panel A, comparison of the lanes containing mutant 1 and wt reveals several distinctive differences between the two amplicons, while others are new and unanticipated. Specifically, band A is reduced in intensity in the mutant, as compared to the wt, in much the same way that it is in the left-hand portion of this panel. A band migrating at approximately 1 10 nt (band E) appears to be missing from the mutant, as does a band at approximately 250 nt (compare to band B in the left-hand portion of the gel). In addition, the strong band labeled F, while not noticeably different in the three samples containing dTTP, is much stronger in the wt pattern generated from dUTP-containing amplicons than it is in the mutants. Comparison of the patterns generated from wt and mutant 2 also reveals a number of pronounced differences. Most notably, a band migrating at approximately 60 nt appears in mutant 2 (band G), as does a complex of 2 new bands migrating at approximately 150 nt (band H). Interestingly, while some of the elements that make each of these patterns distinct from one another are different if dUTP is substituted for dTTP in the PCR amplification, the vast majority of the cleavage fragments are identical in the two experiments. This result suggests that substitution of dUTP results in subtle alterations in the single-stranded DNA substrate which may be the result of altered stability of secondary structures or an altered affinity of CLEAVASE for secondary structures containing modified nucleotides. These differences in CLEAVASE-based recognition of secondary structures in DNA fragments containing dUTP provides an unexpected benefit of using this nucleotide substitution.

b) CFLP Analysis of Mutations in the KatG Gene of M. tuberculosis

i) Generation of Plasmids Containing KatG Gene Sequences

Genomic DNA isolated from wild-type M. tuberculosis or M. tuberculosis strains conatining mutations in the katG gene associated with isoniazid resistance were obtained from Dr. J. Uhl (Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minn.). These four strains are termed wild-type, S315T, R463L and S315T;R463L (Cockerill, III et al, J. Infect. Dis. 171:240 (1995)). Strain S315T contains a G to C mutation in codon 315 of the wild-type katG gene. Strain R463L contains a G to T mutation in codon 463 of the wild-type gene and strain S315T;R463L contains both the G to C mutation in codon 315 and the G to T mutation in codon 463.

A 620 bp region of the M. tuberculosis katG gene was amplified using the PCR from DNA derived from the above four strains. The primers used to amplify the katG gene sequences were KatG904 (5′-AGCTCGTATGGCACCGGAAC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:141)) and KatG1523 (5′-TTGACCTCCCACCCGACTTG-3′ (SEQ ID NO:142)); these primers amplify a 620 bp region of katG gene which spans both the S315T and R463L mutations. The PCRs were conducted in a final reaction volume of 100 μl and contained the KatG904 and KatG1523 primers at 0.5 μM, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 tiM of all 4 dNTPs. The reaction mixtures were heated at 95° C. for 3 min, then amplification was started with addition of 5 units of Taq polymerase and continued for 35 cycles at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min.

To clone the PCR-amplified katG fragments, 1 μl of each PCR product was used for ligation into the linear pT7Blue T-vector (Novagen, Madison, Wis.). The ligation products were used to transform competent JM109 cells and clones containing pT7Blue T-vector with an insert were selected by white color on LB plates containing 40 μg/ml X-Gal, 40 μg/ml IPTG and 50 μg/ml ampicillin. For each of the four PCR samples, four colonies were picked and grown overnight in 2 ml LB media containing 50 μg/ml carbenicillin. Plasmid DNA was isolated using the alkaline miniprep protocol described in Example 34.

To analyze the cloned katG fragments, 1 μl of plasmid DNA from each clone was amplified by PCR using 100 μl reactions containing the KatG904 and KatG1523 primers at 0.5 μM, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 μM of all 4 dNTPs and 5 units of Taq polymerase. The PCRs were cycled 35 times at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min. PCR products were separated by electrophoresis on a 6% native polyacrylamide gel in 0.5× TBE buffer and clones that gave rise to a 620 bp fragment were selected for further analysis.

For sequencing purposes, plasmid DNA from selected clones was PEG-purified according to the protocol described in Exmple 34. Two microliters of plasmid DNA (approximately 10 ng) was used for cycle-sequencing with FMOL kit (Promega, Madison, Wis.) in conjunction with the KatG904 and KatG1523 primers containing a biotin moity at the 5′ end. Biotinylation of the primers was performed using an Oligonucleotide Biotin Labeling kit (Amersham). Sequencing reactions were separated in a 8% denaturing polyacrylamide gel, transferred to a nylon membrane and visualized as described above in Example 21. The DNA sequences of the 620 bp katG gene fragments from the wild-type and mutant strains S315T, R463L and S315T;R463L are listed in SEQ ID NOS:143-146, respectively. The sequence of the sense strand for each of the four katG gene fragments is shown as the top line in SEQ ID NOS:143-146, espectively. The sequence of the anti-sense strand of the 620 bp katG gene fragments from the wild-type and mutant strains S315T, R463L and S315T;R463L is listed in SEQ ID NOS:147-150, respectively.

ii) Preparation of M. tuberculosis KatG Gene Substrates

In order to generate substrates for use in CFLP reactions, the cloned 620 bp fragments derived from the wild-type and S315T, R463L and S315T;R463L M tuberculosis strains were amplified using the PCR. The PCRs were conducted in a final reaction volume of 100 μl and conatined 0.5 μM each KatG904 and KatG1523 primers, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.3, 50 mM KCl, 0.05% each TWEEN-20 and NONIDET P-40, 60 μM of all 4 dNTPs, 5 units of Taq polymerase and 10 ng of plasmid DNA from the sequenced clones as a template. The reactions were cycled 35 times at 95° C. for 1 min, 60° C. for 1 min and 72° C. for 2 min.

To obtain 620 bp PCR fragments of the katG gene having a biotin label on the sense strand, and unlabeled KatG1523 primer (SEQ ID NO:142) and 5′-biotinylated KatG904 primer (SEQ ID NO:141) was used in the PCR; biotinylation was achieved using the Oligonucleotide Biotin Labeling kit (Amersham). To produce the same fragments having the TMR label on the antisense strand, unlabeled KatG904 (SEQ ID NO:141) and TMR-labeled KatG1523 (SEQ ID NO:142) primers were used in the PCR. Amplified PCR products were purified on a 6% denaturing gel, eluted overnight, precipitated with ethanol and redissolved in 50 μl H₂O as described in Example 21.

iii) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

The cleavage reaction conditions for analysis of katG substrates labelled on the sense strand were as follows. Five microliters of biotin labeled PCR product were combined with 1 μl of 10× CFLP buffer (100 mM MOPS, pH 7.5, 0.5% each TWEEN 20 and NP-40) and 25 ng CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Prior to the initiation of the cleavage reaction, the DNA mixtures were denatured by incubation at 95° C. for 10 sec. The reactions were then cooled to 50° C. and the reaction was started by the addition of 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂. The cleavage reactions were incubated for 2 min. at 50° C. and were stopped by adding 5 μl of a solution containing 95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA and 0.02% each bromphenol blue and xylene cyanol. Four and one-half microliters of each sample were run on a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel and labeled fragments were visualized following transfer to a nylon memebrane as described in Example 21. The resulting autoradiogram is shown in FIG. 86.

In FIG. 86, lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers obtained from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.) and include bands corresponding to lengths of 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 700, and 1000 nucleotides; the size of the markers is indicated by the use of large arrowheads. Lanes 1-4 contain the reaction products obtained by incubating the R463L, R463L;S315T, S315T and wild-type katG substrates in the presense of CLEAVASE BN enzyme, respectively. The mutation distance from the 5′ end label is 485 nucleotides for the R463L mutation and 41 nucleotides for the S315T mutation when the label is present on the sense strand.

The results shown in FIG. 86 demonstrate that similar, but distinctly different patterns of cleavage were generated from the wild-type and S315L mutant (seen in both the S315T and S315;R463L substrates) katG substrates labelled on the sense strand. Comparision of the CFLP pattern for wild-type fragment (lane 4) shows that the S315T mutation (seen in both mutants R463L;S315T and S315T; lanes 2 and 3) results in disappearance of Band B which is located around 40 nucleotides from the end label in the wild-type substrate. The disappearance of Band B correlates very well with the distance of S315T mutation from the 5′ end (41 nucleotides from the 5′ end label on the sense strand). Subsequent experiments have demonstrated that the R463L mutant can be distinguished from wild-type by a mobility shift in a band migrating at approximately 500 nt from the 5′ end label on the sense strand (the band shifts downward in the R463L mutant), but is difficult to resolve in many gels systems.

The cleavage reaction conditions for analysis of katG substrates labeled on the anti-sense strand were as described for the sense strand. Four and one-half microliters of each sample were run on a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel and labeled fragments were visualized using the Hitachi FMBIO-100 fluoroimager as described in Example 35(a)(iii). The resulting scan is shown in FIG. 87.

In FIG. 87, lanes marked “M” contain plasmid pUC19 DNA digested with MspI and 3′ end labeled with fluorescein ddUTP using terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase as described in Example 10. This marker includes bands corresponding to lengths of 110/111, 147, 190, 242, 331, 404, 489 and 501 bp. Additional marker bands of 26, 34, and 67 bp are not visible in this figure; the size of the markers is indicated by the use of large arrowheads. Lanes 1-4 contain the reaction products obtained by incubating the R436L, S315T;R463L, S315T, and wild-type katG substrates in the presense of CLEAVASE BN enzyme, respectively. The location of the single base mutation from the 5′ end label is 136 nucleotides for the R463L mutation and 580 nucleotides for the S315T mutation when the label is present on the anti-sense strand.

The results shown in FIG. 87 demonstrate that wild-type can be distinguished from mutants containing the R463L substitution on the anti-sense strand. Comparison of the lanes containing the S315T;R463L double mutant or the R463L mutant by itself demonstrates that the R463L mutation is associated with the presence of a strong band migrating at approximately 130 nt (band A). This result, taken with that presented in FIG. 86, demonstrates that all three of these mutants can be distinguished from one another, as well as from wild type, by CFLP analysis.

The CFLP technology offers cost benefits by reducing gel electrophoresis processing time from 12-18 hours down to 5 to 10 minutes. Adapting the readout to multi-lane Fluorescence Image Detectors allows for an expanded volume of work by allowing simultaneous processing of up to 48 reactions. The consequent decrease in turnaround time in performing the analyses reduces the turnaround time of reporting patient results from days to hours, or, as in the case of MDR-TB patients, from weeks to hours. Early detection of MDR-TB can save thousands of dollars per patient by reducing the expense of extended stays in isolation wards, spent while testing various antibiotic treatments for efficacy.

EXAMPLE 36 Rapid Identification of Bacterial Strains by CFLP Analysis

The results shown above demonstrated that CFLP™ analysis can be used to detect the presence of wild-type and drug-resistant mutations of M. tuberculosis by examining portions of gene associated with drug resistance (e.g., rpoB and katG). In order to examine whether the CFLP analysis could be used as a method of detecting and indentifying a wide variety of microorganisms, CFLP analysis was conducted using substrates derived from bacterial 16S rRNA genes.

Bacterial 16S rRNA genes vary throughout the phylogenetic tree; these genes do contain segments which are conserved at the species, genus or kingdom level. These features have been exploited to generate primers containing concensus sequences which flank regions of variability. These primers have been used to amplify segments of bacterial 16S rRNA genes which are then characterized by either Southern blot hybridization (Greisen et al., J. Clin. Microbiol. 32:335 (1994)) or SSCP analysis (Widjojoatmondjo et al., J. Clin. Microbiol. 32:3002 (1994)). These types of analysis, while faster than traditional culturing methods, are at best limited to the differentiation of species within a particular genus and higher bacterial taxons. However, it is often desirable to differentiate between different strains of the same species. For example, a given species may contain subspecies which comprise harmless as well as pathogenic organisms. In order to develop a technique which would allow the differentiation between species and/or subspecieis, CFLP analysis was applied to segments derived from bacterial 16S rRNA genes.

a) Bacterial Strains

Table 3 below lists the bacterial strains used in this study. These strains were derived from the ATCC strains listed below with the exception of Desulfurococcus amylolyticus Strain Z-533 which was derived from a deposit obtained from the Deutsche Sammlung von Mikroorganismen (DSM). TABLE 3 ORGANISM STRAIN NO. CHARACTERISTICS E. coli ATCC 11303 Strain B E. coli ATCC 14948 Derived from E. coli strain K-12 E. coli Serotype O157: ATCC 43895 Produces Shiga-like toxins H7 I and II Campylobacter jejuni ATCC 33291 Isolated from human stool subsp. jejuni Shigella dysenteriae ATCC 29027 Isolated from human stool Serotype 2 Salmonella choleraesuis ATCC 6539 Used for germicide testing subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 33591 Methicillin-resistant subsp. aureus S. aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 33592 Gentamicin-and methicillin-resistant S. aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 13565 Produces enterotoxin A and large amounts of beta-hemolysin Staphylococcus hominis ATCC 29885 Methicillin control for MIC testing Staphylococcus warneri ATCC 17917 Used for soap germicide testing Desulfurococcus STRAIN 3822 Thermophilic archaebacterium amylolyticus

The strains listed in Table 3 represent pathogenic microorganisms with the exception of E. coli strains B and K-12 and Desulfurococcus amylolyticus. Desulfurococcus amylolyticus was included in this study to determine whether the concensus primers, whose design was based upon known rRNA gene sequences, could also be used to amplify rRNA gene fragments sequences from archeabacterial species whose rRNA gene sequences have not been reported.

The strains listed in Table 3 were selected to provide representatives from several different genera (e.g., Escherichia, Shigella, Salmonella, Campylobacter, etc.) as well as to provide several representatives of different species (or subspecies) within a given genus. For example, three different strains of E. coli were chosen so that the consistency (or lack thereof) of the CFLP banding pattern generated by cleavage of an rRNA gene substrate could be exmained between species within a given genus. In addition, E. coli Serotype O157:H7 was examined as this strain has been implicated in hemorragic colitis outbreaks. It was of interest to examine whether the CFLP pattern observed from clevage of a rRNA gene substrate from E. coli strains B or K-12 differed from that produced by cleavage of a rRNA gene substrate from E. coli Serotype O157:H7.

Table 4 below describes the phylogenic relationship between the strains used in this example. TABLE 4 Phylogenetic position of strains from Prokaryotic Small SubUnit rRNA Taxonomic List¹ 1 ARCHAEA 1.2 CRENARCHAEOTA 1.2.1 CRENARCHAEOTA-GROUP-I Desulfurococcus amylolyticus 2 BACTERIA 2.13 PURPLE-BACTERIA 2.13.3 GAMMA-SUBDIVISION 2.13.3.15 ENTERICS AND RELATIVES 2.13.3.15.2 ESCHERICHIA-SALMONELLA ASSEMBLAGE Escherichia coli Strain B Escherichia coli Strain K-12-derived Escherichia coli Serotype O157: H7 Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi 2.13.5 EPSILON-SUBDIVISION 2.13.5.2 CAMPYLOBACTER AND RELATIVES Campylobacter jejuni subsp. jejuni 2.15 GRAM-POSITIVE PHYLUM 2.15.5 BACILLUS-LACTOBACILLUS-STREPTOCOCCUS SUBDIVISION 2.15.5.10 STAPHYLOCOCCUS GROUP 2.15.5.10.2 STAPHYLOCOCCUS SUBGROUP Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 33591 Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 33592 Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 13565 Staphylococcus hominis Staphylococcus warneri ¹Data derived from the Ribosomal Database Project; available on the Inernet at http://rdp.life.uiuc.edu/index.html; Maidak et al, Nucleic Acids Res., 22: 3485 (1994).

b) Growth of Microorganisms

In order to minimise handling of the pathogenic strains, the microorganisms were grown on slant cultures or on plates rather than in liquid culture.

i) Growth of Escherichia, Shigella, Salmonella, and Staphylococcus Species

All strains were derived from the ATCC strains listed above in Table 3 as follows. A loopful of a culture previously frozen in Trypticase Soy Broth and 15% glycerol (Remel Corp., Lenexa, Kans. Cat. 06-5024) was subcultured onto a trypticase soy agar slant (Remel, Cat. 06-4860). The cultures were incubated overnight at 37° C.

ii) Growth of Campylobacter Species

A loopful of a culture previously frozen in Trypticase Soy Broth and 15% glycerol (Remel Corp., Lenexa, Kans. Cat. 06-5024) was subcultured onto Campylobacter Agar supplemented with 10% sheep blood, amphotericin B, cephalothin, trimethoprim, vancomycin, and polymyxin B (BBL, Cat. 21727). Inoculated plates were sealed in Campy microaerophilic pouches (BBL, Cat. 4360656) and incubated at 42° C. for 3 days.

c) Extraction of Genomic DNA from Microorganisms

For each bacterial sample, 300 μl of TE buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl 1 (pH 8.0 at 25° C.), 1 mM EDTA) and 300 μl phenol:cloroform:isoamyl alcohol (25:24:1) were placed in a 1.5 ml microfuge tube. This combination is referred to as the extraction buffer. A loopful (approximately 0.1 ml) of the desired bacterial strain was removed from a slant culture or plate and combined with the extraction buffer in a 1.5 ml microfuge tube and the contents were vortexed for two minutes. The extracted DNA present in the aqueous phase was processed for further purification as described below.

Samples of E. coli and C. jejuni strains were ethanol precipitated and dissolved in 50 μl TE buffer. The samples were then treated with 0.5 μg RNase A at 37° C. for 30 min. DNA was precipitated with ethanol, collected by centrifugation and dissolved in 200 μl 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 8.0 at 25° C.).

Samples of Shigella, Salmonella, and Staphylococcus strains were concentrated using a MICROCON 30 filter (Amicon) to 50 μl and then transferred to TE buffer using MICROSPIN S-200 HR gel filtration columns (Pharmacia Biotech). The samples were then treated with 0.5 μg RNase A at 37° C. for 80 min. DNA was precipitated with ethanol, collected by centrifugation and dissolved in 200 μl 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 8.0 at 25° C.).

Genomic DNA of E. coli Strain B (ATCC 11303) was obtained from Pharmacia Biotech (Piscataway, N.J.; Cat. 27-4566-01, Lot 411456601). The DNA was dissolved in 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 8.0 at 25° C.).

Genomic DNA from Desulfurococcus amylolyticus Strain Z-533 (DSM 3822) was isolated and purified using the standard technique of cesium chloride centrifugation. (Bonch-Osmolovskaya, et al., Microbiology (Engl. Transl. of Mikrobiologiya) 57:78 (1988)).

The concentration of the genomic DNA preparations was determined by measuring the OD₂₆₀ of the preparations.

d) Design of Primer for the Amplification of 16s rRNA Genes of Bacterial Species

Primers and probes have been reported which allow the amplification or detection of 16S rRNA sequences from a wide variety of bacterial strains. These oligonucleotide primers or probes represent consensus sequences derived from a comparision of the 16s rRNA gene sequences from a variety of eubacterial species. For example, oligonucleotide primers suitable for either PCR amplifcation or dot blot hybridization of bacterial rRNA gene sequences have been reported (e.g., PCT Publication WO 90/15157; Widjojoatmodjo et al., J. Clin. Microbiol. 32:3002 (1994)). Typically the conserved primer sequences are designed to flank nonconserved regions of the 16s rRNA gene with species-specific sequences.

A number of previously published conscensus primers derived from 16S rRNA gene sequences were examined for the ability to produce substrates for use in CFLP reactions. Primers 1638, 1659 and 1743 were described in PCT Publication WO 90/15157. Primer ER10 was described in Widjojoatmodjo et al., supra. Primers SB-1, SB-3 and SB-4 represent new primers (i.e., not previously published). The primers used in this example are listed in Table 5 below. TABLE 5 Primers for PCR Amplification of 16S rRNA Genes SEQ ID PRIMER NO: SEQUENCE 1638 151 5′-AGAGTTTGATCCTGGCTCAG-3′ ER10 152 5′-GGCGGACGGGTGAGTAA-3′ 1659 153 5′-CTGCTGCCTCCCGTAGGAGT-3′ SB-4 154 5′-ATGACGTCAAGTCATCATGGCCCTTACGA-3′ 1743 155 5′-GTACAAGGCCCGGGAACGTATTCACCG-3′ SB-1 156 5′-GCAACGAGCGCAACCC-3′ SB-3 157 5′-ATGACGTCAAGTCATCATGGCCCTTA-3′

The oligonucleotide primers were obtained from Integrated DNA Technologies, Inc. The oligonucleotides were dissolved in 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 8 at 25° C.) at a concentration of 20 μM. Two sets of primers were synthesized; one set having an OH group at the 5′ end (i.e., unlabelled primers) and the other set having the fluorescent dye TET (tetrachlorinated analog of 6-carboxyfluorescein, Applied Biosystems) at the 5′ end (i.e., TET-labelled primers). TET-labelled primers are indicated by theuse of “TET” as a suffix to the primer name (for example, TET-1638 indicates the 1638 primer having a 5′ TET label).

The location of each of the primers listed in Table 5 is shown along the sequence of the E. coli rrsE gene (encodes a 16S rRNA) in FIG. 88. In FIG. 88 the primer sequences are shown in bold type and underlining is used to indicate complete identity between primer sequences and E. coli rrsE gene sequences. The sequence of the E. coli rrsE gene is listed in SEQ ID NO:158. As shown in FIG. 88, the 1638, ER10, SB-1, SB-3, SB-4 primers correspond to sequences present on the sense strand of the 16S rRNA gene. The 1659, 1743 primers correspond to sequences present on the anti-sense strand of the 16S rRNA gene.

FIG. 89 provides an alignment of the E. coli rrsE gene (SEQ ID NO:158), the Cam.jejun5 gene (a rRNA gene from C. jejuni) (SEQ ID NO: 159) and the Stp.aureus gene (a rRNA gene from S. aureus) (SEQ ID NO:160). The location of the 1638, ER10, 1659 (shown as the complement of 1659), SB-1, SB-3, SB-4 and 1743 (shown as the complement of 1743) primers is indicated by the bold type. Gaps (dashes) are introduced to maximize alignment between the rRNA genes.

In procaryotes the ribosomal RNA genes are present in 2 to 10 copies, with an average of 7 copies in Escherichia strains. Any PCR amplification produces a mixed population of these genes and is in essence a “multiplex” PCR from that strain. The CFLP represents a composite pattern from the slightly varied rRNA genes within that organism so no one particular rRNA sequence is directly responsible for the entire “bar code.” In some cases these minor variations (bewteen rRNA genes; see, for example, minor variations between the E. coli rRNA gens in FIG. 88) cause shifts in the minor (lower signal) bands in the CFLP pattern, allowing discrimination between very closely related organisms. More dramatic sequence variations, found in most or all copies of these genes, are seen when more distantly related organisms are compared (see, for example, the extensive variations between the E. coli, C. jejuni and S. aureus rRNA genes in FIG. 89) and these larger differences are reflected in the CFLP patterns as more dramatic pattern changes. Despite the variable nature of these genes, the amplification by PCR can be performed between conserved regions of the rRNA genes, so prior knowledge of the entire collection of rRNA sequences for any microbe of interest is not required.

Three primers (TET-1638, TET-ER10, and TET-SB-4) were used for making the 5′ end fluorescently labeled fragments of the sense strand of 16S rRNA genes; two other primers (TET-1659 and TET-1743) were used for making labeled fragments of the antisense strands.

The predicted size of PCR products produced by amplification of 16s rRNA gene sequences from a variety of bacterial genera using the indicated primer pairs is shown in Table 6. In Table 6, the size of the predicted PCR product is based upon the known sequence of the 16S rRNA gene in the indicated species. The following abbreviations are used in Table 6: Dco (Desulfurococcus); E.co (E. coli), Cam (Campylobacter) and Stp (Staphylococus). The location of the PCR product relative to the sequence of the E. coli rrsE gene (see FIG. 88) is given in the last column. TABLE 6 Combinations of Primers for PCR Amplification of 16S rRNA Sequences Primer Sense Anti-Sense Labeled Size (bp) Position Pair Primer Primer Strand Dco E.co Cam Stp (E.co) A TET-1638 1659 sense 350 348 347   8-357 B TET-1638 1743 sense 1388 1365 1397   8-1395 C TET-ER10 1659 sense 254 254 263  104-357 D TET-ER10 1743 sense 1278 1292 1271 1303  104-1395 E 1638 TET-1659 antisense 350 348 347   8-357 F ER10 TET-1659 antisense 254 254 263  104-357 G TET-SB-4 1743 sense 208 208 1188-1395 H TET-1743 1638 antisense 1388 1365 1397   8-1395 I TET-1743 ER10 antisense 1278 1292 1271 1303  104-1395 J SB-4 TET-1743 antisense 208 208 1188-1395 K SB-1 TET-1743 antisense  305 297 296 296 1099-1395 L SB-3 TET-1743 antisense 208 208 208 1188-1395

PCR Amplification of 16S rRNA Sequences

The ability of each primer pair listed in Table 6 to amplify 16S rRNA gene sequences from each bacterial strain listed in Table 3 was examined. It is well known that commerical preparations of recombinant Taq DNA polymerase contain various amount of E. coli 16S rRNA gene sequences. In order to minimize amplification of contaminating E. coli 16S rRNA sequences during the amplification of bacterial DNA samples, AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD (Low DNA) (Perkin Elmer) was used in the PCRs. This preparation of Taq DNA polymerase is tested by the manufacturer to verify that less than or equal to 10 copies of bacterial 16S ribosomal RNA gene sequences are present in a standard 2.5 unit aliquot of enzyme.

Each primer pair (Table 6) was tested in PCRs. The PCR reactions contained 10 mM Tris-HCl (pH 8.3 at 25° C.), 50 mM KCl, 1.5 mM MgCl₂, 0.001% w/v gelatin, 60 μM each of dGTP, dATP, dTTP, and dCTP, 1 μM each of one 5′-TET labeled and one unlabeled primers, 2.5 units AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD. The reactions were conducted in a final volume of 50 μl using AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD, Lot E0332, or 100 μl volume using AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD, Lot D0008. The amount of genomic DNA added varied from 6 to 900 ng per PCR. Control reactions which contained no input bacterial genomic DNA were also run to examine the amount of 16S rRNA product produced due to contaminats in the AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD preparations.

PCR reactions were performed on PTC-100 Programmable Thermal Controller (MJ Research, Inc.). Two sets of cycling conditions were utilized. The first set of conditions comprised 30 cycles of 95° C. for 30 sec; 60° C. for 1 min; 72° C. for 30 sec; after the last cycle the tubes were cooled to 4° C. The second set of conditions comprised 30 cycles of of 95° for 30 sec; 60° C. for 1 min; 72° C. for 90 sec; after the last cycle the tubes were cooled to 4° C. Thus, the difference between the two cycling conditions is the length of time the reactions are held at the elongation temperature (72° C.). These two elongation times were tested because the predicted size of the 16S rRNA targets varied from 208 to 1388 bp depending on the primer pair used in the amplification.

As a rule of thumb, when the target to be amplified is less than 500 bp in length, a 30 sec elongation step is used; when the target is about 500-1000 bp in length, an elongation step of 30 to 60 sec is used; when the target is greater than 1 kb in length, the elongation is conducted for approximately 1 min per 1 kb length. While the first set of PCR conditions (30 sec elongation step) worked with the longer amplicons, the yield was lower than that obtained when the second set of PCR conditions (90 sec elongation) was used.

Following the thermal cycling, 400 l of formamide containing 1 mM EDTA was added to each sample and the samples were concentrated to a volume of 40 μl in a MICROCON 30. The samples (40 μl) were loaded on a denaturing 6% polyacrylamide gel (7 M urea, 0.5× TBE running buffer), that was prewarmed to 50-55° C. prior to the loading of the samples. The samples were run at 20 W for 20 min (200-350 bp fragments) or 40 min (more than 1 kb fragments). The gels were scanned using a Fluorescent Method Bio Image Analyzer Model 100 (FMBIO-100, Hitachi) with a 585 or 505 nm filter.

The results of these PCRs showed that each primer pair (Table 6) tested successfully amplified a fragment of the expected size. Thus the primer pairs shown in Table 6 are suitable for the amplification of end labeled DNA fragments using genomic DNA from variety of prokaryotes including archaea, gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, different species of the same genus and different strains of the same species. These PCRs also demonstrated that, although the amount of genomic DNA present in the PCR varied from strain to strain, the yield of the amplified product was always many-fold higher than the trace yield of product from the E. coli genomic DNA present in AMPLITAQ DNA polymerase, LD, seen in the reactions which contained no input bacterial genomic DNA.

f) Preparation of 16S rRNA Gene Substrates

To generate labelled PCR products corresponding to bacterial 16S rRNA sequences for use in CFLP reactions, the following primer pairs were used in PCRs.

1. The SB-1/TET-1743 pair was used to amplify an approximately 297 bp fragment from genomic DNA derived from Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591) and S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592). The resulting PCR product contains a 5′ TET-label on the antisense strand.

2. The TET-SB-4/1743 pair was used to amplify an approximately 208 bp fragment from genomic DNA derived from E. coli Stain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae 5 Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539). The resulting PCR product contains a 5′ TET-label on the sense strand.

3. The 1638/TET-1659 pair was used to amplify an approximately 350 bp fragment from genomic DNA derived from E. coli Stain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539). The resulting PCR product contains a 5′ TET-label on the antisense strand.

4. The TET-ER10/1743 pair was used to amplify an approximately 1292 bp fragment from genomic DNA derived from E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948) and Campylobacter jejuni subsp. jejuni (ATCC 33291). The resulting PCR product contains a 5′ TET-label on the sense strand.

5. The 1638/TET-1659 pair was used to amplify an approximately 350 bp fragment from genomic DNA derived from E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 13565), S. hominis (ATCC 29885), and S. warneri (ATCC 17917).

The PCRs were conducted as described in section (e) above. Two separate PCR reactions were performed using 0.2 μg of genomic DNA derived from Camylobacter jejuni subsp. jejuni (ATCC 33291) and the TET-ER1O/1743 primer pair. One reaction was conducted in a final volume of 50 μl and used an extension step of 30 sec at 72° C. during thermal cycling. The second reaction was conducted in a final volume of 100 μl and used an extension step of 90 sec at 72° C. The yield of PCR product produced in the second reaction was 76% higher (as compared to first reaction). Following the amplification reaction, the samples were processed for electrophoresis on denaturing polyacrylamide gels as described in sction (e) above. After electrophoresis, the desired bands were cut from the gel and eluted by placing the gel slice into 0.4 ml of a solution containing 0.5 M ammonium acetate, 0.1 mM EDTA and 0.1% SDS. The mixture was then incubated at 55° C. for 2 h and then at 37° C. for 12 h. The samples were concentrated to 25 μl using a MICROCON 30 (Amicon) and transferred into water using S-200 MICROSPIN columns (Pharmacia).

g) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

Cleavage reactions were conducted in a final volume of 10 μl volume containing approximately 0.2 to 1 pmole (as indicated below) 5′ TET-labeled DNA substrate, 10 ng CLEAVASE BN (Third Wave Technologies), 1× CFLP buffer and 0.2 mM MnCl₂. The reactions were first assembled as a 9 μl mixture lacking MnCl₂; this mixture was heated to 95° C. for 10 sec and then cooled down to the desired incubation temperature (45° C., 50° C. or 65° C.). Optimal reaction temperature fro each substrate was chosen based on even distribution of bands, and the presence of some undigested material to indicate representation of molecules all the way up to full length. Selected optimal temperatures for each substrate are indicated in the description of FIGS. 90-93 below.

The cleavage reaction was started by the addition of 1 μl of 2 mM MnCl₂. Following incubation at the desired temeprature for 2 min, the reaction was stopped by the addition of 10 μl of a solution containing 95% formamide, 5 mM EDTA, 5% glycerol and 0.02% methyl violet. Uncut or “no enzyme” controls were set up for each substrate as described above with the exception that H₂O was used in place of the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Samples (approximately 4 to 8 μl) were run on 6 to 12% denaturing polyacrylamide gels (19:1 cross link) with 7 M urea in a buffer containing 45 mM Tris Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA at 15 to 20 W for 9 minutes (specific gel percentages are indicated below in the descriptions of FIGS. 90-93). The gels were then scanned using a FMBIO-100 (Hitachi) with the 585 nm filter.

The resulting fluoroimager scans are shown in FIGS. 90-93. In FIG. 90, the cleavage products generated by cleavage of an approximately 297 bp 16S rRNA substrate generated using the SB-1/TET-1743 pair and genomic DNA derived from Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591) and S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592) is shown. Lanes 1-4 contain the products generated by incubation of the substrate derived from Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591) and S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592) in the absense of CLEAVASE BN enzyme, respectively. Lanes 5-8 contain the products generated by incubation of the substrate derived from Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591) and S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592) in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme, respectively. The CFLP reactions were performed using approximately 1 pmole of each PCR product and the cleavage reactions were incubated at 50° C. for 2 min. The cleavage products were resolved by electrophoresis on an 8% polyacrylamide gel, as described above.

The results shown in FIG. 90 demonstrate that distinct CFLP patterns are obtained using the Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948) and S. aureus subsp. aureus substrates. The same CFLP pattern was generated by cleavage of the two S. aureus subsp. aureus substrates (lanes 7 and 8); these two S. aureus subsp. aureus strains (ATCC 33591 and 33592) are considered different subspecies based upon differences in sesitivities to the antibiotics methicillin and gentamicin. Resistant or sensitivity to these antibiotics is not associated with mutation in the 16S rRNA gene; therefore it was not expected that different CFLP patterns would be observed using a 16S rRNA substrate.

The results shown in FIG. 90 show that the SB-1/TET-1743 pair can be used to generate substrates for CFLP analysis which allow the identification and discrimination of Desulfurococcus amylolyticus (DSM 3822), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948) and S. aureus subsp. aureus.

In FIG. 91, Panel A shows the reaction products generated by cleavage of an approximately 208 bp 16S rRNA substrate generated using the TET-SB-4/1743 pair and genomic DNA derived from E. coli Stain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539). The TET-SB-4/1743 pair amplifies a portion of the 16S rRNA gene located in the 3′ region of the gene (see FIG. 88).

The CFLP reactions shown in FIG. 91, Panel A were performed using approximately 0.7 pmole of each PCR product and the cleavage reactions were incubated at 50° C. for 2 min. The cleavage products were resolved by electrophoresis on an 8% denaturing polyacrylamide gel, as described for FIG. 90.

In FIG. 91, Panel B shows the reaction products generated by cleavage of an approximately 350 bp 16S rRNA substrate generated using the 1638/TET-1659 pair and genomic DNA derived from E. coli Stain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539). The 1638/TET-1659 pair amplifies a portion of the 16S rRNA gene located in the 5′ region of the gene (see FIG. 88).

The CFLP reactions shown in FIG. 91, Panel B were performed using approximately 1 pmole of each PCR product and the cleavage reactions were incubated at 45° C. The cleavage products were resolved by electrophoresis on an 8% polyacrylamide gel.

The lanes marked “M” in FIG. 91, Panels A and B contain plasmid pUC19 DNA digested with MspI and 3′ end labeled with fluorescein ddUTP using terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase as described in Example 10. This marker includes bands corresponding to lengths of 26, 34, 67, 110/111, 147, 190, 242 and 331 bp. Additional marker bands of 404, 489 and 501 bp are not visible in this figure. In Panel A, lanes 1-5 contain the uncut (i.e., no enzyme) controls and lanes 6-10 contain the cleavage products generated by the incubation of substrates derived from E. coli Stain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539), respectively. In Panel B, lanes 1-5 contain the uncut (i.e., no enzyme) controls and lanes 6-10 contain the cleavage products generated by the incubation of substrates derived from E. coli Stain K-12 (ATCC 14948), E. coli Strain B (ATCC 11303), E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), and Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539), respectively.

The lower molecular weight materials seen in the “uncut” lanes has been found to be due to degradtion of the gel-purified material after storage for several days in dH2O. This degradtion may be due to environmental nucleases that are active when EDTA is not present in the storage solution (i.e., the necessary metal ions may be present in trace amounts). This degradation is effectively supressed by inculsion of tRNA in the storage solution (see Example 21). The degradation seen in these uncut controls (Pane B, lanes 1-5) does not effect the CFLP results.

The results shown in FIG. 91 demonstrate that some regions of the 16S rRNA genes are more variable than others, and that analysis of these regions are particularly useful when comparing very closely related organisms. For example, substrates generated by the 1638/TET-1659 pair (which amplifies a portion of the 16S rRNA gene located in the 5′ region of the gene) can be used to generate CFLP patterns which distinguish not only between the DNA derived from the genera of Escherichia, Shigella, and Salmonella (Panel B, lanes 6-10), but which also creates distinct cleavage patterns from the DNA derived from the three strains of E. coli tested (i.e., strains B, K-12 and 0157: H7) (Panel B lanes 6-8).

In contrast, no substantial difference in CFLP patterns was observed between the strains of the Escherichia-Salmonella assemblage for DNA fragments produced using the TET-SB-4/1743 pair which generates an approximately 208 bp fragment located near the 3′ end of 16S rRNA genes (Panel A, lanes 6-10). This contrast in the degree of variation between the 5′ and 3′ regions of the 16S rRNA genes is consistent with the results reported by Widjojoatmondjo et al., supra, in which the comparisons between strains of the Escherichia-Salmonella assemblage were made by SSCP analysis.

Since each organism has mutiple copies of the 16S rRNA gene, and these co-amplify in each PCR, it was important to show that the products of different amplifications from the same organism produced the same cleavage pattern. In FIG. 92, the cleavage products generated by cleavage of an approximately 1292 bp 16S rRNA substrate generated using the TET-ER10/1743 pair in two separate PCR reactions from Campylobacter jejuni subsp. jejuni (ATCC 33291) are shown in lanes 2 and 3. For comparision, the same region amplified from E. coli Strain K-12 (ATCC 14948) is shown in lane 1. The CFLP reactions were performed using approximately 60 fmole of each PCR product and the cleavage reactions were incubated at 50° C. for 2 min. Reactions were stopped by the addition of 95% foramide, 5 mM EDTA, 5% glycerol and 0.02% methyl violet. The cleavage products were resolved by electrophoresis on a 6% denaturing polyacrylamide gel as described above.

The results shown in FIG. 92 demonstrate that very different CFLP patterns were generated using substrates from Gamma (Escherichia, lane 1) and Epsilon (Campylobacter, lanes 2 and 3) subdivisions of Purple bacteria, but that the same CFLP pattern was observed between the products of separate PCR reactions on the same genomic DNA (lanes 2 and 3).

In FIG. 93, the cleavage products generated by cleavage of an approximately 350 bp 16S rRNA substrate generated using the 1638/TET-1659 pair and genomic DNA derived from E. coli Serotype 0157: H7 (ATCC 43895), S. choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis Serotype typhi (ATCC 6539), Shigella dysenteriae Serotype 2 (ATCC 29027), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33591), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 33592), S. aureus subsp. aureus (ATCC 13565), S. hominis (ATCC 29885), and S. warneri (ATCC 17917) are shown in lanes 1-8, respectively. The CFLP reactions were performed as described above, using approximately 200 fmol of each PCR product; the cleavage reactions were incubated at 65° C. for 2 min. The cleavage products were resolved by electrophoresis on a 10% denaturing polyacrylamide gel as described above.

The results shown in FIG. 93 demonstrate that very different CFLP patterns were produced using DNA derived from strains representing Purple bacteria (lanes 1-3) and the Gram-positive phylum (lanes 4-8). A substantial difference between CFLP patterns was detected between the genera Escherichia (lane 1), Salmonella (lane 2), and Shigella (lane 3).

Additionally, a substantial difference between the CFLP patterns was detected between species of Staphylococcus aureus (lanes 4-6), hominis (lane 7), and warneri (lane 8). No substantial difference between CFLP patterns was observed between the three strains of Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus ATCC 33591 (lane 4), ATCC 33592 (lane 5), and ATCC 13565 (lane 6). These S. aureus isolates differ in reported antibiotic resistance, but are so closely related that the rRNA genes do not yet show divergence by CFLP analysis.

The above results demonstrate that CFLP analysis can be used to discriminate between bacterial genera as well as between different species and subspecies (depending on the region of the 16S rRNA gene used as the substrate). A comparison of the CFLP patterns generated within the same or similar genera (e.g., Salmonella, Shigella and E. coli) shows an overall similarity in the banding pattern with differences revealed as changes in a small subset of the bands. When the comparision is made across different genra (e.g., between E. coli and S. aureus) a more striking change in barcode pattern is evident indicating that CFLP patterns may not only be used to detect differences between organisms, but the degree to which the patterns change may be used to assess the degree of evoluntionary divergence between organisms.

Substrates for CFLP analysis were produced by PCR amplification using different sets of primers. Some primer pairs (sets) are reported to be universal for all procaryotic organisms; other primer pairs have been observed to be specific for representatives of lower taxons (See, PCT Publication WO 90/15157). Except for the primer sequences, no knowledge of the DNA sequence of the rRNA gene from any specific organism(s) is required for amplification and CFLP analysis of bacterial 16S rRNA genes.

Distinct CFLP patterns were observed between representatives of archeaea and eubacteria, different phyla of eubacteria, different phyla within eubacteria, different subdivisions of the same phylum, different genera of the same assemblage, different species of the same genus and different strains of the same species. Distinct signatures in CFLP patterns were found that allowed discrimination of pathogenic isolates, including those associated with food poisoning, from innocous members of the normal flora.

While the PCR products generated using genomic DNA from different organisms with the same set of primers are indistinguishable by their mobility during gel electrophoresis (on non-gradient polyacrylamide gels), the CLEAVASE BN enzyme cleaves these PCR products into shorter fragments thereby generating a characteristic set of cleavage products (i.e., a distinct CFLP signature). The pattern of cleavage products generated is reproducible; DNA substrates generated in independent PCRs from the same organism using a given primer pair yield the same pattern of cleavage products.

CFLP patterns can be generated using large DNA fragments (e.g., at least about 1.6 kb) and thus could cover the entire length of the bacterial 16S rRNA gene. CFLP can also be used in conjunction with shorter DNA fragments (about 200 bp) which are located at different positions throughout the 16S rRNA gene.

EXAMPLE 37 CFLP Analysis of Substrates Containing Nucleotide Analogs

The effect of using various nucleotide analogs to generate substrates for CFLP reactions was examined. As dicussed below, nucleotide analogs are used in PCRs for several reasons; therefore, the ability to analyze the modified products of PCRs (i.e., nucleotide analog-containing PCR products) by CFLP analysis was investigated. The 7-deaza purine analogs (7-deaza-dATP and 7-deaza-dGTP) serve to destabilize regions of secondary structure by weakening the intrastrand stacking of multiple adjacent purines. This effect can allow amplification of nucleic acids that, with the use of natural dNTPs, are resistant to amplification because of strong secondary structure (McConlogue et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16:20 (1988)).

Similiarly, the analog dUTP is often used to replace dTTP, but for different reasons. dUTP-containing DNA (this nomencature is shorthand for PCR products generated using dUTP; the actual PCR product will contain dUMP) can be destroyed by the enzymatic activity of uracil DNA glycosylase (UDG) while dTTP-containing DNA is untoched. When PCR products are produced containing dUMP in place of dTMP, UDG can be used in all subsequent reactions to eliminate false posirtive results due to carry-over from the earlier PCRs, without preventing amplification from the normal DNA of interest. This method is widey used in clinical laboratories for performing PCR and thus this method would be used by most clinical laboratories using PCR in conjunction with CFLP for pathogen typing. Thus, the ability of the CFLP reaction to suitably cleave dUTP-containing DNA fragments (i.e., produce strong reproducible band patterns) was examined.

For these comparisions, substrates corresponding to a 157 bp fragment derived from exon of of the wild-type and R422Q mutant of the human tryosinase gene were generated by PCR amplification using either 1) the standard mixture of dNTPs (i.e., dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP); 2) dUTP in place of dTTP; 3) 7-deaza-dGTP (d⁷GTP) in place of dGTP; and 4) 7-deaza-dATP (d⁷ATP) in place of dATP. These substrates were then incubated with CLEAVASE BN enzyme and the effect the presence of the various nucleotide analogs on the cleavage pattern was examined.

a) Preparation of Substrates Containing Nucleotide Analogs

A 157 bp fragment of the human tyrosinase gene (exon 4) was amplified in PCRs using the following pair: 5′ CACCGTCCTCTTCAAGAAG 3′ (SEQ ID NO:42) and 5′ biotin-CTGAATCTTGTAGATAGCTA 3′ (SEQ ID NO:43). Plasmids containing cDNA derived from the wild-type or R422Q mutant of the tyrosinase gene were used as template (see Example 10 for a description of these plasmids). The resulting double-stranded PCR products contain the 5′ biotin label on the anti-sense strand such that sequence detected in the CFLP reaction is SEQ ID NO:48 (wild-type anti-sense strand) or SEQ ID NO:66 (R422Q mutant anti-sense strand). All PCRs were conducted in a final volume of 100 μl. dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP and dUTP were obtained from Perkin Elmer; d⁷ATP and d⁷GTP were obtained from Pharmacia. Taq DNA polymerase was obtained from Promega. The PCR mixtures were assembled as shown below in Table 7. TABLE 7 Reaction Components (Stock) Aliquot (Final) Plasmid cDNA 4 ng/ul 1 ul 40 pg PCR Buffer¹ 10X 10 ul 1X Unlabelled primer 100 μM 0.25 μl 25 pmole Labeled primer 100 μM 0.25 μl 25 pmole dATP 10 mM 1 μl 100 μm dCTP 10 mM 1 μl 100 μm dGTP 10 mM 1 μl 100 μm dTTP 10 mM 1 μl 100 μm d⁷ATP² 5 mM 2 μl 100 μm d⁷GTP³ 5 mM 2 μl 100 μm dUTP⁴ 20 mM 4 μl 800 μm Taq polymerase 5 u/μl 0.5 μl 2.5 units dH2O to 100 μl ¹1X concentration contains 20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.5; 1.5 mM MgCl₂; 50 mM KCl; 0.5% TWEEN 20; and 0.5% NP-40. ²d⁷ATP completely substituted for dATP in the PCR. ³d⁷GTP completely substituted for dGTP in the PCR. ⁴dUTP completely substituted for dTTP in the PCR. Other nucleotides were present at a final concentration of 200 μm. In this reaction, the PCR buffer used was the 10X buffer (500 mM KCl, 100 mM Tris-Cl, pH 9.0, 1.0% TRITON X-100) provided by Promega. 25 mM MgCl₂ was added separately to a final concentration of 2.5 mM.

Wild-type and the mutant R422Q substrates were amplified using the natural and substituted nucleotide analogs listed above. For reactions containing the natural dNTPs, d⁷ATP and d⁷GTP, all reaction components were added together. Reactions containing dUTP were initially assembled without the polymerase (see below).

The assembled reactions were placed in a thermocylcer (MJ Research, Watertown, Mass.) that was preheated to 95° C. The tubes were allowed to incubate for one minute at 95° C. before amplification. The program was then set at 94° C. for 30 minutes, 50° C. for one minute, 72° C. degrees for two minutes for 34 cycles with a final 72° C. incubation for 5 minutes.

Reactions containing dUTP were performed with a “hot start.” All components except the polymerase were mixed, heated to 95° C. for 1 minute, then cooled to 72° C. Taq polymerase (2.5 units) was then added in 10 μl of 1× PCR buffer for a final volume of 100 μl.

At the end of the amplification, the PCR products were made 0.3M NaOAc, with the exception of reactions containing dUTP; the dUTP-containing reactions were brought to 2M NH₄OAc; all were then precipitated by the addition of 2.5 volumes (total aqueous volumes) of absolute ethanol. The DNA pellets were collected by centrifugation and then dried under vacuum. The pellets were resuspended in 10 μl of T10E0.1 buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0; 0.1 mM EDTA) and 10 μl of STOP solution (95% formamide, 10 mM EDTA, 0.05% each bromophenol blue and xylene cyanol) (20 μl T10E0.1 and 16 μl of STOP for the dUTP-containing reactions). The tubes were then heated to 85° C. for 2 minutes and the mixtures were resolved by electrophoresis through 10% (6% for dUTP) denaturing acrylamide gel (19:1 cross link) with 7M urea in a buffer of 45 mM Tris Borate, pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA.

The PCR products corresponding to the 157 bp substrate derived from the wild-type and R422Q mutant were gel purified as described in Example 21. The gel-purified DNAs were resuspended in T10E0.1 buffer using the following volumes: 40 μl for fragments containing only dNTPs; 40 μl for fragments containing d⁷ATP; 25 μl for fragments containing d⁷GTP and 25 μl for fragments containing dUTP.

b) Cleavage Reaction Conditions

The gel purified 157 bp tyrosinase substrates containing natural deoxynucleotides and nucleotide analogs were analyzed in cleavage reactions as follows. Final reaction mixtures comprised 1 μl of the resuspended gel-purified DNA (see section (a) above) and 25 ng CLEAVASE BN in 10 mM MOPS, pH 7.5 with 0.2 mM MnCl₂, and 0.05% each TWEEN 20 and NP-40 in a volume of 20 μl. No enzyme controls were assembled in which distilled water replaced the CLEAVASE BN enzyme. The subsutrate DNAs were distributed into reaction tubes and brought to a volume of 15 μl with H₂O. The remaining reaction components were mixed in a volume of 5 μl (i.e., at a 4× concentration). The DNAs were heated for 15 sec. at 95° C. to denature the DNA. The cleavage reactions were initiated by the addition of 5 μl of the enzyme/buffer mixture (the 4× concentrate). The cleavage reactions were incubated at 45° C. for three minutes, and the reactions were terminated by the addition of 16 μl of Stop solution (described in sction a). Seven microliters of each sample was heated to 85° C. for two minutes prior to loading onto a 10% denaturing acrylamide gel (19:1 cross linke), with 7M urea in a buffer of 45 mM Tris Borate pH 8.3, 1.4 mM EDTA. The gel was run at a constant 800 V until the bromophenol blue had migrated the length of the gel.

Following electrophoresis, the biotinylated fragments were detected as described in Example 10 with the exception that 4 μl of the SAAP conjugate was added to 100 ml of USB blocking buffer (1:25,000 dilution). After washing, 5 mls of CDPSTAR was used as the chemiluminescent substrate. The resulting autoradiogram is shown in FIG. 94.

In FIG. 94, the lanes marked “M” contain biotinylated molecular weight markers obtained from Amersham (Arlington Heights, Ill.) and include bands corresponding to lengths of 50, 100 and 200 nucleotides (size indicated by use of numbers and large arrowheads). Lanes 1-8 contain reaction products obtained by incubation of the substrates in the absence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme (i.e., no enzyme or uncut controls). Lanes 9-16 contain reaction products obtained by incubation of the substrates in the presence of CLEAVASE BN enzyme. Lanes 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 and 15 contain the wild-type substrate; lanes 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 and 16 contain the R422Q mutant substrate. The products shown in lanes 1, 2, 9 and 10 were generated from substrates generated using dNTPs in the PCRs. The products shown in lanes 3, 4, 11 and 12 were generated from substrates generated using dUTP in place of dTTP in the PCRs. The products shown in lanes 5, 6, 13 and 14 were generated from substrates generated using d⁷GTP in place of dGTP in the PCRs. The products shown in lanes 7, 8, 15 and 16 were generated from substrates generated using d⁷ATP in place of dATP in the PCRs. It can be seen from this example that modified DNA fragments are suitable for cleavage in CFLP reactions. Though the banding pattern is substantially different with these substitions, the wild-type and R422Q mutant DNAs are readily distinguishable in all cases.

While not limiting the invention to any particular theory, the changes in banding patterns observed when nucleotide analogs are utilized can be attributed to two sources. In all cases, but particularly in reference to the 7-deaza purines, the use of nucleotide analogs may substantially change the nature and stability of the intrastrand folded structures formed during the cleavage reaction. As a consequence, the locations of the cleavage sites would naturally shift. In addition, the substitution of the modified nucleotides may change the affinity of the cleavage enzyme for the folded cleavage structure, either strengthening or weakening cleavage at a particular site.

Examination of the variations seen between the wild-type and R422Q mutant when different analogs are used also shows that the use of these substituants can enhance the contrast between the varients. For example, with regard to the cleavage products of the two substrate DNAs (generated using dUTP or dTTP) in the region just above the 50 bp marker: one significant band that reduces in intensity between the wild-type and the mutant is more dramatically reduced in the dU-containing samples.

The results shown in FIG. 94 demonstrate that nucleotide analogs may be used for the generation of CFLP substrates. The substrates derived from the wild-type or R422Q mutant of the tyrosinase gene which contain nucleotide analogs produce distinct cleavage patterns which allow the discrimination and identification of the mutant and wild-type alleles.

This example demonstrates that even with 100% substitution with either 7-deaza-GTP for dGTP or 7-deaza-ATP for dATP, robust CFLP patterns are generated, although the precise sites of clevage are different in the dNTP-containing and 7-deaza- dNTP containing substrates. The above results also demonstrated that single base changes present within DNA fragments containing nucleotide analogs still inflence the folded structure sufficiently to cause cleavage pattern changes similar to those seen when DNA fragments lacking nucleotide analogs are analyzed using the CFLP assay.

From the above it is clear that the invention provides reagents and methods to permit the rapid screening of nucleic acid sequences for variations. These methods allow the identification of viral and bacterial pathogens as well as permit the detection of mutations associated with gene sequences (e.g., mutations associated with multiple drug resistance in M. tuberculosis or mutations associated with human disease). These methods provide improved means for the identification and characterization of pathogens. 

1-44. (canceled)
 45. A method for characterizing a nucleic acid molecule comprising: a) exposing a sample comprising a nucleic acid molecule to a composition comprising an isolated FEN-1 endonuclease and an isolated polymerase substantially lacking 5′ nuclease activity under conditions such that said nucleic acid molecule is altered; and b) detecting the alteration of said nucleic acid molecule.
 46. The method of claim 45, wherein said alteration comprises cleavage of said nucleic acid molecule.
 47. The method of claim 46, wherein said cleavage occurs by said FEN-1 endonuclease after said nucleic acid molecule is reacted with said polymerase.
 48. The method of claim 46, wherein said nucleic acid molecule is hybridized to a target nucleic acid molecule.
 49. The method of claim 45, wherein said exposing occurs under conditions permissive for primer extension by a polymerase.
 50. The method of claim 49, wherein said conditions permit exponential amplification of a target nucleic acid molecule.
 51. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid molecule is DNA.
 52. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid molecule is RNA.
 53. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid is cDNA.
 54. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid molecule contains a nucleotide analogue.
 55. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid molecule is from a pathogen.
 56. The method of claim 48, wherein said target nucleic acid is synthetic.
 57. The method of claim 56, wherein said target nucleic acid is produced by amplification.
 58. The method of claim 57, wherein said amplification comprises a polymerase chain reaction.
 59. The method of claim 56, wherein said pathogen is a virus.
 60. The method of claim 59, wherein said virus is hepatitis C virus.
 61. The method of claim 56, wherein said pathogen is a bacterium.
 62. The method of claim 45, wherein said sample is serum.
 63. The method of claim 45, wherein said sample is tissue.
 64. The method of claim 45, wherein said nucleic acid molecule is attached to a solid support.
 65. The method of claim 45, wherein said nucleic acid molecule comprises a label.
 66. The method of claim 65, wherein said label comprises a fluorescent label. 